Home

Access Manager 2000 User Manual

1. KEY W available ga available in some revisions not available standalone CSUs 551VST type CSU configuration option List 1 A List 1 B List2 4016 R 4016 L1 4016 L2 Installed and Operational E E E Retrieve Performance Data E E E E a a Retrieve Far End Performance Data E E Enable Alarm Reporting E E Enable Remote Configuratio E E E E E BER Threshold m E E E E E Repeater Loopback Timeout E E E a Enable Far End Pollin E E E a EnableTransparent Mode Oo E E E E Use FCC Part 68 Rule Only E E a Ei E AIS Not Signal Loopback E E E a AIS Not ESS Keep Alive E E E Enable Alarm Latch E E Enable PRM 4 4 Ld Enable Span Side B8ZS Encode E E E Enable Span Side B8ZS Decode E E E a Regenerate CRC to Span Side 7 7 7 Span Side ESF Framing ih E Enable YELTranscode to Span 4 4 d Enable EQP Slide B8ZS Encode E Access Manager 2000 User Manual 5 61 Configuring the T1 Network KEY gy available g available in some revisions not available standalone CSUs 551VST type CSU configuration option List 1 A List1 B List2 4016 R 4016 L1 4016 L2 Enable EQP SIde B8ZS Decode E Regenerate CRC to
2. Equipment Message 551 VST List 1 SPAN INBAND LOOPED 551 VST List 1 A 4016 List 1 SPAN INBAND LOOPED 551 VST List 1 B SPAN NEAR END LOOPED 551 VST List 2 4016 List 2 SPAN LOOPED 4016 R SPAN LOOPED NCC orTAG NET LED flashes amber If the LLB at the far end is activated by sending the inband loopback code from the near end CSU the near end 551VST List 1 A List 2 and 4016 List 2 activate their network NET Far End Looped LEDs when inband loop up code is received back at the near end CSU This indicates that the far end CSU or network is looped back to the near end CSU Note Releasing the far end LLB by any method except sending an inband loop down code does not extinguish the span i e network far end looped LED If a far end LLB is activated by a Data Link message the far end CSU will not respond to an inband loop down code RLB Repeater Loopback When a repeater loopback RLB is in effect the signal from the EQPT is looped back to the EQPT through the CSU repeater Since the looped signal passes through all CSU circuitry except the network input and output transformers the RLB EQPT is useful in testing the operation of the CSU locally The CSU always passes the EQPT signal intact to the network during RLB Access Manager 2000 User Manual Procedures for loopbacks Activating Deactivating CSU loopbacks After an operator defined time the RLB is deac
3. Figure 5 2 NC E node The NC E node includes up to 5551V MLS shelves Each shelf has one SIM and up to 10 4016 R CSUs NC E NCEE shelf 551V MLS shelves 4202 QI 4202 OF SASO J 910F yova Q SANSI A 910 yova QI SASO X 910t 4202 QI A A 2 a a Q Q nA an Figure 5 3 551 VST ML List 1 node This is the CSU shelf configuration with an NMC List 1 Controller or the NMC List2 Controller without NMC phase II firmware The 551VST ML List system has one 551VST MLB Multiline Basic shelf with or without the 551VST MLE Multiline Expansion shelf and contains up to 28 Model 4016 List 2 CSUs 551VST ML List 1 NMC 4016 List 1 or 2 CSUs 4 551 VST MLB shelf List 1 14 eac 4016 List 1 or 2 CSUs lt _ 55IVST MLE shelf 14 eac optional Access Manager 2000 User Manual 5 3 Configuring the T1 Network Figure 5 4 551VSTML List 2 node The 551VST ML List 2 node includes the old List 1 or new List 2 shelf with a List 2 controller and Phase IINMC software to permit automatic alarm reporting 551VST ML List 2 NMC 4016 List 1 or2 CSUs 551VST MLB shelf List 2 14 eac 4016 List 1 or 2 CSUs _ 55IVST MLE shelf 14 eac optional A configuration of one or two stand alone 551 VST MLE expansion shelves at a location can also be configured as this type of node and should be configured for Data Link access i e far end only Some rules
4. 7 1 Alarm set delay time NET Loopback alarm ready 7 Y Alarm clear delay time Alarm clear delay time for LOF 10 Press F5 to return to previous menu Here you decide how many errors in how short a time period are excessive and worth defining an alarm condition Defining alarm conditions Alarm conditions are designed to alert you to conditions that can negatively affect service on the T1 line From a functional point of view alarm conditions actually include alarms performance alerts and events a Alarms imply that something is out of service or broken a Performance alerts indicate that line service is degraded Usually a user specified threshold has been exceeded a Events include loopbacks An alarm condition from setting a loopback lets you know preventatively that you are putting part of the line out of service These distinctions are not reflected in the registers nor do they need to be They re only made to give you an understanding of the wide range of conditions which solicit alarms To define alarm conditions follow these steps 1 Set the EQP BER Bit Error Rate threshold and the NET BER threshold 5 78 Access Manager 2000 User Manual trouble second definitions EQP EQP Configuration Options for AS2000 and ConnecTI1 Plus The NET BER threshold is the maximum bit error rate allowed for signals coming from the network The EQP BER threshold is the maximum bit error r
5. Yellow Alarm See ANSI T1 403 Reviewing DIU statu This section covers status and revision levels for the DIU 2130 DIU 2140 and DIU 1130 All associated screens show the circuit element number shelf slot and type DIU name associated DS1 circuit name and current DIU hardware and firmware revisions Additional status information also appears for each EQPT data channel i e data port of the current DIU Field Value Meaning Near End Looped No A loopback is not in progress on an EQPT channel that is data port of the near end DIU Far End Looped No A loopback is not in progress on an EQPT channel that is data port of the far end DIU Sending Loop Up No A loop up code is not being sent to the far end DIU to activate a channel that is data port loopback there Sending Loop Down No A loop up code is not being sent to the far end DIU to deactivate a channel that is data port loopback there Sending Test No The DIU is not currently applying a test Pattern signal to an EQPT channel that is data port Runnign BER Test No A bit error rate test is not currently in progress on the DIU Access Manager 2000 User Manual 8 21 Monitoring and Troubleshooting Access Manager 8 22 Field Value Meaning BER Error Counter 0 No bit errors were recorded by the DIU during a bit error rate BER test BER XX The bit error rate XX calculated by the DIU after
6. See Electronic Programmable Read only Memory Any type of equipment that is connected to the node controller TAC TIU or DIU An ELB is a loop which sends the signal from the equipment back to the equipment When the ELB is in affect the equipment signal is not sent out to the line and does not pass through the CSU circuitry A second during which pulse stuffing or a keep alive signal was applied to the network See Equipment See Equipment A second with one or more ESF error events Access Manager 2000 Manual Term Definition Error Free Second Errored Seconds Line Errored Seconds Path ES ES L ES P ESF ESF Facility Data Link ESF Error Event Event Log Extended Superframe Format A second with no detected errors The number of seconds with one or more Code Violation Lines See CV L The number of seconds that a bipolar violation occurs on the DS 1 T1 line See CV P See Errored Seconds See Errored Seconds Line See Errored Seconds Path See Extended Superframe Format The ESF Facility Data Link is used in ESF circuits to transmit framing performance report messages PRMs error events and loopback controls The ESF Facility Data Link uses 4 kbps of bandwidth to transmit data An event that occurs when an ESF contains either a CRC 6 error event or an Out of Frame event Each time a system event occurs such as a system start up shut down log in log off start or
7. Access Manager 2000 User Manual Testing CSU These signals are either framed or unframed depending on how you configured the NCC or TAC in the Enable Testing Options screen when you configured the CSU Furthermore how you configured the NCC or TAC determines whether these inband test signals are permitted at all e 1 in 8 ONEs A stress pattern with a single pulse in every 8 bit sequence This signal checks a circuit s ability to function under low density conditions e 3 in 24 ONEs A stress pattern containing three pulses in every 24 bit sequence It tests the ability of a circuit to function under extremely low density conditions e Quasi random Signal QRSS A 229 _ 1 randomized bit sequence modified according to AT amp T TR 54016 This signal exercises the circuit with a varying pattern of ONEs and ZEROs If the QRSS is applied unframed it is limited to 14 consecutive ZEROs If applied framed it is limited to 15 consecutive ZEROs e ALL ONEs A keep alive signal sent in the desired direction Whichever test signal is chosen if it is sent toward the net then the equipment receives an AIS All ONEs signal After selecting a test operation the CSU Test Options screen appears CSU Test Options Test Duration 15 SEC To Network or Equipment N E N Test From Far End Y N N Press F5 to initiate test Press FZ to return to previous menu Enter the Test Duration i e the period of time for which to apply th
8. An acronym used for labeling the number of volts on an alternating current For example 32 Vac 32 volts on alternating current An acronym used for labeling the number of volts on a direct current For example 32 Vdc 32 volts on direct current The number of bits or characters in a word which is usually determined as a convenient size for processing storages or transmission Word length is often based on the register size and internal operation of a computer Access Manager 2000 Manual A 19 A 20 Term Definition Yellow Alarm Yellow Alarm Transcoding Zero Code Suppression A Yellow Alarm is the alarm a receiving channel bank or multiplexer sends to the other end of the circuit when it detects a loss of signal or loss of frame There is a 2 to 3 second integration period upon detection of loss of signal or loss of frame before a yellow alarm is sent to the far end equipment This condition is also referred to as a remote alarm or remote alarm indication In the Superframe format a yellow alarm consists of Bit 2 of all 24 channels set to zero In ESF format the yellow alarm is a repeating pattern of eight ONEs followed by eight ZEROs transmitted over the ESF Data Link When a DS1 signal undergoes framing format conversion from SF D4 to ESF or ESF to SF an existing yellow alarm must be transcoded to the new format so that the alarm can be detected by the network or DTE equipment An integration time is used
9. Press f or ist char Enter to select Esc to cancel These screens generally allow Level through Level 3 users to view and list items but not to delete or archive them If you have LEVEL4 access you can edit an existing user name password and access level To edit a user definition 1 From the Revise User Definitions screen select Edit The Select User to Edit screen appears This screen not illustrated here shows the existing user names passwords and access levels 2 Use the directional keys to select a user name 3 Press Enter The screen labeled Edit User Definition now appears Edit User Definition User name LEVEL4 Passuord TEST Access level 4 Press F5 to save definition 4 Make the changes you want To save the changes press CF5 To abort the changes press CF2 Access Manager 2000 User Manual 4 27 Configuring Access Manager Reviewing and archiving events logs Each time a system event occurs a record is made in the database System events include system start up system shutdown user log in user log out m the start and finish of scheduled data polling for each node and circuit element Access Manager lets you view list or archive Event Log Records From the Utilities Menu select Event Log The Review System Events screen appears Review System Events TEE view system events List print system events Archive archive system events Press f o
10. Press t or ist char Enter to select Esc to cancel select one of the following options e 1 Hour USER data e 1 Hour TELCO data e 24 Hour USER data e 24 Hour TELCO data The appropriate screen will appear To access AS2000 performance registers 1 In the On line Access sub menu select the Perf Data Retrieve option and press Enter The following screen will appear CSU B DIU 2132 Select element to retrieve data from Press f or 1st char Enter to select Esc to cancel 2 Select the CSU option 8 30 Access Manager 2000 User Manual Displaying Telco and User data LS Note SMDS CSU capability provided by the DIU 2132 is discussed in a separate manual You are presented with the Retrieve performance data screen Retrieve performance data 1 Hour USER data 1 Hour Additional data 1 Hour EQP data 1 Hour TELCO data 24 Hour USER data 24 Hour Additional data 24 Hour EQP data 24 Hour TELCO data Press ft or 1st char Enter to select Esc to cancel Tom OPP 3 Select one of the EQP or network options listed and press Enter The screen which appears will display either 1 hour o r 24hour data for the first circuit element defined in the access range The presentation format is identical for all registers The columns displayed are appropriate to the type of register set selected If data for some registers are not available typically because the circuit eleme
11. Table E 4 551VST List 2 Alarm Bit Definition Alarm Bit Description 0 Far BER exceeded Alarm 1 Far SPAN LOS Alarm 2 Far DTE Low Density Alarm 3 Far LLB or PLB Looped Alarm 4 Far ELB or RLB Looped Alarm 5 6 Not used 7 Far CSU Absent Alarm 8 Near BER Exceeded Alarm 9 Near SPAN LOS Alarm 10 Near DTE Low Density Alarm 11 Near LLB or PLB Looped Alarm 12 Near ELB or RLB Looped Alarm 13 15 Not used E 6 Access Manager 2000 User Manual Table E 5 NC E Alarm Bit Definitio Alarm Archive Record Layout Log Alarm Bit Description 0 Far BER exceeded Alarm 1 Far SPAN LOS Alarm 2 Far DTE Low Density Alarm 3 Far LLB or PLB Looped Alarm 4 Far ELB or RLB Looped Alarm 5 6 Not used 7 Far CSU Absent Alarm 8 Near BER Exceeded Alarm 9 Near SPAN LOS Alarm 10 Near DTE Low Density Alarm 11 Near LLB or PLB Looped Alarm 12 Near ELB or RLB Looped Alarm 13 15 Near CSU Absent Alarm Table E 6 NC E Alarm Bit Definition Alarm Bit Description 0 8 Not used 9 CSU Fuse Blown 10 14 Not used 15 SIM Absent Alarm Access Manager 2000 User Manual E 7 Table E 7 NC E Alarm Bit Definition Alarm Bit Description 0 8 Not used 9 NC E Powered Up 10 15 Not used Table E 8 SIM Alarm Bit Definition Alarm Bit Description 0 Far BER exceeded Alarm 1 Far
12. Always insert and secure the connector module into the shelf backplane before inserting its circuit element Failure to do so may cause equipment failure Notes All notes provide useful information about Access System 2000 in general or about an operation An example is shown below Note Atthis point Access Manager does not poll the DIU 2132 for PLCP and L2_PDU performance data to deposit into the database Tips Tips provide information which may simplify or expedite an operation An example is shown below To disable alarm reporting during excessiveBPV ES or UAS errors set their threshold values to 0 Access Manager 2000 User Manual Conventions used in this guide Check Boxes Check boxes are used with checklists and sequential lists Verilink recommends that you photocopy these lists and use them each time you attempt to execute a sequential operation A check box with a check mark indicates that the instruction may not be necessary or may have already been done earlier J Check Box A Check Box with Check Mark Other conventions The following conventions are used to reference special keys keystroke combinations or other information Special keystroke s combinations are shown as lt F5 gt or E5 to press the F5 function key lt CTRL gt lt PgUp gt to press and hold the CTRL key and then depress the PgUp key Some people are familiar with the lt ENTER gt key and some with t
13. EOP Speed saei eA seesess pees sass yevecteseravodpeesuseete Shee T dt jeveorepsasene 5 96 64K Modes senda a ii naa i eee ea IE as 5 96 LOOP sha sovtecrssbivceseoseceieceds A A cebat ieee ivtrorneeiiorsiertienee 5 96 Scramble orni aaa a ise thes AE EE RE 5 96 FOP Clo E e aaee eE OH EE E E R sin E 5 96 EQP Handshaking sisien sanne eser EEr eer oE rE aS 5 97 Loss OF Signal gceo a eino re a a E EEs 5 97 Ejable TU eicssss sess cssscscgegssasteedesbssssgctssescs ka EEEo st sug ses dabdeuSetesvertesanasvedoens 5 98 DIU 2140 Configuration ccc cseceeceseeeeceseeeeceseseeeeseeseecaeecaecaseaeeaeenees 5 98 Installed and Operational 0 ec ceeeseceeceeceseeeeeeeeeseeseecaeceesseeeeeeees 5 99 Save Configuration to DIU oo eee cece ee cree cee ceseesecseseceeceeenseeseees 5 99 Connected CSU Shelf and Plug Numbers 0 0 eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeenes 5 99 Channel Assignment siiis reren E EE EEEE EEES SRE ES 5 99 Mod sa R ETE E EE A EEEE E aT 5 99 Baud R te naera e e a e a a 036 5 101 ASYDCHLOMOUS 35 E EE ETT 5 101 DIU Configuration Error Messages seeesseeeeeseeeerrerereererrerrreersreeen 5 102 Configuring Circuits sescent 5 102 Defining NeW CircUlt rieien a sh eor ea TE EEE a Eain 5 103 Circuit NaMe irai a a REE aE aE a eai 5 104 From DST Pont ieas irre tee e E EE EEA 5 104 To DSI Point siris E agate E E EEES 5 104 COMMONS eseri ros eia a eE e a a a a 5 105 Editing a circuit definition oo eee cece ese cssececese
14. ESL Exceeded ES Exceeded Yellow Alarm Press FZ to return to previous menu Y Y Y Y N Y Y N N N ZZZCCZCECECKEE This screen displays the currently running test or if no test is currently running the results of the previous test e Test The first line shows the type of test signal currently being applied and the direction of the signal e Elapsed Time The amount of time which the screen has been displayed Access Manager 2000 User Manual 8 57 Monitoring and Troubleshooting Access Manager 10 11 Test Time Remaining This line shows time in hours minutes and seconds hh mm ss that the CSU will be generating the test signal When the timer reaches 00 00 00 the test generation will be disabled and error counting will stop Looped Indicates which near end loop is in effect LLB PLB ELB or RLB Although different loopbacks may be used concurrently only the relevant loop to the CSU test will be displayed Errors This shows the number of errors which the NCC CCC or TAC has detected in the incoming test signal Lower Screen Section Shows the monitored condition of the received signal This screen only shows what type of error is occurring it does not indicate what is causing the error A green N under the current column indicates that no errors are occurring for the listed condition A red Y indicates a testing or error condition Press CF2 to return to the SelectTest Activity screen Th
15. Editing a node e The modem is configured for Modem Call Answer e The phone line is connected to the proper modem jack e The jack type is correctly configured in the modem Direct Connection If a direct connection is used between Access Manager and the desired network node verify that the connecting cable is wired correctly and that the proper COM port is defined in the Configuration Node screen ComDesign Multiplexer Connection If a ComDesign Multiplexer is used verify that the Comline is set for access arrangement of ComDesign or automatic configuration Also verify that the access circuit between the near end multiplexer and the multiplexer at the node is operational and that the multiplexer ports are configured correctly It is important that you review your Comline configuration and installation A node definition can be edited any time after it has been added to the Access Manager database The following steps show you how to edit a node 1 From the Main Menu type C to select the Configuration Menu 2 Select the Revise Node Definitions option by typing N The screen labeled Configuration Node appears 3 Type E to select the Edit Node Definitions screen A Select Node to Edit screen similar to the one shown below now displays the first 5 40 Access Manager 2000 User Manual Node Name Configuring nodes eleven nodes in the Access Manager database in alphanumeric order Select Node to Edit Location Eq
16. Loopback alarm ready TY Alarm set delay time Alarm clear delay time Alarm clear delay time for LOF 10 Press F5 to return to previous menu First an explanation of thresholds and interval counts Access Manager 2000 User Manual 5 79 Configuring the T1 Network TIP dIE An interval is a 15 minute 900 second segment of time and there are 96 intervals in 24 hours An Interval Count is defined as the time window within which you want to count trouble seconds It includes the number of intervals you specify plus the current interval you re in A Threshold is the maximum number of trouble seconds allowable in an Interval Count It takes the length of the configured Interval Count to clear an alarm These are the default values Type of Trouble Interval Count Threshold Second 0 96 intervals 0 900 trouble seconds ES L BPVs 1 25 ES CRC 6 errors 1 25 UAS 1 10 If the interval count is 0 then e only the current interval is used to determine if the Threshold is exceeded and e the alarm is cleared at the end of the current interval To disable alarm reporting during excessiveBPV ES or UAS errors set their threshold values to 0 3 To report turn on the alarm relay when a loopback toward the NET is either activated or cleared set the NET Loopback Alarm Relay option to YES default The alarm relay is a 3 pin terminal strip surrounded by bri
17. See AT amp T54016 Far end CV L Events Register 8 38 Access Manager 2000 User Manual Activating Deactivating CSU loopbacks The Code Violations Line register See ANSI T1M1 3 These registers are not available for reset in the AS2000 or ConnecT 1 Plus CSU circuit elements a Far end CV P Events Register The Code Violations Path register See ANSI T1M1 3 These registers are not available for reset in the AS2000 or ConnecT 1 Plus CSU circuit elements CAUTION Resetting the 17 hour and 24 hour User Performance Data Registers affects the collection of data stored in the Performance Data Log If you do not record this operation in your network management notebook you are likely to interpret the Performance Data Log incorrectly 3 Perform one or more of the following e If you want to reset the selected registers in the first CSU in the range press CF5 e Ifyou want to reset the selected registers for all the CSUs in the range press CF6 e If you want to return to the previous menu without resetting registers press CF2 When you press CF5 or CE6 a reset warning message appears Confirm that you want to reset the registers and clear the data If the selected set of registers to test are not equipped an error message to that effect appears after you confirm the reset by typing Y 4 This completes the Reset User Registers procedure Activating Deactivating CSU loopback This section deals with a
18. The default setting is YES for ESF framing When the Enable YEL Transcode to Network option is enabled YES it allows the CSU circuit element to detect an SF D4 yellow alarm on the EQP side and transcode it to ESF format on the network If the EQP uses SF framing the yellow alarm is B2 0 in all 24 channels If this alarm is detected for 400 1 milliseconds it is transcoded to an ESF yellow alarm on the ESF Data Link If the incoming signal from the EQP is ESF the time for the CSU to detect the yellow alarm and start transcoding it is 63 to 66 milliseconds Access Manager 2000 User Manual 5 69 Configuring the T1 Network Enable EQP Side B8ZS Encode and Decode Regenerate CRC to EQP EQP Side ESF Framing Enable YEL Transcode to EQP Idle Code Flags Yellow alarm transcoding to NET should be enabled any time the EQP and network framing are not the same and transcoding is desired This option has a default of NO These two options control whether the equipment EQP side is encoding the signal toward the EQP and decoding the signal received from the EQP for B8ZS If AMI Alternate Mark Inversion line coding is required select NO This is the default setting This option determines whether the CRC is regenerated toward the equipment EQP from the NET If the NET is SF i e D4 and the EQP isESF set this option to YES The default setting is NO not to regenerate CRC Refer to the CAUTION under the R
19. When selecting B8ZS coding first be sure the network is compatible with B8ZS which introduces intentional bipolar violations into the transmitted DS1 signal Call the telephone company to confirm this Set this option identically at both ends of the circuit Otherwise enter NO which will select AMI coding default setting If the equipment uses SF framing and the network uses ESF select YES to ensure proper handling of CRC 6 codes toward the network by the CSU This is the default setting If both the equipment and network use ESF set this option to NO disabled If the equipment uses D4 framing and the network uses ESF select YES default setting to allow the CSU to transcode an SF D4 yellow alarm to an ESF yellow alarm on the ESF Data Link If both the equipment and network use the same type of framing select NO to disable yellow alarm transcoding When disabled yellow alarms are passed through without being transcoded Yellow alarm is also known as Remote Alarm Indication Signal RAIS The Signal to EQP on NET Errors option is functionally similar to the Signal to NET on EQP Errors option previously described See warning in that section The default is YES signal Access Manager 2000 User Manual 5 87 Configuring the T1 Network Signal to EQP on NET LOF Signal to EQP on NET LOS NET RCV Jitte BUF 40 Bits Data Link Idle Code Idle code Flags Power up Near End Self Test Loopback Enable Thi
20. 7 6 TCOCO 7 5 Performance data records analysis 7 9 Performance Database 8 39 Performance database 7 1 Performance Log 7 3 8 39 record formats E 12 poll far end status 5 81 port 1 10 Ports built in D 12 network management 4 18 print selected data 7 14 Printer serial 4 20 Access Manager 2000 User Manual ndex 3 Index type 4 6 Query and alarm paths Access System2000 5 15 RAI 5 97 real time system clock 4 2 regenerate CRC toward EQP 5 83 regenerate CRC toward network 5 87 Register type 5 76 repeater loopback timeout 5 81 5 82 5 83 5 84 respecify exception threshold 7 14 Retrieve perf data 5 63 perf data 5 76 7 10 retrieve far end performance data 5 63 retrieve performance data 5 76 S Self Test AS2000 CSU 5 88 send inband loop down code 8 47 send inband loop up code 8 47 Setting the system date and time 4 2 Shelf type AS2000 node 5 15 signal to EQP on network LOS 5 88 signal to EQP on network OOF 5 88 signal to network on EQP errors 5 84 5 87 signal to network on EQP OOF 5 84 Single line CSUs 551VST List1 1 8 551VST List1 A 1 8 551VST List2 1 8 span side B8ZS encode decode 5 68 Statistical multiplexer 1 10 Statistical multiplexer 4 19 adding node 5 40 statistical routing 4 19 status 8 19 Status and alarm conditions 1 3 Status and alarm conditions equipment loopback 1 3 low density 1 3 repeater loopback 1 3 Status codes Accumaster C 2 terse
21. Plus node It allows you to perform diagnostic tests on a circuit connected to the node You can apply a DS1 test signal from an NCC 2020 or CSU 2010 to the associated circuit for testng You can similarly apply a test signal to EQPT i e data port channels of a DIU 2130 or DIU 2140 for path verification The functions under the Database Access menu allow the processing of DS1 performance data stored in the Access Manager database It has the following major branches Database Access Menu Report Archiv Report This command analyzes and reports on the performance data stored for selected network elements over a selected date and time range through the use of standard filters or user selected thresholds Archive This command allows you to print performance data records export them to a spreadsheet or database system or delete them 1 20 Access Manager 2000 User Manual Chapter 2 Installing Access Manager This chapter provides instructions for installing Access Manager It also describes the host personal computer and peripheral equipment requirements for Access Manager operation Equipment Installation Minimum System Requirements Before installing Access Manager verify that your system meets the requirements listed below These basic system requirements have been tested and are known to be compatible with Access Manager These are the minimum system requirements for Access Manager Parameter Requi
22. Result code display SW3 down Codes are displayed Q0 amp W Character echo SW4 down Characters not E0 amp W echoed in command state Auto answer SW5 down Disabled S0 0 amp W Carrier detect and data set SW6 up Reflects actual result of amp C1 amp S1 amp W read attempt to connect TELCO jack type SW7 up RJ 11 RJ 41S amp JO amp W Note 2 RJ 45S SW7 down RJ 12 RJ 13 amp J1 amp W Command recognition SW8 down Enabled Internal jumper set to Command Recognition Communications standard at SW9 up Bell 212A B1 amp W 1200 bps Response to DTR transition SW10 up Hangs up and goes to Set by SW1 option when SW1 is up command state NOTE 1 Factory position indicated by boldface NOTE 2 Position of SW7 depends on the type of phone jack used Most installations use an RJ 11 jack SW7 up B 4 Access Manager 2000 User Manual TABS Protocol Configuration TABS Protocol Configuration The switch configurations for a Hayes Smartmodem TM 1200 or 2400 connected to a CSU or Controller operating in the TABS mode are detailed inTabl eB 3 Modem Configuration forTABS Protocol on page B 6 The modem at the Access Manager end should be configured per Table B 1 Modem Configuration for OSI Protocol DTR Lead on page B 3 For further information see the user manual for the modem Note that the CSU or Controller is limited to 1200 baud when configured for TABS The following CSUs and Controllers will only work in the
23. The following screen appears Choose register set for data analysis User registers ADDITIONAL NET Verilink registers EQP EQP Verilink registers Press f or ist char Enter to select Esc to cancel Use the procedures to select the performance data you want You must begin with the first step in this procedure to ensure that the Performance Data Analysis Reports are compiled properly 7 2 Access Manager 2000 User Manual Reporting performance data The Performance Data Analysis procedure is divided into thirteen steps The steps are grouped into the following categories Step 1 deals with selecting a register for data analysis Steps 2 through 5 deal with choosing filters for the performance data Steps 6 and 7 deal with setting the date and time range for the S User or P User filters Steps 8 and 9 deal with choosing the network elements and circuits Steps 10 through 12 deal with choosing performance data filters distinction is made between the bar chart analysis and other performance filters Steps 13 through 15 deal with editing the performance data filter options Step 1 deals with selecting a register for data analysis 1 Access Manager reports performance data as records that are stored in a log called the Performance Database Access Manager collects DS1 performance data at 12 hour intervals and stores it in the log The intervals are specified by the Performance Data Polling Hou Telco registers ar
24. To return to the On line Access Menu press F2 24 hour data screens A 24 hour register screen looks like this AS26808 24 Hour USER Performance Data CSU 1 CSU type ASZ 80 CSU Element SIGMAL1 1 Circuit NOT SPECIFIED Number of Valid Intervals 96 Number of Seconds in Current Interval 591 Total ESF error events 65535 Interval starts at ES UAS BES SES LOFC ES L SEFS current interval O 16 19 58 585 8 8 8 598 1 16 04 58 a 988 B a 900 2 15 49 50 a 980 8 a 908 3 15 34 50 900 z 9898 4 15 19 58 a 988 8 a 988 5 15 04 50 900 a 9898 6 14 49 50 a 988 2 a 988 This screen also has a 24 hour 14 34 56 308 8 8 8 6 309 total not shown here Press f l Home End PgUp PgDn to browse F8 to print Itdoe not include the current PgUp PREV CSU PgDn NEXT CSU lt FAR CSU NEAR CSU 15 minute interval 24 hour total 65 535 seconds 8 32 Access Manager 2000 User Manual Displaying 24 Hour Performance Data Bar Charts You can view the last 96 15 minute intervals The 24 hour summary is always shown in the last row Getting around in the screens Use the following keystrokes to travel between screens To do this Use these keystrokes Scroll up one row at a time Scroll down one row at a time Go to the beginning Go to the en Go to the next page of data in this screen HECUCCE Go to the previous page of data in this screen
25. definition Circuit Name Configuring circuits Comments You can add up to four lines of comments with up to thirty characters allowed on each line The first line should describe the circuit because this line appears in the description column during circuit selection Once your circuits are defined you can change them with the Edit Circuit Definition option From the Configuration Menu proceed as follows 1 Type E toselect Edit Circuit Definition The Select Circuit to Edit screen appears along with the first page of circuits Select Circuit to Edit From DS1 point To DS1 Point LA SAN JOSE CIR 1 L A ST 1 SAN JOSE MLS E1 SAN JOSE Li A MLS 8 SAN JOSE L1i A SAN JOSE MLS 8 SAN JOSE TO SF CIR 1 SAN JOSE MLS 18 SAN FRANCISCO MLI2 SAN JOSE SAC CIRCUIT SAN JOSE MLS Z SACRAMENTO ML L1 1 Press Home End PgUp PgDn ft or to browse Enter to select Esc to cancel 2 Use the directional keys to reach the circuit you wish to edit After positioning the cursor on that circuit press to display the Edit Circuit Definition screen for that circuit Edit Circuit Definition Circuit name LA TO ATLANTA CIRCUIT 1 From DSi point LA CONTROL CENTER To DS1 point NC E CONTROL ALT 5 18 Comments tee eee eee tee eee eee Press F5 to save defintion Access Manager 2000 User Manual 5 105 Configuring the T1 Network 3 Make any required changes as described in the Adding a Circuit Defin
26. each data record uses up to a maximum of 150 bytes of memory and each event record uses 58 bytes of memory As the number of records allocated for a particular type are filled up the oldest records are deleted to make room for the new records The space used on the hard disk for data records alarm records or event log records can be freed by using the Archive option This option allows you to store records to diskette and or delete the records entirely Each of these three types of records data alarm event log has associated DATand KEY files To decrease a record s associated DAT and KEY files to minimum size and thereby release disk space all records of a type for example all alarm records must be deleted from the database To minimize the space used for data collection the program stores only records that are non ZERO Access Manager 2000 User Manual 2 3 Installing Access Manager Software Installation This section provides instructions for installing Access Manager 2000 software on your host PC s hard disk The Access Manager software is provided on two diskette sets a a3 5 inch 720 kilobyte density diskette set and m a5 25 inch 1 2 Mb density diskette set Both diskette sets have identical content The INSTALL EXE program file is on Diskette bf either disk set Use the one which fits your floppy drive When you install Access Manager 2000 the following files are copied to your hard disk Table 2
27. elements hardware is the time the alarm report is detected by the AS2000 type node if AS2000 CSU is near end It is important to note that the AS2000 type node s date time clock is synchronized to Access Manager s clock every time the node is polled Therefore if the node is not set for polling the date time clocks stamps in its reports may be invalid eS Note The screen response in this option can be slow if the number of active or deactivated alarms is large Listing active alarms The List Active option prints a list of active alarm records to the report printer To print a list of active alarm records to the report printer 1 Starting from the Main Menu select Alarm Status The Alarm Status Review Alarm Log Database screen appears 2 From this screen select List The active records will be sent to the report printer Printing all alarms The Print A11 option prints all the alarm records including the deactivated alarm records to the report printer To print all alarm records to the report printer 1 Starting from the Main Menu select Alarm Status The Alarm Status Review Alarm Log Database screen appears 2 From this screen select Print The active records will be sent to the report printer Access Manager 2000 User Manual 6 7 Alarm reporting Archiving inactive alarms To archive inactive alarm records 1 Starting from the Main Menu select Alarm Status The Alarm Status Revie
28. or to NO if it uses AMI Alternate Mark Inversion The default setting is NO AMI coding If the CSU is used with one or more DIU 2130s DIU 1130s and or DIU 2140s this option is ignored by the non drop and insert CSU To correctly process CRC 6 codes set this option to YES if the equipment EQP framing mode is ESF and the network framing mode is SF If both the equipment and network use ESF framing set this option to NO The default setting is YES Access Manager 2000 User Manual 5 83 Configuring the T1 Network Enable Yellow Alarm Transcode to EQP Signal to NET on EQP Errors Signal to NET on EQP LOF This option allows the CSU to convert an SF yellow alarm all B2 bits ZERO from the network to an ESF yellow alarm repetitive 11111111 00000000 bit pattern on the ESF Data Link If the network uses SF framing and the equipment EQP uses ESF framing select YES If the CSU is used with one or more DIU 2130s DIU 1130s and or DIU 2140s such as drop and insert choose NO Otherwise set this option to NO default setting If you want the CSU to continue sending the signal from the equipment to the network even after detecting the EQP side signal has excessive BER set this option to YES The default setting is YES CAUTION Setting this option to NO causes an out of service condition during excessive BER It begins when the BER threshold is exceeded and lasts as long as the condition persists wi
29. performance database choose archive option 7 15 select alarm to deactivate 6 3 select loopback activity 8 44 select minimum threshold s 7 6 specify element to receive loopback 8 44 8 50 Modem Hayes protocol 4 21 Modem Configuration B 1 Hayes Smartmodem 2400 B 1 initialization B 2 OSI Protocol B 1 TABS protocol B 5 N NCC 5 85 NCC and TAC configuration 5 77 NCC 5 88 NCC and TAC configuration 5 76 5 77 5 81 5 82 5 83 5 84 5 85 5 86 5 87 5 88 5 89 5 90 DIU timing 5 91 enable PRM 5 82 EQP distance equalization 5 83 network 5 85 network B8ZS 5 87 regenerate CRC toward network 5 87 Network 1 3 definition and description 1 3 Network configuration 1 2 network framing 5 86 network keep alive 5 86 network line coding 5 87 NMC L1 CSU configuration 5 44 NMC L2 CSU configuration 5 44 Node access failure 5 39 comments 5 36 dual line 1 6 Index far end 1 5 1 17 multiline 1 6 near end 1 5 single line 1 5 0 Online access operations 1 17 Options archive 2 3 P Q R Performance alerts see Alarm conditions 5 78 Performance Data analysis 7 14 7 18 Performance Database 7 3 7 15 Performance Data analysis change Y axis range 7 15 respecify filter 7 14 respecify date time range 7 14 Performance data analysis filters ACPCP 7 6 bar chart 7 6 CSCPCP 7 5 DDS 7 5 ENDS 7 5 FCOCO 7 6 HCDS 7 5 LCPCP 7 5 MCPCP 7 5 OCOCO 7 5 P User 7 6 S User
30. select Archive The Archive Performance Database Choose Archive Option screen appears Performance Database Choose archive option print records Cuith delete option Archive copy records to a disk file Cwith delete option Delete delete records WITHOUT ARCHIVING Press f or 1st char Enter to select Esc to cancel 3 From this screen select Delet The Choose Register Set to be Archived screen now appears 4 Select the register type whose performance data records you want to delete EQPT and Additional register types are not present nor reported for 551 VST type circuit elements A Select Archive Cutoff Date screen appears Select archive cutoff date Ending month 1 thru 12 Ending day C 1 thru 31 23 Ending year C4 digits Press F5 to accept entered data Press F2 to cancel archive 5 Enter the month day and year four digits of the date up to which you wish to delete the performance data records The default date is the current date 6 Press CF5 to accept the date displayed or enter a new date Press E2 to cancel the request 7 A warning message appears to confirm the deletion process The Delete option erases performance data records from the database that is log without saving them Type Y to continue with deletion or press any other key to cancel deletion 8 This completes the deletion of performance data records of the type selected 7 20 Access Manager 200
31. slot numbers and pressing CE5 A Select DIUTest Activity screen appears Select DIU 213 Test Activity Send test pattern Stop sending test pattern View Test Status Results View Tests in Progress Press ft or 1st char Enter to select Esc to cancel 3 Choose the Send Test Pattern option in the Select DIUTest Activity screen by typing A or highlighting this option and pressing Access Manager 2000 User Manual 8 59 Monitoring and Troubleshooting Access Manager 4 Select the data port on which to send the PRBS For a DIU 2130 or DIU 1130 this can be Port 1 or 2 A warning message appears 5 Press Y to begin testing The selected data port is now placed out of service and the PRBS is applied to it All other data ports are unaffected and continue to operate normally 6 To stop sending the PRBS select the Stop Sending Test Pattern option from the Select DIUTest Activity screen The data port is now restored to normal service 7 To view tests in progress select the Stop Sending Test Pattern option The DSU Tests in Progress screen appears DSU Tests in Progress Nodename shelf plug Port 1 Starts at Port 2 Starts at CSU 1 651 17 27 13 Press FZ to return to previous menu 8 60 Access Manager 2000 User Manual Testing DIUs 8 To view DIU test results select the Stop Sending Test Pattern option The DIU 2130 Test Status screen appears slot number shelf number Node name DIU 2130 Test
32. 1 Access Manager Installation Files 2 4 Access Manager 2000 User Manual LE Installing a new Access Manager system Software Installation Two working files are generated during Access Manager operation The files function as transaction files for various program functions and to allow restoration of the database in case of power loss or a computer reset They are E L L Note Refer to the README DOC file on Access Manager Diskette 1 for last minute information and any restrictions placed on the Access Manager revision being installed Use the following procedure if you are installing Access Manager for the first time and if you have never installed Access Manager on your host PC To install a new Access Manager system 1 Insert Diskette 1 into drive A or another floppy diskette drive 2 To access that drive type A or the other disk drive name and press Enter 3 Atthe A prompt type INSTALL and press Enter The INSTALL program s main menu then appears 4 Select the Database Stats option and verify that you have at least two megabytes of space available on the hard disk 5 After verifying disk space the INSTALL program s main menu reappears Select the Install option 6 Respond to the subsequent prompts to complete the installation of Access Manager in the AM2000 directory 7 Before starting Access Manager you must verify the location and content of your CONFIG SYS file Ver
33. 2000 User Manual E 1 E 2 Table E 1 Event Log ID Number Codes Event ID Descripti 0 System start up 1 System shut down 2 User login 3 User logout 4 Polling node 5 End polling node 6 Node connection failed 7 Rescheduled polling 8 Get node ID failed 9 Get node status failure 10 Polling element 11 End polling element 12 Get ES data failure 13 Get UAS data failure 14 Get BES data failure 15 Get SES data failure 16 Get AIS data failure 17 Get LOS data failure 18 Get YEL data failure 20 Polling terminated by user 22 Get LOF data failure 23 Get ES L data failure 24 Get SEFS data failure 25 Get OOFS data failure 26 Get Network OOFS failure 27 Get LOSS failure Access Manager 2000 User Manual Alarm Archive Record Layout Log Event ID Descripti 28 Get AISS failure 29 Get BERS failure 30 Get Remote AISS failure 31 Get LOFS failure 32 Get DTE ES failure 33 Get DTE ES L failure 34 Get DTE LC V failure 35 Get DTE OOF failure 36 Get DTE Low Density Seconds failure 37 Get DTE BERS failure Alarm Archive Record Layout Log Access Manager stores the alarm records by archiving the alarm database After being archived the fields which are changed into integers in the alarm archive record are separated by commas The record layout of the alarm archive record is as shown in the following tables Table
34. 2000 node or Access Manager 2000 User Manual 8 53 Monitoring and Troubleshooting Access Manager 8 54 from 1 to 2 in each ConnecT1 Plus node For this test this CSU is the near end CSU Enter the plug in slot number i e the number of the circuit element of the NCC or TAC This number depends on the shelf number selected above and is within the range below Press CF5 to accept the shelf and slot plug numbers e Multiline Shelves 1 to 13 e Dual line Shelves 1 to 2 The Select CSUTest Activity screen appears Select CSU Test Activity Send 1 8 Test Pattern Send 3 24 Test Pattern Send QRSS Test Pattern Send ALL ONES Abort Test in Progress View Test Status Results View Tests in Progress Press f or ist char Enter to select Esc to cancel 4 Select the desired option e To send a test signal select an option from A through D and continue Each of these test signals options are described in the following paragraphs e The NCC or TAC reports the error count to Access Manager during the test You can view the results of the test while it is in progress or after the test is completed To view results at any time continue with Step 11 e To abort a test continue with Step 7 Options A through D in the Select CSUTest Activity menu correspond to test signals that the NCC or TACmay apply to a DS1 circuit You can send each test signal toward either the equipment side or the network side of the NCC or TAC
35. 3 Monitoring and Troubleshooting Access Manager 2020 CCC 1020 There are some nomenclature differences in the model names and numbers between the CSUs and DIUs of the two products CSU DSU type CSU ModelName DSU Model Name AS2000 NCC 2020 DIU 2130 TAC 2010 DIU 2140 ConnecT1 Plus CCC 1020 DIU 1130 TAC 1010 No ConnecT1 Plus equivalent to DIU 214 The DIU 2140 is unique to AS2000 hardware Otherwise each element in the AS2000 line has a functional counterpart in the ConnecT1 Plus line The ConnecT1 Plus functional counterpart to the AS2000 CSU NCC 2020 is the CCC 1020 and so forth 551VSTtypenode includes 551VST type Single Line nodes SIM NC E 551 VST ML List 1 and 551 VST ML List 2 multiline nodes There are some functional differences among these systems Specific menus may be shown to point out these differences Selecting multiline circuit elements 8 4 You must access a circuit element before you can perform an operation on it Only the NC E and Access System 2000 multiline systems have shelf number and plug in unit range selection options A single line CSU circuit element does not have an Access Range option in its On line Menu Follow these steps to access a circuit element 1 Access Manager 2000 User Manual Select On line Access from the Main Menu When you get the On line Access Select Node screen select the node you want and press Enter You will be presented with the On line Acces
36. 4 If you are configuring a single plug use CID Qu and Ctr Goo to choose the targeted shelf and slot number 5 74 Access Manager 2000 User Manual Configuration Options for AS2000 and ConnecTI1 Plus The numbers in the top right area of this screen will indicate which slot you are targeting at any given moment Select ASZ 00 Element Type for shelf 1 PLUG 6 1 CSU 2 DIU 2138 3 DIU 2132 4 DIU 2146 Press t number or ESC Ctrl PgUp Ctrl PgDn for prev next circuit element 5 To configure a targeted CSU for anything but SMDS which by the way is discussed in a separate soon to be released manual select CSU The Select CSU Application screen will appear Select CSU Application 1 CSU 2 SMDS Press ft 4 number or ESC Select CSU and press Enter The CSU Configuration Options Menu appears showing the configuration options to be edited for the first NCC 2020 CCC 1020 TAC 2010 or TAC 1010 in the specified range Access Manager 2000 User Manual 5 75 Configuring the T1 Network Figure 5 14 Typical NCC or TAC configuration option menu AS26808 Options for CSU Edit Shelf 1 PLUG 1 1 131 Installed and Operational 7 Y NET LBO 6 7 5 15DB gt F8 Retrieve near perf datalF81 Y NET Density enforcement F8 12 802 Retrieve far end datalF81 7 N NET keep alive F8 AIS Save Configuration to CSU 7 Y NET framing format F8 ESF Enable Alarm Reporting F
37. 5 11 551VST Listl B CSU Options Menu on pa ge5 59 a Figure 5 12 S51VST List 2 CSU Options Menu on pa ge5 60 a Figure 5 13 NMC L1 with 4016 L2 CSU Options Menu on page 5 60 5 58 Access Manager 2000 User Manual Configuration Options for 551VST Elements Figure 5 10 551VST List 1 A Options Me Edit Options for 551UST LIST 1 A Installed and operational 7 Retrieve performance data 7 Retrieve far end performance data N Disabling this option also disables the indented options below it Press F5 to update circuit element Figure 5 11 551VST List1 B CSU Options Me Edit Options for 551UST LIST 1 B CSU xInstalled and operational 7 NI Enable span side B8ZS encode Retrieve performance data 7 Y Enable span side B8ZS decode Retrieve far end data 7 N Regenerate CRC to span side xEnable remote configuration N Span side ESF framing 7 16E BER threshold 4 9 gt 6 Enable EQP side B8ZS encode Repeater loop timeout Csecs gt 300 Enable EQP side B8ZS decode Enable far end polling 7 Regenerate CRC to EQP side Enable transparent mode N EQP side ESF framing 7 Use FCC part 68 rule only AISCnot SIGNAL loop back AISCnot ESS keep alive Enable alarm latch 7 x Disabling this option also disables the indented options below it Press F5 to update circuit element Access Manager 2000 User Manual 5 59 Configuring the
38. 5 44 Access Manager 2000 User Manual Configuring circuit elements 2 From the Configuration Menu select Element The Edit Element Select Parent Node screen now appears EDIT ELEMENT Select Parent Node Node Name Location Equipment Type NEW YORK SALES VERILINK HQ AS 2068 SEATTLE SALES VERILINK HQ 551UST LIST 2 Press Home End PgUp PgDn ft or to browse Enter to select Esc to cancel If this menu has no nodes listed then no nodes have yet been configured and you cannot access any elements to edit view list etc If this is the case go back and configure the node first 3 If nodes are listed select a parent node by moving the cursor to your choice and pressing Enter Depending on the type of node one of the Configuration Actions menus appears Figure 5 7 Configuration 551VST List 2 Menu Configuration 551UST List 2 edit circuit element definition View view circuit element definition List print circuit element definitions Press ft 4 or ist char Enter to select Esc to cancel Access Manager 2000 User Manual 5 45 Configuring the T1 Network Figure 5 8 Configuration 551VST ML List 2 Menu Configuration 551UST ML List 2 WJ select CSU range Edit edit circuit element definition Vieu view circuit element definition List print circuit element definitions Press ft or ist char Enter to select Esc to cancel Figure 5 9 Configuration AS2000 Me Configuration AS28080 Plug Note select
39. 6 9 Alarm reporting e To delete the alarm records type Y e To cancel deletion of the selected alarm records press any other key To print inactive alarms Printing inactive alarms 1 Starting from the Main Menu select Alarm Status The Alarm Status Review Alarm Log Database screen appears 2 From this screen select Archive The Archive Inactive Alarms Choose Archive Option screen appears 3 From this screen select Print The Select Archive Cutoff Date screen appears Select archive cutoff date Ending month CO1 thru 12 1 Ending day 61 thru 31 gt Ending year C4 digits gt Press F5 to accept date entered Press F2 to cancel archive 4 Enter the date of the last alarm record you want printed 5 Press CF5 to print the deactivated alarm reports in the selected range or press CF2 to abort printing 6 If you pressed F5 a prompt appears asking you to confirm that you want to delete the selected alarm records e To delete the alarm records type Y e To cancel deletion of the selected alarm records press any other key LS Note The Print option prints the inactive alarm records i e reports to the report printer and gives you the option of deleting the deactivated alarm records after they are printed 6 10 Access Manager 2000 User Manual Archiving inactive alarms To archive inactive alarms Archiving inactive alarms 1 Starting from the Main
40. 70 Regenerate CRE to EQP sscsssscoccesssds eves casetsecvascussssesivesseeseds ies sceedeagnaibentseasts TEO ree 5 70 EQP Side ESF Framing ii ake ated enie aie dl ii da Reise o a E bes 5 70 Enable YEL Transcode to EQP o ecceeccecsseesssessececesceceeseeeceaeeeceececesneeesesesenseaeeess 5 70 Idle Code Flags s isc ccscsclen rice hontai ene ae AN Neh eh aA 5 70 Configuration Options for AS2000 and ConnecT1 Plus Elements 20 0 eee eects 5 71 Getting to the CSU configuration screen o cee eseesecesceseeeeceeeeeeeeseeeneeseeeaeeaee 5 72 vi Access Manager 2000 User Manual Installed and Operational 0 0 eee seeessesecsseceeceseeeceseeseceeeeeeceseeeeseneseaeeasenaesnes 5 76 Retrieve Near End Performance Data Retrieve Far End Data ee 5 76 Save Configuration to CSU woo cceceesecesceeeeeeceseeeeecaeeesecaeesaecsaesaecnsenseensennees 5 77 Enable Alarm Reportin g enaren E tA a repeater E REA TE 5 77 Defining alarm conditions e esssseeeseeeseeeseeseseessrtererrererrsrererreseressreeesesee 5 78 Poll Far Epad Status topes en a e n EAR E oea 5 81 RLB Loopback Time out esesssseeseessssesrsressreresreresresrrrrsrerrssrsresreesteserrrnrerenseeres 5 81 Enable PRM sscccssscesicveatos a ea E AE E I 5 82 AIS not SIG During Loopback s esesessseeeeessssssesessresssreersresresrseressrerrsreerereneses 5 82 EOP Distances e E E eid en eee 5 83 EQP Equipment Framing Format 0 0 0 cee ceeeseeeecesceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeenesseecn
41. 8H D 6 Access Manager 2000 User Manual Installing a Digi CHANNEL MC 4 or MC 8 and Editing Port No Comline Nam Port Addr IRQ kr Worn Status Mask 5 COM6 DBAOH 3H DBCOH 10H 6 COM7 DBA8H 3H DBCOH 20H 7 COM8 DBBOH 3H DBCOH 40H 8 COM9 DBB8H 3H DBCOH 80H Port Address RangeShared I O Status Port Address DB80H DBBFH DCOOH DC3FH BB80H BBBFH BCOOH BC3FH AB80H ABBFH ACOOH AC3FH CB80H CBBFH DBCOH DC40H BBCOH BC40H ABCOH AC40H CBCOH NOTE 1 Two DigiBoard DigiCHANNEL MC 4 and MC 8 boards are presently usable with Access Manager Refer to the appropriate hardware manual for port addresses IQRs shared I O addresses and status masks When two 2 MC 8 are used do not configure the built in serial port in Access Manage NOTE 2 Page 26 of the DigiBoard manual incorrectly lists the start address as BBOOH the correct start address is BB80H CAUTION Do not insiall software drivers provided by Digiboard for the MC 4 o MC 8 Since Access Manager has its own drivers for these boards using the Digiboard drivers will prevent Access Manager from working with the MC 4 or MC 8 Access Manager 2000 User Manual D 7 Installing a Digi CHANNEL PC 4 PC 8 or PC 16 and Editing A Comline The DigiBoard DigiCHANNEL PC 4 and PC 8 boards are designed for use in IBM PC XT and AT personal computers and AT amp T6386 The PC 16 provides up to 16 serial ports for Access Man
42. AT command set at 1200 2400 or 9600 for AS2000 equipment only baud If a combination of 1200 baud and 2400 baud call answer modems are connected to the computer install the 2400 baud modems with higher Comline numbers than the 1200 baud modems If answer only modems are connected install them with higher Comline numbers than the call answer modems If multiple modems are used for alarm reporting their phone lines should be installed by the telephone company or in a PBX direct inward dial as a hunt group This allows the hunt group master number to be used as an alarm report number for all nodes If you configure a Comline for 9600 baud that comline cannot be used to query a node configured for 1200 baud although on incoming calls to Access Manager a 9600 baud modem adapts to the baud rate 1200 2400 or 9600 of the incoming call Modem Answer Only Dial in call from a node only A Modem Answer Only Comline normally used wih INWATS lines uses the Hayege AT command set on a modem at 1200 2400 or 9600 baud ComDesign Mux X 25 PAD Connection to multiple nodes through a routing multiplexer such as a ComDesig nRS2000 Statistical Multiplexer Refer to the ComDesign Multiplexer manual for proper configuration of the multiplexer For use with AS2000 NCC 2020 only Access Manager 2000 User Manual 4 19 Configuring Access Manager Type of connection Description Autoconfig Access Manage automatically det
43. Access the previous CSU in the selected range Gaup Access the next CSU in the selected range Gana Display the registers of a CSU at the far end of First access the corresponding the ESF Facility Data Link near end CSU then press Displaying 24 Hour Performance Data Bar Charts The bar charts displayed and printed through this option graphically display the performance data registers for the past 24 hours of each register type To access bar charts 1 When you get the On line Access sub menu select a bar chart as follows If you are examining a 551 VST type CSU select Bar chart User or IXC TELCO Bar Chart e User performance data includes the ES UAS BES SES LOFC ES L and SEFS registers e IXC Telco performance data includes the ES BES UAS SES and LOFC registers Access Manager 2000 User Manual 8 33 Monitoring and Troubleshooting Access Manager If you are examining an AS2000 CSU select Bar Chart Displa The Retrieve Bar chart Data screen appears listing the groups of performance data registers which may be selected for bar chart display Retrieve Barchart Data 24 Hour USER data 24 Hour Additional data 24 Hour EQP data 24 Hour TELCO data Press f or ist char Enter to select Esc to cancel 2 Select one of the groups listed and press Enter e A 24 Hour USER data This bar chart shows the performance of the CSU registers including the ES UAS BES SES LOFC ES L and
44. COM2 and upward are then configured within Access Manager CAUTION The default configuration of Access Manager includes COM1 as a Comline Definition It must be deleted from the database wheneve using COM1 as the remote access port with ppANYWHERE When a modem is used with the remote access port and ppeANYWHERE is configured for a modem then pecANYWHERE automatically configures the modem Accumaster is anAT amp T network management system which can manage alarm messages from Access Manager When used together Access Manager sends alarms through a comport in an Accumaster protocol Setting this up requires the following Access Manager 2000 User Manual 2 13 Installing Access Manager a Physical connections between the host PC and xxx Your host PC must be running ppANYWHERE You must be using the largest 1000 Access Manager package You must use the Access Manager menus to set up a utility a Your AUTOEXEC BAT file must include the time zone variable TZ xSTn This must always accurately reflect the appropriate standard time or daylight savings time Time Zone Setup for Accumaster Since the alarms sent to Accumaster must be time stamped and include time zone an environment variable TZ must be set up in your AUTOEXEC BAT file The following line should be added to the AUTOEXEC BAT file prior to any batch command that automatically starts Access Manager SET xSTn where x and n are filled
45. Channel Data Circuit terminating Equipment Data Equipment Data Interface Module Data Interface Unit Data Link Data Port Data Service Unit See Superframe Digitally represented information which includes voice text video or facsimile 1 A common connection using one or more conductors by which data and timing information are conveyed between a related group of devices e g NCC DIU TIU 2 The means by which data and timing information are conveyed between a CSU and associated DIUs The backplane of each system shelf provides three data buses or 7 data buses with the MLS 2200 that can be assigned to individual CSUs for DIU interfaces The internal circuit path through the DIU including the data equipment and network assigned time slots Data CircuitTerminating Equipment incorrectly data communication equipment Equipment that is either part of the network an access point to the network a network node or equipment at which the network circuit terminates DIU 2140 DIM 22372 or possibly HLM 2035 depending on its configuration The customer s data equipment that is connected to a DIU 2130 or DIU 2140 for network transmission through an NCC or TAC for transmission over a T1 network A backplane interface module of a data interface Unit DIU in Access System 2000 which allows V 35 and other wiring formats to be connected from the customers equipment into the DIU A device that interfaces T1
46. Choose Option screen appears showing numerous options Choose option Print print selected data Date Time respecify date time range Thresholds respecify execption thresholds y axis change the Y axis range Press ft or ist char Enter to select Esc to cancel This screen is available when is pressed from Bar Chart Display or from the Select A Circuit Element or Circuit Element Detail screens Not all options appear for all analyses 14 Place the cursor on the desired option and press to select or gt to cancel Access Manager 2000 User Manual 7 13 Analyzing Performance Data 7 14 Access Manager 2000 User Manual If you select the Print Selected Data option the data printed depends upon what screen you were in when you pressed 8 If you were in the Select a Circuit Element screen a list of circuit elements is printed If you were in the Circuit Element Detail screen the detailed data for that circuit is printed Furthermore if you were viewing a bar chart you must reply to the Select Registers to Print screen before you can start printing Select Range Registers to Print Errored Seconds Unavailable Seconds Bursty Error Seconds Severely erroed Seconds Loss of Frame Counts Errored Seconds Line Severely Errored Framing Out of Frame Secons zZz Z Z ZZZZZ Press F5 to print registers If you select the Respecify Date Time Range option you are presented with the Date And Time Range Selection sc
47. Choose option print data y axis change the Y axis range Press t J or 1st char ENTER to select ESC to cancel Select the desired option Access Manager 2000 User Manual 8 35 Monitoring and Troubleshooting Access Manager Computing statistics 8 36 If you select Print the following screen will appear Select Registers to Print Errored Seconds NI Unavailable Seconds Bursty Error Seconds Severely Erroed Seconds Loss of Frame Counts Errored Seconds Line Severely Errored Framing Out of Frame Seconds N Press F5 to print registers N N N N N N Select the performance data registers you want to print by typing Y beside each and press CF5 to send the data to the on line printer If you select y axis then the following screen appears Enter Y axis range for report Lou Y value c88 thru 899 High Y value C61 thru 9 0 gt 948 Press F5 to accept range entered Press FZ to cancel and return to menu This option aids in viewing performance which changes within a narrow range Use these sub menus to access percentages of available and error free seconds for the circuit elements you select The User and Telco statistics displayed through these options include percentages of available seconds and error free seconds for the CSU circuit element s you select These statistics are calculated from the user or telco performance data available from the registers for the current 15 minute
48. D 3 Serial Ports for Everex Magic I O AT Multi O EV 170A EV 170 Comline Name Port Addr IRQ suey Vo Status Mask COM1 3F8H 4H OH OH Note 1 COM2 2F8H 3H OH OH COM3 3E8H 2H OH OH Note 2 COM4 2E8H 5H OH OH Note 2 NOTE 1 COM1 should be reserved for the built in serial port equipped on many computers NOTE 2 Only two COM ports are equipped on the EV 170A D 2 Access Manager 2000 User Manual Installing a Digi CHANNEL MC 4 or MC 8 and Editing Installing a DigiCHANNEL MC 4 or MC 8 and Editing a Comline Preparation The DigiBoard DigiCHANNEL MC 4 and MC 8 boards are designed for use in IBM PS 2 Micro Channel personal computers Each MC 8 board provides up to eight Comline ports The MC 4 boards provide up to four Comline ports Installing the Digi CHANNEL MC 4 or MC 8 board is a four part procedure 1 Preparation 2 Hardware Installation 3 PS 2 Configuration 4 Configuring Access Manager Each part is relatively simple in itself but you must perform all four procedures sequentially for your DigiCHANNEL MC 4 or MC 8 board to work Copy the DigiBoard supplied 6FE5 ADF and 6FE6 ADF files from your DigiWARE disk to your working copy of the Reference Diskette This disk is used later by the System Configuration procedure The ADF file contains the information that the system needs to automatically configure the Digi CHANNEL MC 4 or MC 8 board The ADF file is in the subdirectory C
49. D1 209 Near EQPT ELB looped D2 210 Near EQPT ELB looped cleared D3 211 Near EQPT RLB looped D4 212 Near EQPT RLB looped cleared D5 213 Near EQPT LOS alarm D6 214 Near EQPT LOS alarm cleared D7 215 Near EQPT RAI alarm D8 216 Near EQPT RAI alarm cleared D9 217 Near EQPT LOF alarm DA 218 Near EQPT LOF alarm cleared DB 219 Near EQPT AIS alarm DC 220 Near EQPT AIS alarm cleared DD 221 Near EQPTTest SIG alarm DE 222 Near EQPTTest SIG alarm cleared DF 223 Near EQPT low density alarm EO 224 Near EQPT low density alarm cleared Table C 8 AS2000 Far End Network Status Codes Status Codes hex Decimal Equivalent Description 12D 301 Far NET BER exceede 12E 302 Far NET BER exceeded cleared 12F 303 Far NET ES L alarm 130 304 Far NET ES L alarm cleared 131 305 Far NET ES alarm 132 306 Far NET ES alarm cleared C 8 Access Manager 2000 User Manual The Status Code Tables Status Codes hex Decimal Equivalent Description 133 307 Far NET UAS alarm 134 308 Far NET UAS alarm cleared 135 309 Far NET LLB loope 136 310 Far NET LLB loop cleared 137 311 Far NET PLB looped 139 312 Far NET PLB loop cleared 139 313 Far NET LOS alarm 13A 314 Far NET LOS alarm cleared 13B 315 Far NET RAI alarm 13C 316 Far NET RAO alarm cleared 13D 317 Far NET LOF alarm 13E 318 Far NET LOF alarm cleared 13F 319 Far NET AIS alarm 140 320 Far NET AIS alarm cleared 141 321 Far NET
50. E 2 Alarm Archive Record Layout for ESF CSUs on page E 4 and Table E 3 Alarm Archive Record Layout for AS2000 and ConnecT1 Plus on pag eE 5 Table E 4 551VST List 2 Alarm Bit Definition on page E 6 Table E 5 NC E Alarm Bit Definition on page E 7 Table E 6 NC E Alarm Bit Definition 2 on page E 7 Table E 7 NC E Alarm Bit Definition 3 on page E 8 Table E 8 SIM Alarm Bit Definition on page E 8 Table E 9 NC E Alarm Bit Definition 2 on page E 9 This table lists the SIM alarm bits for the 4016 when the plug in number is zero Table E 10 NMC List 2 Alarm Bit Definition 1 on page E 9 Access Manager 2000 User Manual E 3 a Table E 11 NMC List 2 Alarm Bit Definition 2 on page E 10 This table lists the NMC List 2 alarm bits for the 4016 L1 or L2 when the plug in number is zero LEE Note Ifthe Node type Field 11 of the reporting node is Access gt System2000 and the far end circuit element is 551VST type then the only far end alarm Status Codes Fields 13 27 reported are 301 302 311 312 313 314 409 and 410 Table E 2 Alarm Archive Record Layout for ESF CSU Field No Description 1 Year last two digits 2 Month 3 Day 4 Hour 5 Minutes 6 Seconds 7 Circuit element name i e node name shelf slot 8 Node ID number 9 Shelf number less than or equal to 128 if the alarms reported are set conditions Otherwise the alarms r
51. EQP E E E a EQP Side ESF Framing E m E E Enable YELTranscode to EQP E E Idle Code Flags a 7 a For a remote 4016 L1 you must set this option through the hardware Installed and Operational Retrieve Performance Data This option determines whether the circuit element is installed and operational This option marked with an asterisk must be set to YES to enable any of the subsequent options including collection of performance monitoring data alarm reporting and so on Before Access Manager will allow you to set this option to YES for the circuit element you must set the Installed and Operational option for the circuit element s parent node to YES The default setting is NO Performance data is stored in registers of CSU circuit elements Each CSU circuit element has registers to store data Access Manager can access these registers through the Retrieve Performance Data function Use the following conditions for setting this field Ifthe circuit element is accessed only through the ESF Data Link set this option to NO regardless if performance data is to be retrieved A CSU accessed only by the ESF Data Link is a far end CSU and it should have its data collected by the near end CSU a Ifthe CSU circuit element is a near end CSU set this option to YES if retrieval of near end or far end performance data is desired Setting Retrieve Performance Data to YE
52. Layout on page C 2 Node types 551 VST List 1 A 551 VST List 1 B and 551VST ML List 1 do not generate alarm records Do not use the terse alarm format for output to printers Access Manager 2000 User Manual C 1 The Status Code Tables The following tables contain status codes Accumaster Status Code Format Table C 2 S51VST List 2 Status Codes on pag eC 4 lists the S551VST List 2 status codes Table C 3 NC E Status Codes on page C 4 lists the NC E status codes Table C 4 SIM Status Codes on pa geC 5 lists the SIM status codes Table C 5 NMC List 2 Status Codes on page C 6 lists the NMC List 2 status codes Table C 6 AS2000 Near End Network Status Codes on page C 6 lists the AS2000 near end network status codes Table C 7 AS2000 Near End Equipment Status Codes on page C 8 lists the AS2000 near end equipment status codes Table C 8 AS2000 Far End Network Status Codes on page C 8 lists the AS2000 far end network status codes Table C 9 AS2000 Far End Equipment Status Codes on page 9 lists AS2000 far end equipment status codes Table C 10 Additional NCC 2020 Status Codes on pag eC 10 lists additional status codes The master CSU of each Access System 2000 reports separate status codes for the near end and corresponding far end NCC 2020s and TAC 2010s in that node Contact AT amp T for information on the Accumaster Integrated Alarm
53. Menu select Alarm Status The Alarm Status Review Alarm Log Database screen appears 2 From this screen select Archive The Archive Inactive Alarms Choose Archive Option screen appears 3 From this screen select Archive The Select Archive Cutoff Date screen now appears Select archive cutoff date Ending month CO1 thru 12 Ending day 1 thru 31 gt Ending year C4 digits Press F5 to accept date entered Press F2 to cancel archive 4 Enter the date of the last alarm record you want archived 5 Press CE5 to archive the deactivated alarm reports in the selected range or press F2 to abort archiving 6 If you pressed CF5 the Select Drive screen appears and prompts you to specify the disk where the file is to be written Select drive Which drive do you want to write on i Enter the letter of the drive that you will use to write the archive files Press F5 to accept or FZ to cancel archiving You can archive the alarm records to any drive installed in your system If the drive selected is the drive on which Access Manager is running the archived files are placed in the Access Manager database directory If any other drive is selected the files are placed in the root directory of that drive Enter the drive letter and press Enter or press CF2 to cancel archiving Access Manager 2000 User Manual 6 11 Alarm reporting LS Note f the drive selected is the drive on which Acces
54. NEW YORK SALES SEATTLE SALES VYERILINK HQ VERILINK HQ Press Home End PgUp PgDn ft or to browse Enter to select Esc to cancel If this menu has no nodes listed it means that no nodes have been configured yet 3 Select the circuit elements parent node The menu that appears depends on the type of node The menus are e 551VST ML List 2 Configuration 551UST ML List 2 Select Edit View List Press t J or ist char Enter to select Esc to cancel select CSU range edit circuit element definition view circuit element definition print circuit element definitions e Access System 2000 Configuration ASZ0 8 Plug Select Edit Delete Vieu List Confg Press t 4 or ist char Enter to select Esc to cancel 5 48 Access Manager 2000 User Manual select shelf and PLUG range edit circuit element definition delete circuit element definition view circuit element definition print circuit element definitions display AS28008 configuration Configuring circuit elements 4 Choose the Select option The Select xxx Range data entry screen appears where xxx indicates the type of parent node This is a typical CSU range selection menu Select Shelf and PLUG range Shelf number From PLUG number 1 To PLUG number zZ Press F5 when selections are completed 5 One or more CSUs or plugs in a shelf may be selected If more than one is selected Ctrl Gaup and Ctrl Qana allow access to each of the
55. SPAN LOS Alarm 2 Far DTE Low Density Alarm 3 Far LLB or PLB Looped Alarm 4 Far ELB or RLB Looped Alarm 5 6 Not used 7 Far CSU Absent Alarm 8 Near BER Exceeded Alarm 9 Near SPAN LOS Alarm 10 Near DTE Low Density Alarm 11 Near LLB or PLB Looped Alarm 12 Near ELB or RLB Looped Alarm 13 14 Not used 15 Near CSU Absent Alarm E 8 Access Manager 2000 User Manual Table E 9 NC E Alarm Bit Definition Alarm Archive Record Layout Log Alarm Bit Description 0 8 Not used 9 CSU Fuse Blown 10 11 Not used 12 SIM Absent Alarm 13 15 Not used Table E 10 NMC List 2 Alarm Bit Definition 1 Alarm Bit Description 0 Far BER exceeded Alarm 1 Far SPAN LOS Alarm 2 Far DTE Low Density Alarm 3 Far LLB or PLB Looped Alarm 4 Far ELB or RLB Looped Alarm 5 6 Not used 7 Far CSU Absent Alarm 8 Near BER Exceeded Alarm 9 Near SPAN LOS Alarm 10 Near DTE Low Density Alarm 11 Near LLB or PLB Looped Alarm 12 Near ELB or RLB Looped Alarm 13 14 Not used 15 Near CSU Absent Alarm Access Manager 2000 User Manual E 9 Table E 11 NMC List 2 Alarm Bit Definition 2 Alarm Bit Description 0 8 Not used 9 Power Supply A Failure 10 Power Supply B Failure 11 Power Supply C Failure 12 Power Supply D Failure 13 NMC L2 Powered Up 14 15 Not used Performance Data Log Performance Database The Performance Log Database stores
56. See Node Controller Near En This refers to a circuit element that is accessed locally by Access Manager i e does not require the ESF data link Network The DS 1 T1 transmission medium provided by a telephone company or other provider for use by customers This can be twisted pair cables and line repeaters a higher level digital multiplexer fiber optic system or other carrier facility Network The equipment that provides the NCC connection to the network The Interface NI is normally equipped with a jack connector or punch down block NI See Network Interface NMS Network Management System e g Access Manager 2000 Node A location where one or more pieces of equipment interconnect transmission lines ISO A physical device that allows transmission of data onto a network e g Access System 2000 Node Access Type The particular type of connection between Access Manager and the Node Controller Node Controller and Channel Service Unit NCC node being addressed The circuit in the NCC that performs operator control and interface operations An AS2000 circuit element providing both node controller and channel service unit functionality The node controller provides ASCII craft interface and thumbwheel interface for local management and RE 232 interface for Access Manager 2000 management Access Manager 2000 Manual Term Definition O P On line OOF Out of Frame Out of Frame Second Parity
57. TABS mode a SSIVST List 1 1 A 1 B a 551VST ML List 1 Controller a 551VST List 2 in TABS mode installed in Access Manager as a 551 VST 1 B CAUTION The 551VST List 2 CSU should always be configured to perform automatic configuration during power up Otherwise a service interruption may occur Access Manager 2000 User Manual B 5 Table B 3 Modem Configuration for TABS Protocol transition when SW1 is up command state Parameter Smartmodem 1200 Option Smartmodem 2400 AT Switch Position p Command DTR status ignored SW1 down Ignores DTR amp DO amp W Result code format SW2 down Number VO amp W Result code display SW3 up Codes are not displayed Q1 amp W Character echo SW4 down Characters not echoed in E0 amp W command state Auto answer SW5 up Enabled S0 1 amp W Carrier detect SW6 up Reflects actual result of amp C1 amp S1 amp W attempt to connect TELCO jack type Note 2 SW7 up RJ 11 RJ 41S amp JO amp W RJ 45S SW7 down RJ 12 RJ 13 amp J1 amp W Command SW8 up Disabled Internal jumper set to recognition disable command recognition Note 3 Communication standard SW9 up Bell 212A B1 amp W at 1200 bps Response to DTR SW10 up Hangs up and goes to Set by SW1 option recognition NOTE 1 Factory position indicated by boldface NOTE 2 Position of SW7 depends on the type of phone jack used Most installations use an RJ 11 jack SW7 up NOTE 3 The interna
58. a BER test was completed on an EQPT channel that is data port Handshake signals TxD RxD RTS CTS DCD Y high signal N low signal YorN YorN YorN YorN YorN YorN YorN Transmit Data Receive Data Data Terminal Ready Data Set Ready Ready To Send Clear to Send Data Carrier Detect when this has a value of Y the line is up and running V 54 Leads TM Y present N absent YorN YorN YorN Refers to the data channel loopbacks on the DI U2130 at the local node the node to which the DTE sending LL is connected Refers to the data channel loopbacks on the DI U2130 on the far end of the network connection This is set high Y by the DIU 2130 upon successfully activating LL or RL to notify the DTE of its current state Reviewing TIU statu This section covers revision levels for the TIU 2850 and TIU 1850 Access Manager 2000 User Manual Displaying individual circuit element status In the following screen the status indicators show the source of timing for the TIU AS28006 TIU 2858 Status Element Z Element type TIU 2858 Element SAN JOSEL1 2 Firmuare V 4 Hardware V 8 Frequency i EQP Clock NO NET Clock NO DIU NO EXT TTL NO EXT 422 NO Two clocks NO Ctrl PgUp Ctrl PgDn for prev next circuit element a Ifboththe EXT TTL and EXT 422 lines on the screen are NO and the Frequency line indicates Nx56kbps or Nx64kbps then the TIU is timing
59. all of the information about how the DS1 T1 line is performing The database archive file uses the LOTUS 1 2 3 import format each item is separated by a comma Each line in the archive file represents one interval for one circuit element Table E 12 Database Archive Files Formats on pag eE 10 From left to right the data items on each line are Table E 12 Database Archive Files Formats Item User data EQPT data Additional data 1 Interval timestamp YEAR Interval timestamp YEAR Interval timestamp YEAR 2 Interval timestamp MONTH Interval timestamp MONTH Interval timestamp MONTH 3 Interval timestamp DA Interval timestamp DAY Interval timestamp DAY 4 Interval timestamp HOUR Interval timestamp HOUR Interval timestamp HOUR 5 Interval timestamp MINUTE Interval timestamp MINUTE Interval timestamp MINUTE 6 Circuit Element Name Circuit Element Name Circuit Element Name 7 Node ID number Node ID number Node ID numbe 8 Circuit Element Shelf Numbe Circuit Element Shelf Number Circuit Element Shelf Number E 10 Access Manager 2000 User Manual Performance Data Log Performance Database Item User data EQPT data Additional data 9 Circuit Element Slot Circuit Element Slot Number Circuit Element Slot Number Number 10 Circuit Element Side Circuit Element Side Circuit Element Side numeric 11 Errored Seconds Errored Seconds Out of Frame Seconds 12 Unavailable Seco
60. any log in that is set the login parameters to Defaults Also set the inactivity time out to 0 e Fora Manual Modem connection use log in Co pilot mode Either system keyboard may be made active The normal setting should be Both Keyboards Active 2 12 Access Manager 2000 User Manual Setting up Accumaster Software Installation pcANYWHERE Parameter Setting Inactivity Setto No Time out or 0 seconds to allow time out pcANYWHERE to hang up only if the remote modem hangs up The inactivity time out does not work unless it is set to less than one minute This is because in the remote terminal VT mode Access Manager updates the screen current time once every minute and peANYWHERE treats this as activity The remote operator is responsible for dropping the line when communications is complete Login This option allows you to set the login parameters such as parameters the password Selecting the Defaults option applies the same login parameters to every remote caller Terminal Type This allows peANYWHERE to know whether you are using a remote PC or remote terminal to run the Host PC Select VT100 Remote Access Port Access Manager 2000 requires that the host PC has one dedicated communications serial port for access by a remote terminal or computer COM1 is normally assigned as the dedicated ppeANYWHERE port This is the remote access port and is configured in the Host PC setup of pcANY WHERE
61. before transcoding occurs to allow for data that merely looks like yellow alarm in the SF mode and to allow for detection of a yellow alarm in the presence of errors For SF the detection and clear time is 400 1 millisecond For ESF this time is 63 to 66 milliseconds The insertion of a one bit to prevent the transmission of eight or more consecutive zero bits used primarily with T1 and related digital circuits Access Manager 2000 Manual Appendix Modem Configuration This appendix describes how to configure modems when used with CSUs or shelf controllers when operating in the Open Systems Interconnection OSD or Telemetry Asynchronous Block Serial TABS protocol OSI Protocol Configuration Modem Configuration for OSI Protocol With DTR Lead Modem Configuration for OSI Protocol Without DTR Lead Hayes Smartmodem 2400 Configuration This section describes the modem configuration options for the OSI feature of Access Manager Table B 1 Modem Configuration for OSI Protocol DTR Lead on page B 3 lists the switch configurations for a Hayes Smartmodem T 1200 This table also lists the AT commands for a Hayes Smartmodem 2400 when used to connect a PC running Access Manager 2000 to a CSU or Controller equipped with a DTR lead For further instruction see the Hayes SmartModem 2400 user manual for configuration information Table B 2 Modem Configuration for OSI Protocol without DTR Lea
62. by repeating Steps 1 through 4 for the first CSU Because the initial and ending conditions are not in synch for both transmitters the final error count is disregarded 7 Usethe Abort Test in Progress option if you wish to abort a test in progress however the CSU sending the test pattern must be near end Select the Abort Test in Progress option of the Select CSUTest Activity screen Then select the near or far end 8 56 Access Manager 2000 User Manual Testing CSU The test signal is no longer applied to the circuit by the NCC CCC or TAC and all loopbacks are deactivated If you select this option the test procedure is completed If you selected one of the View options continue with this step e Ifyou selected View Test Status Results from the SelectTest Activity screen you are prompted to select the near end or far end CSU Enter your selection and press CF5 Go to Step 9 e Ifyou selected View Test in Progress goto Step 11 The CSU Test Status screen is updated during the test once every 5 seconds 1 second The status of this test can also be updated at any time by pressing and releasing any key except F2 or ESC The following results are displayed in the CSU Test Status Results screen CSU Test Status of SIGMAL 1 011 Test 1 in 8 to Netuork Elapsed Time 68 60 68 Looped NONE Time Remaining 60 00 60 Errors 812655 Conditions LOS LOF OOF CRC BPU BER Exceeded UAS Exceeded
63. circuit elements The ranges selected for each multiline node are stored in the database and are used as the default range the next time you configure the circuit elements in that node Enter the shelf number and the slot i e CSU or plug range designating the circuit element s as follows Type of parent node Conditions 551VST ML List 1 The possible CSU i e slot range is 1 to 28 i The shelf number is always 1 and is not entered 551VST ML List 2 SIM equipped 551V MLS The possible CSU i e slot range is 1 to 10 The shelf number is always 1 and is not entered NC E node The possible CSU i e slot range is from 1 to 10 This type of node also has a SIM shelf selection entry The shelf number can be from 1 to 5 Access System 200 The shelf number ranges from 1 to 4 node corresponding to its hardware address The plug i e slot number ranges are e from 1 to 13 if the shelf is a Multiline typ from 1 to 2 if the shelf is a Dual line type ConnecT1 Plus node The shelf number ranges from 1 to 4 and the plug number also ranges from 1 to 2 Access Manager 2000 User Manual 5 49 Configuring the T1 Network To edit a circuit element s definition Editing circuit element definitions 1 Starting from the Main Menu select Configuration The screen labeled Configuration appears Configuration revise node definitions Element revise circuit elements Circuit revise circuit definitions Rou
64. circuit performance data parameters for retrieval by an ASCII terminal operator or AM2000 Each register can be reset by an authorized operator after data retrieval Access Manager 2000 Manual Term Definition Repeater Loopback RLB ROM Route RS 232 RTS S SEFS Severely Errored Framing Second SF Stop bit Subchannel Subrate The repeater loopback connects the CSU network output signal back toward the equipment It loops the whole CSU except the CSU network input and output transformers toward the equipment This loopback has an automatic time out that releases the loopback after a pre selected time This loopback is helpful in testing the NET side repeater and the network side critical circuitry in the loopback Repeater Loopback See Read Only Memory A route consists of the two network circuit elements at T1 circuit end points as accessed by Access Manager For these programs a circuit and a route are functionally equivalent A common interface standard that permits DTEs and DCEs to successfully interconnect Request ToSend See Severely Errored Framing Second Those seconds in which two or more framing bit errors occur within a 3 millisecond period For ESF this interval may or may not coincide with an ESF i e six framing bits See Superframe In asynchronous transmission the last transmitted element in each character which informs the receiver to become idle before accepting a
65. consecutive ZEROs This is the default setting TR 62411 When you choose this mode the CSU 80 15 stuffs a ONE into every string of more than 15 consecutive ZEROs or whenever there is not a minimum of N ONEs in every window of 8 N 1 consecutive pulses where N has a value from 1 to 23 Stuffs a ONE into every string of more than 80 consecutive ZEROs Stuffs a ONE into every string of more than 15 consecutive ZEROs Pulsedensityenforcementisnotused Usethismodefor AMI unrestricted ZEROs operation Also select NONE if B8ZS coding is used This option lets you choose which type of signal the CSU applies to the network as a keep alive The options are framed alarm indication signal all ONEs unframed AIS pass signal to NET looped network signal through a line loopback LLB The default setting is for unframed ATS Access Manager 2000 User Manual NET Framing Format EE Enable NET B8ZS Regenerate CRC 6 to NET Enable YEL Yellow Alarm Transcode to NET Signal to EQP on NET Errors Configuration Options for AS2000 and ConnecTI1 Plus Select the framing format used on the network This can be SF D4 ES or UNFRAMED as required The default setting is ES The far end circuit element must use the same framing option Note If EQP Framing Format is Unframed then the NET Framing Format must also be Unframed If clear channel operation is required enter YES to select B8ZS line coding
66. cursor to the first alarm you wish to deactivate Press to deactivate the alarm Move the cursor to the next alarm record you wish to deactivate and press to deactivate the alarm Continue the process for each alarm record to be deactivated To remove a tag from an alarm record press the hyphen key The screen response in this option can be slow if the number of active or deactivated alarms is large Verify that the correct alarm records are tagged for deactivation Tagged alarm records are indicated on the screen by an intensified background for that alarm record in the color mode In monochrome mode the tagged alarm records are shown in black on a white background Press to deactivate the selected alarm reports or press CE2 to abort deactivation If you pressed Enter a prompt appears asking you to confirm that you want to deactivate the selected alarms To deactivate the alarms type Y Pressing any other key cancels deactivation of the selected alarms If you wish to deactivate additional alarm records by selecting a date and time range follow the instructions on the next section 6 4 Access Manager 2000 User Manual Selecting Alarm Records by Date and Time for Deactivation From From From From From From LE Enter date time range for Deactivating alarms To deactivate alarm records by date and time 1 Starting from the Main Menu select Alarm Status The Alarm Stat
67. data port handshaking signals are listed below Table 5 12 DIU 2130 and Data Port Handshaking Signals Handshaking Signals EQP Handshaking Options Circuit V 35 RS449 RS530 Direction N default Y screen RTS RS CA to DIU signal from data equipment forced on asserted DTR TR cD to DIU signal from data equipment forced on asserted CTS CS CB from DIU follow conditioned RTS from forced on asserted data equip Note 1 DSR DM CC from DIU follow conditioned DTR from forced on asserted data equip Note 2 RLSD RR CF from DIU on forced on asserted Note 3 DCD NOTE 1 CTS Set this option to NO default if you want CTS from the DIU to follow conditioned RTS from the data equipment If NO CTS turns off automatically if the associated NCC CCC or TAC goes into an LOF state or receives a Yellow i e RAI alarm regardless of RTS Or set this option to YES to permanently turn on DSR NOTE 2 DSR Set this option to NO default if you want DSR from the DIU to follow conditioned DTR from the data equipment If NO DSR turns off automatically if the associated NCC CCC or TAC goes into an LOF state or receives a Yellow alarm regardless of DTR Or set this option to YES to permanently turn DSR on NOTE 3 RLSD Set this option to NO default if you want RLSD on except when the associatedNCC CCC or TAC goes into an LOF state Or setthe RLSD t YES to permanently turn it on Loss of Signal Select from one of the
68. definitions revise authorized user list Event Log review system event log Code download download code to hardware Press f or ist char Enter to select Esc to cancel Access Manager 2000 User Manual 4 1 Configuring Access Manager Setting the date and time Access Manager uses DOS commands to update the system clock On some computers these DOS commands also update the hardware real time clock m If your system does not update the hardware clock through DOS commands then you may have problems if your system is rebooted either deliberately or due to power loss Therefore to insure that your system clock remains correct exit Access Manager and use the commands or utilities supplied with your computer to update the hardware clock If your system has an accurate real time clock you probably don t need to set the date and time If your system does not have a real time clock and you did not set the time and date when you booted your system the time and date may not be correct Setting the time and date in this menu also sets the DOS time and date To set the date and time 1 From the Utilities Menu select Date Time The Set Time amp Date screen appears Set Time amp Date Year 1992 Month 1 Day 23 Hour 13 Minute 58 Second 43 Press F5 to set system clock 2 Enter the correct date and time e To save the changes and set the system clock press CF5 e If you do not want to set
69. electrically independent module in a multiline shelf Standalone CSUs are also referred to as single line CSUs Each controller has specific CSU circuit elements with which it can be used A controller with its CSUs is referred to as a parent node In Access Manager the parent node s name is used to refer to the controller Table 5 1 Parent nodes and their components Nodes composed of standalone CSUs are shown with the lightest shading Nodes with independant controller modules are shown with darker shading Nodes which use a controller integrated with a CSU on a multiline shelf are not shaded Parent Node Type Controller CSU Circuit Elements 551VST List 1 551VST List 1 A 551VST List 1 A 551VST List 1 551VST List 1 B 551VST List 1 B 551VST List 2 551VST List 2 551VST List 2 SIM SIM 4016 R NC E SIM 4016 R 551VST ML List 1 NMC List 1 4016 List 1 or 2 551VST ML List 2 NMC List 2 4016 List 1 or 2 ConnecT1 Plus CCC 1020 CCC 1020 or TAC 1010 Some of the more typical arrangements of shelves nodes and circuit element are shown in the following figures a Figure 5 1 SIM node a Figure 5 2 NC E node a Figure 5 3 551 VST ML List 1 node a Figure 5 4 S51VST ML List 2 node 5 2 Access Manager 2000 User Manual T1 Network Monitoring Overview Figure 5 1 SIM node The SIM node has one SIM controller and up to 10 4016 R CSUs SIM SIM 4016 R CSUs 551V MLS shelf 10 each
70. following options NO Do not generate a Loss of Signal signal RTS Generate an LOS alarm when RTS is missing DTR Generate an LOS alarm when DTR is missing Access Manager 2000 User Manual 5 97 Configuring the T1 Network Enable TU Select from one of the following options a If this DIU is receiving a TT input from a data port then enter Y for the port with the TT signal Enter N for all other ports of all other DIUs in the node This is necessary because only one bus is available to carry this clock and more than one clock source on the bus causes a synchronization conflict a If Enable TU the timing mode is called data equipment timing Its application depends on how the connected CSU timing is configured For Tl mux applications configure the CSU DIU Timing DIU then TT is the timing source for the CSU For drop and insert configure DIU Timing TU then TT is the timing source for the TIU m Ifyou use any other DIU timing mode enter N for all ports The DIU 2140 Options screen shows the configuration options for DIU 2140 the first DIU 2140 in the specified range Configuration i Figure 5 17 DIU 2140 Option Menu AS20888 Options for DIU 2148 Edit Shelf 1 RET Installed and Operational Save Configuration to DIU Connected CSU shelf EQP Name EQP SER 9680 Press FS to update element F8 for Options Baud Rate Ctrl PgUp Ctrl PgDn for prev next circuit element 5 98 Ac
71. in from Figur e2 3 Accumaster Time Zone Chart For example EST5 would be used in the Eastern Time Zone when daylight savings time is not in effect Table 2 3 Accumaster Time Zone Chart When If Daylight Saving Time Zone Standard Time Time is in Effect Hawaii HST10 HST9 Alaska LST9 LST8 Pacific PST8 PST7 Mountain MST7 MST6 Central CST6 CST5 Eastern EST5 EST4 Atlantic AST4 AST3 The time zone string for example PST is not critical as long as it is three characters long The number following the string is critical because it represents the number of hours difference from Greenwich Mean Time GMT which must be included in all alarm records sent to Accumaster 2 14 Access Manager 2000 User Manual Software Installation Before Starting Accumasier Before Accumaster is run for the first time the network should be configured In particular the Alarm output is configured within Access Manager the same as configuring an Alarm Printer Since only one alarm output can be defined the configuration of alarms being sent to Accumaster precludes the use of a physical alarm printer The communications port to be used is configured as a Serial Device If a modem is used it must be set to Auto Answer as described in AppendixB Modem Configuration Access Manager 2000 User Manual 2 15 Installing Access Manager 2 16 Access Manager 2000 User Manual Chapter 3 Basics Basic Display Using Access
72. in the preceding Tagging Alarm Records for Deactivation section Access Manager 2000 User Manual 6 5 Alarm reporting Viewing active alarms 6 6 To view active alarms 1 Starting from the Main Menu select Alarm Status The Alarm Status Review Alarm Log Database screen appears 2 From this screen select View Active The View Select Alarm to View screen appears 3 Move the cursor to an alarm record you wish to view and press Enter If more than one alarm condition is stored in the record the View Alarm screen lists them View Alarm Time Stamp 81 23 1992 198 09 88 esas ie sts NEW YORK SALES KEERDO OEE 1 Equipment Type CONNECT1 PLUS Shelf number Unit number Alarms Near Eq UAS exceeded cleared baveateucie bate Far LLB or PLB looped EE EEE DEEA Near BER exceeded Press FZ to return 4 Use this option to view active alarm records that is reports from 551VST type circuit elements before deactivating them When you acknowledge an alarm message from a 551VST type circuit element there may be more than one condition causing that message The View Alarm screen lists all the conditions that were reported in one message for that circuit element The alarm Time Stamp for 551VST type circuit elements is the time the alarm report is received by Access Manager Access Manager 2000 User Manual Listing active alarms The Alarm Time Stamp for AS2000 and 551VST type circuit
73. must be built between the near and far circuit elements in order to collect far end data This is because all data is stored under the circuit element s parent node name LS Note To retrieve data from a far end CSU the near end CSU must be set to retrieve data You must specify the hour when the 12 hour polling cycle for collection of performance data is initiated To specify the polling hour 1 From the Jnstallation screen select Hou The EditPoll Hour screen appears Edit Poll Hour Hour to start polling for performance data Press F5 to save definition 2 Choose one of the following options e To specify the polling hou enter a value from 1 to 12 for the polling hour from 1 to 12 and press CE5 to save the value e To disable performance data polling enter ZERO or a number equal to or greater than 13 e To exit from this option without saving changes press CE2 i The Access Manager database provides space for the event log alarm log Assigning and performance database that is log You may allocate how much database space is given to each log allocations The default allocations at time of shipment are shown in Table 4 1 Database allocation at time of shipment on page 4 13 4 12 Access Manager 2000 User Manual Configuring the site Table 4 1 Database allocation at time of shipment Number or records Maximum size Type of record per log default of recor
74. node or whenever you edit a node In either case you need to access the new Alarm Path Definition screen for the alarm configuration parameters To access the Alarm Path Definition screen a In the Node Definition screen go to the line labeled Enable alarm reporting and press CF8 5 26 Access Manager 2000 User Manual Configuring nodes Edit Node Definition Node name Node ID Loc Equ Sys Device Type Que Wait Time Que Que Primary Secondary Prel F8 SEND NONE Enal Baud Rate 9668 9668 Enal Attempts 4 4 Nod Retry Interval 1 MIN 1 MIN Primary Alarm Path COM1 Secondary Alarm Path NONE Press FZ to CANCEL F5 to ACCEPT F8 for options Press F5 to save definition F8 for equipment type Shelf Type is entered with Multiline M or first M S D D where D 2 slots shelf M or 13 slots shelf A screen labeled Alarm Path Definition will appear as an overlay Now that you ve reached this screen you can begin to define your alarm path The left column lists the alarm path parameters The middle and right columns are provided for defining separate alarm paths Although the columns are labeled Primary and Secondar _ the terms themselves do not designate a relative importance or sequence of alarm paths Assigning priority to an alarm path When you set up two alarm paths you can choose to use m Neither path so no alarms are sent Only one of the paths The second path as
75. notify the Telephone Company prior to disconnecting this unit from the network interface The FCC registration number for Access System 2000 is GICUSA 18804 DE N Access Manager 2000 Software Package Product Support Information The Access Manager 2000 Software Packages AM2000 8 AM2000 24 AM2000 1000 purchased under a master license agreement allow the customer to monitor up to eight 8 twenty four 24 or unlimited number of DS1 circuit elements A circuit element is defined as a single ESF DS1 interface device such as an ESF CSU Extended Superframe Channel Service Unit Under this agreement a master licensee is entitled to customer support maintenance and service as specified below Training Customer training is available at the San Jose California Verilink facility or at the customer s site For course fees and a current training schedule please contact Verilink at 1 408 945 1199 Telephone Telephone Hotline support is available through Support Verilink s Technical Assistance Center TAC twenty four hours a day seven days a week Verilink provides a toll free number 1 800 543 1008 answered directly during normal business hours 8AM to 5PM Pacific Standard Time Monday through Friday except holidays Calls received outside of our normal business hours will be answered within one hour by a Verilink Technical Assistance Engineer Maintenance A software maintenance contract can be purchased to allow the custom
76. number will also select that option Data entry fields are characterized by the type and maximum number of characters they accept When the maximum number of characters is reached the field is filled the data is accepted and the highlight moves to the next field If an invalid character type is entered in a field the system beeps This occurs for example if you try to enter an alphabetic character in an all numeric field such as a node number The system also beeps if you are in the insert mode and the field is already full Note Typed spaces at the end of a field are treated by Access Manager as entered characters Blanks at the end of a field may cause the system to beep If this occurs place the cursor after the last visible character and press to delete spaces The Cy may be used to move between lines from any character position The cursor always positions itself to the left of the first character in the line selected 3 18 Access Manager 2000 User Manual Getting started with Access Manager Any valid alphanumeric characters or symbols including spaces are valid in an alphanumeric field A DOS filename is defined by any valid DOS character and filename g To log off Access Manager Logging off Press CF9 You will ber returned to the AM2000 Username screen Access Manager 20008 Access Manager serial numbe Serial Number NONE Copyright Verilink Corporation 1988 1989 1998 1991 1992 E
77. of thumb 1 A 551VST List 2 with ASCII interface firmware is installed as a 55 LVST List 1 B 2 A551 VST MLE shelf equipped with 4016 List 2 CSU modules and no controller can only be used as a far end node jie a ee A circuit element is a single module of the parent node to which Access Circuit element Manager is connected A circuit is the combination of any two network CSU circuit elements Circuit and their interconnecting DS1 facility which have Access Manager access in a DS1 network One endpoint would be a near end CSU and the other would be a far end CSU 5 4 Access Manager 2000 User Manual T1 Network Monitoring Overview To communicate withVerilink CSUs from the Access Man ager2000 Summary of tasks software package you must perform these basic sequenced steps 1 Configure Access Manager s comline Menu used Main Utilities Installation Comlines direct i modem comline stat mux X 25 PAD Node controller cvo Access Manager 2000 Near end node This determines how Access Manager and the node will communicate Depending on your equipment you have up to four connection options direct modem stat mux and the X 25 PAD 2 Configure the near end node parameters Menu used Main Configuration Node Add Node controller NN Cc zi S U AEEA Access Manager 2000 Near end node Functionally a node is the point of access between the network man
78. operation you want 4 After choosing a loopback function the Specify Near End or Far End screen appears Specify near end or far end Send request to far end CSU 7 NI Press F5 to initiate test Press FZ to cancel 5 Enter N for the near end CSU to receive the loopback request or enter Y forthe far end CSU to receive the request This menu does not appear if you choose the Send Inband Loop Up or Send Inband Loop Down option 6 Press CF5 to execute the loopback command or press CF2 to cancel it Access Manager 2000 User Manual 8 45 Monitoring and Troubleshooting Access Manager CSU loopback options 7 If you are deactivating a loopback and you previously changed the CSU timing restore the timing to its original mode 8 If you are activating a loopback a warning message appears telling you that the selected test will place the DS1 line out of service WARNING This test or loop request will take the line out of service Press y to proceed Any other response will cancel the request A prompt also appears asking you to confirm that you want to proceed with the loopback To do so type Y Any other response aborts the test 9 All loopbacks you have activated remain active until you deactivate them with the exception of RLB The RLB time out was set when you configured the CSU If the RLB time out was set to the value FOREVER it does not time out Access Manager allows you to activate or deact
79. option Access Manager supplies drivers for five printers but only one of the predefined printer types can be entered in this field at a time The only difference in the five printer types supported is in the characters used to program the printers for condensed compressed mode and to 4 6 Access Manager 2000 User Manual Configuring the site restore them to normal mode 10 cpi The hexadecimal values used for the printer types are listed as follows Printer Type Condensed Normal IBM Graphic OF 12 Epson OF 12 Okidata 1D 1E These are for the 320 321 family of printers The 190 family of printers use the values shown for the IBM or Epson printers and therefore should be installed as an IBM or Epson DEC LA120 1B 5B 34 77 ESC 4w 1B 5B 30 77 E SCOw TTY The TTY option is for printers that are unable to print compressed characters Also select TTY for a printer not listed or whose compressed character commands do not match any of those listed in the options table Compressed characters are not used 1 With the cursor positioned on the Printer Type option press to display a window of the predefined printer types A screen labeled Select Printer Type appears on top of the Edit Report Printer Configuration screen Edit Report Printer Configuration Printer filename Printer type Is printer 88 column widij TRE TT oo 2 EPSON PRINTER 3 OKIDATA PRINTER 4 DEC LA120 5 TTY Select Printer T
80. option is set to NO any changes made are saved in the database but are not downloaded to the CSU circuit element CSUs can report alarm conditions to Access Manager when excessive errors occur or the line service is degraded If you don t want the CSU to report alarm conditions to Access Manager your choice is simple Set the Enable Alarm Reporting field to NO To allow the CSU to report alarm conditions to Access Manager 1 SetEnable Alarm Reporting to YES 2 Make sure that in the Node Configuration screen of the parent node you have e setthe Enable Alarm Reporting to YES e downloaded the alarm path for that node Otherwise the CSU will send alarms to the node controller but the node controller will not forward these alarms to Access Manager Access Manager 2000 User Manual 5 77 Configuring the T1 Network 3 Review the alarm condition settings by pressing to get the Alarm Condition Sub Menu screen Alarm CONDITION SUB MENU J Loopback alarm relay 7 Y NET BER threshold lt 8 4 9 7 EQP BER threshold 4 9 7 6 NET ES L threshold 7 EQP ES L threshold 7 z5 NET ES L intervals count 7 EQP ES L intervals count 7 1 NET ES threshold 7 EQP ES threshold 7 25 NET ES intervals count EQP ES intervals count 7 1 NET UAS threshold 7 EQP UAS threshold 7 25 NET UAS intervals count EQP UAS intervals count
81. path for the alarm However because modems X 25 PADs and stat muxes are addressable com port access devices any one of them may now be used to set up two alarm destinations The following diagrams show three typical scenarios set up for the new Alternate Alarm Path functionality a Figure 5 3 Application using modems a Figure 5 4 Application using a stat mux device a Figure 5 5 Application using X 25 PADs 5 24 Access Manager 2000 User Manual Configuring nodes Figure 5 3 Application using modems Telephone Network Access Manager 2 Access Manager 1 ooz ONON AS2000 Node Figure 5 4 Application using a stat mux device Access Manager 1 Access Manager 2 ooz ONON AS2000 Node Access Manager 2000 User Manual 5 25 Configuring the T1 Network Figure 5 5 Application using X 25 PADs Public Data Network Link Port Access Manager 2 Access Manager 1 Channel 1 ooz ONON AS2000 Node What to do To set up your alarm paths you ll need to a Identify each Access Manager see Differentiating the site on page 4 3 Assign priority to an alarm path Set up alarm destination access Determine how long to collect alarms before sending m Determine how often to try resending an alarm when a connection is not made You can define the alarm path when you first add a
82. return to the Select CSUTest Activity screen then select the Abort Test in Progress option and press Enter Press to return to the On line AS2000 screen Choose the Loopbacks option and press Enter Type the shelf and plug numbers of the NCCor TAC and press the function key Choose the Deactivate Network Loopback PLB and LLB option and press Enter Type Y to specify the far end network loopbacks and press Enter Choose the Activate PLB option and press Enter Type Y to specify the far end payload loopback PLB and press Enter Type Y to activate the PLB when the loopback warning screen appears At the far end NCC or TAC also verify that the NET LED is solid yellow PLB is activated Press to return to the On line AS2000 screen Choose the Select Test option and press Enter Access Manager 2000 User Manual 5 111 Configuring the T1 Network 5 112 _ 48 _ 49 _ 45 _ 46 J _ 50 J51 _ 52 _ 53 Type the shelf and plug in slot numbers of the NCC or TAC and press the CF5 function key The Select CSUTest Activity menu appears Choose the Send QRSS Test Pattern option and press Enter The Test Current Node screen appears Enter the following settings and press Enter e Test Duration FOREVER e To Network or Equipment N Network e Test From Far End N No Type Y to send the test signal when the test warning screen appears The Select CSUTest
83. seconds and report those alarms to Access Manager UNSOL To have the far end NCC CCC or TAC automatically when it detects a Loss of Signal send its alarm status to the near end NCC CCC or TAC Select this option for the far end CSU circuit element when the near end CSU is setto POLL Use this option to define the time period after which an RLB releases RLB Loopback Choose the setting desire from the following list Time out s DISABLE a xxSE where xx 01 to 59 Access Manager 2000 User Manual 5 81 Configuring the T1 Network Enable PRM AIS not SIG During Loopback a xx MIN where xx 01 to 59 a xx HR where xx 01 to 24 a FOREVER The default is 1 minute The CSU can generate performance report messages PRMs over the ESF Data Link once every second If enabled the PRM carries a bit which identifies the PRM sender To enable these messages go to the Enable PRM field and press the function key The Select PRM Enable screen will appear Select PRM Enable 1 NO 2 USER 3 TELCO Press f number or ESC Choose from one of the following options To not generate the PRM select NO PRM disabled This is the default option To generate PRMs and label them as sent by the CPE Customer Premises Equipment select USER a To generate PRMs and label them as sent by the Telco select TELCO This option determines whether the AIS or the received signal SIG is passed on to one side
84. specify date and time range Enter to deactivate Esc to cancel 3 You may now proceed to tag or select alarm records and deactivate them See the following Tagging Alarm Records for Deactivation and Selecting Alarm Records by Date and Time to Deactivate sections Alarm records are saved in the alarm log by Access Manager The alarm records are either Active or Deactivated Deactivate only those alarm records that you have determined are no longer present and that you want to delete from the active alarm log CAUTION The Deactivate option allows you to remove alarm records that is reports from the alarm log whether or not the trouble condition tha caused it has ended Check the alarm records log for the corresponding cleared record and check the On line condition of the circuit element before deactivating an alarm record Select the Deactivate option by typing D in the Review Alarm Log Database screen Access Manager 2000 User Manual 6 3 Alarm reporting To tag alarm records for deactivation Tagging Alarm Records for Deactivation 2 1 Starting from the Main Menu select Alarm Status The Alarm Status Review Alarm Log Database screen appears From this screen select Deactivate The Select Alarm to Deactivate screen appears Follow these steps to tag and deactivate alarm records Notice that the cursor is positioned on the left side of the menu initially beside the last alarm record Move the
85. t or ist char Enter to select Esc to cancel 4 If the parent node is an AS2000 type and the circuit element has not yet been configured or deleted then the screen labeled Select AS2000 ElementType appears Select ASZ 00 Element Type for shelf 1 PLUG 6 1 CSU 2 DIU 2138 3 DIU 2132 4 DIU 2146 Press ft number or ESC Ctrl PgUp Ctrl PgDn for prev next circuit element If this is the case choose a circuit element type from the list of options If you choose CSU the Select CSU Application screen will appear Select CSU Application 1 CSU 2 SMDS Press ft 4 number or ESC Access Manager 2000 User Manual 5 51 Configuring the T1 Network Select CSU LE Note SMDS CSU capability is discussed in the Access System 2000 SMDS User Manual PN 896 502018 001 1 Release is targeted for mid 1993 5 If the parent node is not an AS2000 type then one of the following screens will appear e 551VST List 1 A CSU Edit Options for 551UST LIST 1 A Disabling this option also disables the indented options below it Press F5 to update circuit element e 551 VST List 1 B CSU Edit Options for 551UST LIST 1 B CSU xInstalled and operational 7 Enable span side B8ZS encode Retrieve performance data 7 Enable span side B8ZS decode Retrieve far end data 7 Regenerate CRC to span side Enable remote configuration 7 Span side ESF framing 7 16E BER threshold 4 9 Enable EQ
86. tables performance data inquiry and testing stored performance data analysis Press ft or ist char Enter to select Esc to cancel The screen labeled Configuration appears Configuration node definitions circuit elements circuit definitions route definitions Press ft or ist char Enter to select Esc to cancel Getting to the CSU configuration scree Utilities Alarm status Online access Database access Node revise ae revise Circuit revise Route revise 2 Select Element 5 72 Access Manager 2000 User Manual Configuration Options for AS2000 and ConnecTI1 Plus The screen labeled Edit Element SelectParent Node appears Site MANUAL ACK Alarm Current Node NOT YET DEFINED ii 21 II EDIT ELEMENT Select Parent Node Node Name Location Equipment Type ALVISO LABS TEST AS20880 NEW NODE TEST AS288A X25 PAD TEST TEST AS28880 Press Home End PgUp PgDn f or to browse Enter to select Esc to cancel Sun 11 7 8 92 16 27 61 I 2 3 E1A Il 4 LEVEL4 Fi Help F2 Previous F3 Main Menu F4 Alarm Mode F9 Log Off F1 Shut Doun At this screen you select the node which contains the element you want to configure Move the up and down arrows until the desired node is highlighted and press Enter The Configuration AS2000 Plug screen appears Configuration AS20800 Plug NAi select shelf and PLUG range Edit edit circuit element definition Delete delete circuit element defi
87. the Access Manager until the timer expires This allows the node controller to collect or buffer as many alarms as possible before establishing the connection to Access Manager to deliver alarms If you re already accessing to the node controller either through the Configuration or On Line Access menus the wait time will be ignored and you ll be sent the alarms as they come up This is especially useful when you re using a modem setup It enables you to reduce the number of connections made and telephone call charges incurred when delivering single alarm messages To set the amount of time between attempts go to the Wait Time field and type in a time period in one of the following formats The possible values include e 1to59SEC e 1to59 MIN e lto24HR The default value is 15 SEC for each path Resending undelivered alarms There are times when your alarm will not be delivered on the first attempt For example if you re using a modem maybe the line was busy at the other end You can specify the time period before trying again if an alarm delivery was unsuccessful Access Manager 2000 User Manual 5 31 Configuring the T1 Network To set the amount of time between attempts go to the Retry Interval field and type in a time period in one of the following formats e 1to59 SEC e 1to59MIN e 1to24HR If you forget to put a space between the number and the time unit a space will be added automatical
88. the current menu Printer filename Printer type Is printer 80 column wid Press F5 to save defin Edit Report Printer Configuration Select Printer Type 1 IBM GRAPHIC PRINTER 2 EPSON PRINTER 3 OKIDATA PRINTER 4 DEC LA12 5 TTY J number or ESC Press f Access Manager 2000 User Manual 3 5 Using Access Manager Status Display Keyboard Status screens provide information directly from on line data Status screens are read only and provide status information only for the moment that you access the screen The screen does not update itself To find out that a condition you see on the screen has changed you would have to exit out of the screen and then reaccess it Alarm notifications however do let you know immediately if there is a significant change This section describes the function keys cursor movement keys and special keys used at a PC keyboard a Function keys are used to select and or activate specific operations in Access Manager a Cursor movement keys also known as directional keys are used to move between fields and screens a Special keys are used to perform special functions within Access Manager Sometimes this involves using keystroke combinations Because there are differences between the keyboards it subsequently describes the equivalent keystrokes used at a VT100 terminal keyboard Regardless of the operation mode PC or VT 100 the keyboard directly attach
89. the same speed go to the Baud Rate field and type in the speed at which the device will operate When setting up alternate alarm paths make sure you enter the same baud rate in the other alarm path column Access Manager 2000 User Manual 5 29 Configuring the T1 Network 5 30 2 If you re using modems which operate at the different speeds go to the Baud Rate field and type in the speed of the slowest modem in the particular alarm path you re configuring To name the alarm destination Each alarm destination must be designated by an address in the form of a contact number or string A maximum of 40 characters are allowed and the format of the string is dependent upon the device being used The supported devices use the following formats DIRECT MODEM X 25 PAD STAT MUX The address is a defined com port Valid ranges are from COM1 to COM16 This option cannot be used for setting up alternate alarm paths The address is a valid AT dial string If only digits are used Access Manager presumes the address to be a phone number and defaults to using the ATDT dial tone command when connecting For your ease you may use parentheses and hyphens in the phone number They won t confuse the modem The address is an ASCII string that corresponds to a vendor specific connect command for the X 25 PAD being used Complete addresses usually follow the format of a connect command followed by a device ad
90. the screen to the right of the colon is now reset to zero without displaying additional menus or confirmation messages alarm mode manual or automatic i MANUAL ACK Alarm This is reset to zero when you clear Site NOT YET DEFINED _ number of active alarm number of current automatically acknowledged alarm EOG Selecting Clear does not affect the alarm reports in the alarm log Deactivating alarms To deactivate alarms 1 Starting from the Main Menu select Alarm Status The Alarm Status Review Alarm Log Database screen appears 6 2 Access Manager 2000 User Manual Deactivating alarms 2 From this screen select Deactivate The Deactivate Select Alarm to Deactivate screen appears Select Alarm to Deactivate Alarm from Alarm Time Stamp First Alarm Condition NODEL 1 1 81723792 52 Near Net LOF alarm cleared NODEL 1 11 01723792 52 Near Low Density alarm NODEL 1 11 61 23 92 252 Near LOF alarm NODEL 1 11 01723792 52 Near LOF alarm NODEL 1 11 01723792 52 Near Low Density alarm clear NODEL 1 1 91 23 92 252 Near LOF alarm cleared NODEL 1 1 01723792 252 Near LOF alarm cleared NODE 1 11 01723792 754 Near BER exceeded cleared NODEL1 2 61 2392 255 Near Plug Absent alarm NODEL 1 11 01723792 15 Near Net UAS exceeded cleared NODEL 1 1 61 2392 215 Near Eq UAS exceeded cleared Press Home End PgUp PgDn tf 4 to browse to tag to untag F8 to
91. the system clock press CF2 to return to the Utilities Menu 3 The procedure is complete 4 2 Access Manager 2000 User Manual Configuring the site Differentiating the site Configuring the site Configuring the site includes the following activities Differentiating the site pag e4 3 Configuring the report printer pag e4 5 Configuring the on line data printer page 4 8 Specifying the alarm destination page 4 8 Setting the performance data polling hour page 4 11 Assigning database allocations page 4 12 Assigning comline definitions page 4 14 To configure the site you ll need to access the Installation Menu from the Utilities Menu From the Utilities menu select Installation The Installation Menu will appear edit Report edit Online edit Alarm edit Hour edit Quotas edit Comlines revise comline definitions Installation site name report printer configuration online data printer configuration alarm printer configuration performance data polling hour database allocations Press t or ist char Enter to select Esc to cancel To differentiate the site you need to assign the node a site name and a manager type The site name that you assign during this procedure will subsequently appear in the upper left corner of the monitor screen Until you define the site name the words NOT YET DEFINED will display on the monitor screen Access Manager 2000 User Manual 4 3 Config
92. to disk and deleting 1 Starting from the Main Menu select Database Access the data 2 From the Database Access Performance Database Analysis screen select Archive The Archive Performance Database Choose Archive Option screen appears 3 From this screen select Archive Copy Records to Disk with Delete Option The Choose Register Set to be Archived screen now appears 4 Select the register type whose performance data records you want to archive EQPT and Additional register types are not present nor reported for 551 VST type circuit elements A Select Archive Cutoff Date screen appears Select archive cutoff date Ending month 1 thru 12 Ending day C 1 thru 31 23 Ending year C4 digits Press F5 to accept entered data Press F2 to cancel archive 5 Enter the month day and year four digits of the date up to which you wish to archive the performance data records The default date is the current date 6 Press CF5 to accept the date displayed or enter a new date Press 2 to cancel the request 7 18 Access Manager 2000 User Manual Archiving performance data 7 The Select Drive screen now appears Enter the letter of the disk drive where you want the archived records to be sent and then press CF5 Or press CE2 to cancel the archive process 8 Verify that the files are being copied If the drive you select is not ready or no diskette has been inserted an error message appear
93. to and including the cutoff date selected type Y e Tocancelthe Delete function press any other key Archiving event records The Event Log records are archived in an ASCII comma delimited format The format is compatible with Lotus 1 2 3 dBase II Plus and other similar spreadsheet software The file names use the format LOyymmdd XxXX where a LO is always the first two letters yy the year of the archive mm the month of the archive a dd the day of the archive a XXX extension consecutively numbered from 001 to 999 The month date and year used in the archive file name are those selected in the Archive Cutoff Date screen not the current date Each time archiving is executed it starts with a file extension of 001 If a previous event log archive has been performed with the same cutoff day the previous archive files which also started with extension 001 are overwritten if they exist on the same disk and directory Refer to Appendix E Archive File Formats for a detailed description of the event log record format Access Manager 2000 User Manual 4 31 Configuring Access Manager To archive event records 1 From the Events Choose Archive Option screen choose the Archive option The Select Archive Cutoff Date screen appears Select archive cutoff date Ending month CO1 thru 12 Ending day 61 thru 31 gt Ending year C4 digits Press F5 to accept date entered P
94. to exit tion menu without selecting an option Also press to immediately abort a connection request or print request Basics Key lt INS gt Press data entry screen to toggle between the text insert mode and the text overwrite normal mode When the insert mode is activated a block cursor blinks in the input line In the overwrite mode a smaller cursor blinks at the bottom of the input line The insert mode is active for the current ine only If you move the cursor up or down one line with the arrow keys or if you press CFS ye the screen values the insert mode goes back to the overwrite mode When you are in the overwrite mode on any screen entering any character in the first position of the data entry line deletes all other characters on that line To change only the first character in a line press cs change from the overwrite mode to the insert mode If all character positions allowed for a data line are filled delete the first character with the key and enter the new first character lt DEL gt Press te the character or space at the current cursor position lt BACKSPACE gt Press the key to delete the character or space immediately preceding the current cursor position Equivalent VT100 Keystroke With Access Manager operating in the VT mode under ppeANYWHERE II commands entered from the VT 100 terminal use different keystroke combinations than the PC keyboard This occurs because the VT 100 terminal unlike th
95. to far end Send Inband loop down code to far end Activate PLB loop back Deactivate PLB loop back Activate EQP loop back CELB Deactivate EQP loop back CELB and RLB gt Send LLB Activate message to far end T1 4 3 B0P gt Send LLB Deactivate message to far end T1 403 B0P Send PLB Activate message to far end T1 4 3 B0P Send PLB Deactivate message to far end T1 463 B0P Press ft or ist char Enter to select Esc to cancel Access Manager 2000 User Manual Activating Deactivating CSU loopbacks e Ifyou are working on a 551 VST type CSU you will see the following menu Select Loopback Activity Activate repeater loop back CRLB gt Activate Line loop back CLLB gt Deactivate Network loop back CPLB and LLB Send Inband loop up code to far end Send Inband loop down code to far end Activate PLB loop back Deactivate PLB loop back Activate EQP loop back CELB Deactivate EQP loop back CELB and RLB Activate framed all ones signal to span Deactivate framed all ones signal to span Aun To tmAoonwDp Press f or ist char Enter to select Esc to cancel AllVerilink 551 VST type CSUs respond to functions A through I on this menu the exceptions are the 551VST List 1 and 1 A CSUs and the 4016 List 1 CSU which respond to functions F and G only PLB When these CSUs are equipped as far end circuit elements they respond only to D and E when these codes are sent from the near end CSU 3 Select the CSU loopback
96. work with the Access Manager running on IBM or 100 IBM compatible personal computers PC s The three parts of this appendix describe the following Standard PC and PS 2 serial port settings a Installing multichannel boards in Micro Channel PS 2s a Installing multichannel boards in PC A Standard PC or PS 2 Serial Port Settings Before DigiBoard multichannel boards can be added to your PC you should configure the serial ports supplied with the PC Tables D 1 to D 3 list settings for the most common serial boards supplied with personal computers For other serial port cards refer to the associated hardware manual Table D 1 Standard Serial Ports for Micro Channel IBM PS 2 Comline Name Shared I O Caution Port Addr IRQ Addr Status Mask COM1 3F8H 4H OH OH CAUTION Using the PS 2 Reference Disk install the built in serial port a COM1 Installing it as any other port may cause the system to lock up Access Manager 2000 User Manual D 1 Table D 2 Standard Serial Ports for IBM PC XT and AT Comline Name Shared I O Note 1 Port Addr IRQ Addr Status Mask COM1 3F8H 4H OH OH COM2 2F8H 3H OH OH NOTE 1 Set the built in serial port s as shown CAUTION To use the built in serial ports with Access Manager they must be installed and configured by the hardware switches Installing the into the computer as any other port may cause the system to lock up Table
97. you are updating an Access Manager installation with an 8 megabyte database you need 2 8 10 megabytes of space on your hard disk goes The Database Stats selection can be used at any time to determine database size and available hard disk space 7 You need to decide how you want the database to be affected e To convert the existing database to the latest Access Manager format select the Full Update option This is the recommended method e To leave the existing database in its current format select the Partial Update option This should only be used for interim releases 8 After choosing one of the above respond to the subsequent prompts to complete the selected action 9 When the program prompts you for the new Access Manager directory to be created type AM2000 Access Manager 2000 User Manual Creating a batch file for automatic start up Software Installation The INSTALL program then copies the Access Manager program files and all blank database files into the newly created directory It transfers all data from the current database to the new database and leaves the current database intact 10 Now the installation is complete and you need to update a few other files If ppANYWHERE is being used a Copy the ppANYWHERE files from the old Access Manager directory into the AM2000 directory b If changes have been made to the factory default settings either copy the CFG file from the AM200
98. you want to print EQPT and Additional register types are not present nor reported for 551 VST type circuit elements A Select Archive Cutoff Date screen appears Select archive cutoff date Ending month 1 thru 12 Ending day C 1 thru 31 23 Ending year C4 digits Press F5 to accept entered data Press FZ to cancel archive 5 Enter the month day and year four digits of the date up to which you wish to print the performance data records The default date is the current date 6 Enter a new date or press CE5 to accept the date displayed Press 2 to cancel the request Pressing gy escape key any time after the printing has started aborts the print function 7 After all the selected records are printed you are presented with the option of deleting all the performance data records up to the date that you had selected To retain the records in the database type N or any key other than Y Access Manager 2000 User Manual 7 17 Analyzing Performance Data 8 All information in the database prior to and including the selected date is sent to the report printer The printer can be a file on a disk drive as defined in the Report Printer Definition screen 9 See Appendix E Archive File Formats for an analysis of this performance data log This completes the printing of performance data records of the type selected Pate ee To copy the reports to disk and delete the data Copying reports
99. 0 BAK directory to the AM2000 directory or reconfigure ppANYWHERE from the start If you made changes to the COLORATT DAT and MONOATT DAT files a You must make the same changes to the new COLORATT DAT or MONOATT DAT files inthe AM2000 directory b This can be done with a standard ASCII text editor 11 After the update is completed go to the AM2000 directory and start Access Manager 12 When you re sure that the new database is working properly delete the old database in the AM2000 BAK directory you created in Step 1 By using a start up batch file you can set up Access Manager to do one of the following start up automatically when your system boots up or start from any directory For automatic start up whenever the host PC is powered up you can modify an existing AUTOEXEC BAT file in the DOS root directory For manual start up from any director_ you can create a file called AM2000 BAT or anything else you like in any directory which exists in the DOS path Once this file has been created and saved you can type Access Manager 2000 User Manual 2 9 Installing Access Manager AM2000 in any directory to start the program The batch file automatically changes to the Access Manager directory and starts the Access Manager program In either case you must use statements from Table 2 2 Batch file commands for automatic start up on pag e2 10 All editing can be done with an ASCII text editor such
100. 0 User Manual Chapter 8 Selecting a node Monitoring and Troubleshooting Access Manager This chapter tells you how to use Access Manager 2000 to perform operations on circuit elements on a DS1 T1 network The categories of operations you can perform are Viewing circuit element status individually and in a node Verifying on line circuit element configuration Retrieving performance data Resetting user performance registers Activating and deactivating CSU and DIU loopbacks Applying test signals to CSUs and DIUs These operations are performed within the On line Access option of the Main Menu To access a node on line a query path must first be defined in its node configuration To perform these operations you need to access a circuit element by first defining its parent node Follow these general steps to access a node Access Manager 2000 User Manual 8 1 Monitoring and Troubleshooting Access Manager 1 Select On line Access from the Main Menu The Online Access Select Node screen appears ONLINE ACCESS Select Node Node Name Location Equipment Type NEW YORK SALES VERILINK HQ CONNECT1 PLUS SEATTLE SALES VERILINK HQ ANza8a ress Home End PgUp PgDn ft or to browse Enter to select Esc to cancel 2 Select the node you want from the On line Access Select Node screen and press Enter This step defines the parent node The sub menu you see depends on the type of node you selected The nodes and
101. 04 Out of frame SECS 000 eee c 1 988 Thresholds are maximum allowed in 15 min interval Enter to disable a specific threshold check Press F5 to accept thresholds entered Press FZ to return to previous menu You may choose 0 zero to disable a threshold check or you may choose a time interval between and 900 seconds in any 15 minute interval Type in the threshold settings and press CE5 to store them Only those intervals that have at least one parameter exceeding the thresholds if you selected an OR function or have all parameters exceeding the threshold if you selected an AND function appear Access Manager 2000 User Manual 7 7 Analyzing Performance Data 7 8 From From From From From month day year hour Steps 6 and 7 deal with setting the date and time range for the S user or P user filters 6 After selecting the filter option in Step 3 and completing Step 4 or 5 if S User or P User was chosen the Enter Date Time Range for Report screen appears Enter date time range for report cO thru 12 To month C 1 thru 12 1 thru 31 To day 1 thru 31 C4 digits To year C4 digits 08 thru 23 To hour 08 thru 23 minute 66 15 36 45 To minute C88 15 38 45 Press F5 to accept range entered Press FZ to return to previous menu Enter the date and time range over which you want performance data
102. 10 a Configuring circuit elements pag e5 44 a Configuring circuits page 5 102 a CSU acceptance testing page 5 108 Many operations and features are common to both AS2000 systems and 551 VST type systems but there are also some significant differences When there is a difference you will be presented with a menu that is customized for the difference Access System 2000 hardware is available in both dual line and multiline shelving configurations while ConnecT1 Plus hardware is only available in a dual line configuration The software specifications of the two products are however very similar Because of this similarity this chapter treats them as interchangeable T1 Network Monitoring Overview Node Configuring the T1 network requires some basic familiarity with nodes circuit elements and circuits Physically all nodes consist of at least one CSU and may contain additional elements such as DSUs and other CSUs Access Manager 2000 User Manual 5 1 Configuring the T1 Network Functionally the node is the network management connection It s often synonymous with the controller It provides a point of access between Access Manager and the circuit elements it manages As far as Access Manager is concerned often the controller is the node A controller can take one of three physical forms It can be an integral physical part of a standalone CSU an integral physical part of a CSU element in a multiline shelf a an
103. 2 Retrieve Far End Performance Data 0 0 eee cseeseecee cess cseceseeseceseeecnseeseensees 5 63 Enable Alarm Reporting s cscecsessssscsceseedsssecssees song vsestesvastanessessissee sees ecb ovesveessaees 5 63 Enable Remote Configuration cece cseseseeseeceecseecaecssesseceseesecesceeenseeeeeeens 5 64 BER Threshold oraa sett ses ostes acta Aaa ee ae 5 64 Repeater Loopback Time out ccc ccccsessesecssesesensesesesesseseesscsscsessuesecseseseeeses 5 65 Enable Par End Polling senii iesire cies cueshetestessevettssdessaancvesisseessseyes eve ssoebsbons 5 66 Enable Transparent Mode 0 ee ceesecseeeeceeceeeeeeeeseeenecseecseesaecaecsaecseseaeeaeensees 5 67 Use FCC Part 68 Rule Only nnrir ei Ee 5 67 AIS Not Signal Loopback oo cess ceeeeseeseecseeseecaecsaecaecsaesaecseesesnseeseesees 5 67 AIS Not ESS Keep Alive iescscsccsess sess dscscadsccsetecessses cos nitet sos ienssschassadvesesetieeessestesse 5 67 Enable Alarm Latch meie sess beclatisectitosssasiekien Seen n Seine shel aantesad EEEE 5 68 Enable PRM scission E E E EE E 5 68 Enable Span Side B8ZS Encode and Decode s ssssssssseesesseseesessresrsessresssrersreesrereee 5 68 Regenerate CRC to Span Side eee eeeseeeeeeeeceeeeecaeessecseesaecsecsaecneceseeeensees 5 68 Span Side ESP Framing sson tenteo aeoo ches a EE r EE SEEEN EEE 5 69 Enable YEL Transcode to Span scinni ei stenrik e Ees 5 69 Enable EQP Side B8ZS Encode and Decode cee cecceessecesseeceececeseeeeeeeeeesneeess 5
104. 2 The options shown are the factory default options The Port Addresses are for Board 0 only and are not changeable See the Digiboard manual for Board 1 The Shared I O Address is not changeable NOTE 3 Use only IRQ 2 3 4 or 5 or your personal computer may not work with Access Manage Whichever IRQ is used the Shared I O Address for this board should be 140H CAUTION Do not install software drivers provided by Digiboard for the PC 16 o PC 16 Since Access Manager has its own drivers for these boards using the Digiboard drivers will prevent Access Manager from working with the PC 16 or PC 16 D 12 Access Manager 2000 User Manual Appendix E Event Log Event Log ID Number Codes Archive File Formats The format of the User Login Event archive file uses the LOTUS 1 2 3 import format in which each item is separated by a comma From left to right the data items on each line of the archive file are 1 2 Event timestamp YEAR 2 Event timestamp MONTH 3 Event timestamp DAY 4 Event timestamp HOUR 5 Event timestamp MINUTE 6 Event timestamp SECOND 7 Event ID number Event details character format Access Manager keeps a record of all events occurring on the system in a database When the database is archived the title of these events are converted to a single integer The following Event Log ID Number Codes table matches these integers to their respective events Access Manager
105. 20 or CCC 1020 normally occupies the first slot of the first shelf in each type of node Refer to the Access System 2000 and ConnecT1 Plus manuals for more information about the shelves their controller modules and circuit elements Note You cannot mix AS2000 hardware and ConnecT1 Plus hardware on the same shelf A circuit element is a single module of the parent node to which Access Manager is connected If the parent node is a single line module such as a 551VST List 2 CSU it has only one circuit element If the parent node is a multiline module such as an AS2000 or ConnecT1 Plus a circuit element is a plug in module in one of the shelves controlled by the node This module is identified by the parent node Node Name and a shelf slot index The types of circuit elements are a Single Line Circuit Elements a Dual Line and Multiline Circuit Elements Single Line Circuit Elements The single line circuit elements with which Access Manager interfaces are as follows 551VST List 1 A CSU Includes the 551VST List 1 and 551VST List 1 A CSUs 551VST List 1 B CSU Single line CSU 551VST List 2 CSU The Verilink single line CSU has the same hardware as the 551 VST List 1 B It also has these additional features automatic alarm reporting 9600 baud direct connection and support for the Hayes modem protocol 1 8 Access Manager 2000 User Manual Circuit Network Elements Dual Line and Multiline Circuit Elements The m
106. 2000 User Manual 5 113 Configuring the T1 Network 5 114 Access Manager 2000 User Manual Chapter 6 Alarm reporting This chapter gives you instructions for performing the operations that handle the Alarm Log These operations are a Clearing a Deactivating Viewing Printing a Archiving a Deleting alarm records from the alarm log These operations are performed from the Alarm Status option of the Main Menu To get to the Alarm Status screen a Starting from the Main Menu select Alarm Status The Alarm Status Review Alarm Log Database screen appears Review Alarm Log Database Clear count of autoacknouwledged alarms Deactivate deactivate alarms View Active view active alarms List Active print active alarms Print All print all alarm records Archive archive inactive alarm records Press f or ist char Enter to select Esc to cancel Clearing the autoacknowledged alarm counte In this section Clear means to reset the auto acknowledged alarms counter to zero It is important to note that clear is referred to in other Access Manager 2000 User Manual 6 1 Alarm reporting sections of this manual to describe a trouble condition that no longer exists To reset the auto acknowledged alarms counter to zero 1 Starting from the Main Menu select Alarm Status The Alarm Status Review Alarm Log Database screen appears 2 From this screen select Clea The automatic acknowledge counter at the top of
107. 2000 User Manual 8 17 Monitoring and Troubleshooting Access Manager a Ifthe circuit element is an NCC 2020 CCC 1020 TAC 2010 or TAC 1010 a status screen similar to the one below appears This is defined when a circuit is configured This particular CSU is not part of a defined circuit AS26088 CSU Status Element 1 accessed element Element type ASZ2 80 CSU shelf slot Element SIGMAL1 11 Circuit NOT SPECIFIED current revision Firmware U 18 Hardware 08 8 NET Loss of Signal YES BER Exceeded Loss of Frame YES ESL Exceeded Out of Frame YES ES Exceeded AIS NO Test Signal CRC Error YES UAS Exceeded Low Density N A Yellow alarm Active ELB N A Active RLB Active LLB NO Active PLB BPU Error NO PgUp PREU Element PgDn Next Element FAR CSU NEAR CSU e If the circuit element is a DIU 2130 or DIU 1130 a status screen similar to the one below appears AS26008 DIU 2138 Status Element type DIU 2130 Element TEST 1 5 Firmware VB 16 Hardware U 8 Near End Looped Far End Looped Sending Loop Up Sending Loop Doun Sending Test Pattern Error Counter LOS TxD RxD DTR DSR RTS CTS DCD LL RL TM Port 1 N N N N N N N NNN Port 2 N N N N N N N NNN Ctrl PgUp Ctrl PgDn for prev next circuit element 8 18 Access Manager 2000 User Manual Displaying individual circuit element status e Ifthe circuit element is a DIU 2140 a status screen similar to the one below is displayed ASZ
108. 5 501 Near New Plug 1F7 503 Near Plug Absent alarm 1F9 505 Near Plug Present 259 601 Dual Clocks Present alarm 25A 602 Dual Clocks Present alarm cleared 25B 603 No Clocks Present alarm 25C 604 No Clocks Present alarm cleared 3E9 1001 Alarm Buffer Full 3EA 1002 Near A Power Supply alarm 3EB 1003 Near A Power Supply alarm cleared 3EC 1004 Far A Power Supply alarm 3ED 1005 Far A Power Supply alarm cleared 3EE 1006 Near B Power Supply alarm 3EF 1007 Near B Power Supply alarm cleared 3F0 1008 Far B Power Supply alarm 3F1 1009 Far B Power Supply alarm cleared C 10 Access Manager 2000 User Manual The Status Code Tables Status Codes hex Decimal Equivalent Description 3F2 1010 Power Up Loop Exists alarm 3F3 1011 Power Up Self Test to NET Failure alarm 3F4 1012 Power Up Self Test to EQPT Failure alarm 3F5 1013 Near CSU Power Up 321 801 Port 1 Loss of Signal alarm 322 802 Port 1 Loss of Signal alarm cleared 323 803 Port 2 Loss of Signal alarm 324 804 Port 2 Loss of Signal alarm cleared Access Manager 2000 User Manual C 11 C 12 Access Manager 2000 User Manual Appendix D Installing Serial Ports This appendix describes the settings and procedures used to add a standard serial board or a DigiBoard multichannel board in your personal computer PC or PS 2 Access Manager can address more than the one or two standard serial ports as Comlines DigiBoard DigiCHANNEL boards have been tested to
109. 54016 Out of Frame Although this condition as defined in AT amp T Reference 54016 might not last long enough to be visible to the operator the CSU keeps the YES indication alive for up to 1 second after the condition clears to make it visible AIS Alarm Indication Signal See ANSI T1 403 GRC Error See Out of Frame above The CRC 6 error indication is also kept alive for 1 second Low Density Active ELB LLB No RLB PLB The circuit element is stuffing ONEs into the signal it has been configured to do when receiving a low density signal _This only applies to the EQPT side None of these loopbacks are in progress These loopbacks are activated and deactivated by commands sent over the ESF Data Link BPV Error 8 20 Access Manager 2000 User Manual See Out of Frame above The BPV error indication is also kept alive for 1 second Field ES L ES BER Sec UAS xceeded Displaying individual circuit element status Value Meaning No The number of user defined ES L ES UAS and or BER alarm threshold seconds with excessive error counts have not been exceeded and therefoer have not caused an alarm These thresholds are displayed for the incoming signals from both the EQPT and network NET For more information on these alarm threshold setting options seeAT amp T Reference 54016 Test Signal Circuit element is sending a test signal
110. 551 VST List 1 A does not have an Element Status option For all other ESF CSUs except the 4016 List 1 the Element Status screen is nearly identical to that for the NC E and SIM equipped with a 4016 R Only 551 VST List 1 B and List 2 CSUs have the Enable Alarm Latch option To determine the current status for a 551VST type circuit element 1 In the On line Access sub menu move the cursor to Element Status and press Enter Access Manager 2000 User Manual 8 13 Monitoring and Troubleshooting Access Manager 8 14 element if can t be determined this says UNKNOWN 2 A CSU status screen appears shelf slot if multiline element This indicates standalone unit csu 1 CSU type 4616 LZ circuit name if not defined this says NOT SPECIFIED 551UST ML List 2 CSU Status 1 SAN JOSEC1 Circuit GJ ML TO LA WEST Firmuare 04 7 Hardware VZ BER Exceeded NO Line Power Loss NO Use FCC Part 68 only YES Enable Transparent Mode NO Far end Polling Enabled NO AIS Cnot SIGNAL loop back YES AIS Cnot ESS keep alive YES BER Threshold 6 Repeater Loop Time outtsec 300 PRM Enabled NO Framed all ones to SPAN NO Idle code flags NO Lou Density Pulses Out of Frame CRCiFrm bit Errors BPU Errors EQP SPAN Looped ESF Framing B8ZS Encode B8ZS Decode Regen Transmit CRC YEL Al Tran Enable YEL Al Trancode To EQP SPAN NO YES NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO YES NO NO NO NO NO YES
111. 6 Resetting User performance registers eee eseeceeeeeeeeeeseecaeesaecaecaeceeceseeeeeseeereeeeees 8 38 Activating Deactivating CSU loopbackS oo ee eeeseeeeceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseecaeesaecaecnaecaeenaees 8 39 CSU loopback descriptions s cesccccescevcnsesssevctecsVecssessesepecseeeus ta acebeends aa EREE PES aoas 8 40 PLB Payload Loopback 000 cece cseseecreessececeseceeeseeeeesseeeeeeaeeees 8 41 Access Manager 2000 User Manual ix LLB Line Loopback cerrito E e Er E T 8 41 RLB Repeater Loopback sssrinin iir er i eeo esiis 8 42 ELB Equipment Loopback sssesesssseeesessssresssessesrsresrsresrerrsrerenresesresese 8 43 Proc dures for loopbackS enerne tatiana E E EE A A 8 43 CSU loopback options oo eee eee csceeecseeseeeeceseeeeceeeeseeeaeseeecaeeesecaaesaecsaeaeensesees 8 46 Activate Repeater Loopback RLB oo ieee esesseeseceeceeeeeeteeecseeseeaees 8 46 Activate Line Loopback LLB oc ceceeceeeescessecenceceeeeenceeeneeceeeeneeeseees 8 46 Deactivate Network Loopback PLB or LLB 0 0 eee eee ceeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeee 8 47 Send Inband Loop Up Code To Far End 0 ee eeeeeeeseeeeceeeeneenees 8 47 Send Inband Loop Down Code To Far End oe eseeecreeeeeneees 8 47 Activate PLB osese rasie aiae e E E EE TEE ETE TETE ri Ti 8 47 Deactivate PLB icriseroreria cnr ecn onenn E e VEEE Ee 8 47 Activate EQPT Loopback ELB eesesseesssssssssesssessessesrsesresrresseresesseeseesse 8 47 Deactivate EQPT Loopback ELB and RLB seees
112. 608 DIU 2146 Status Element Z Element type DIU 2140 Element BOSTON SALES 1 2 Firmware V 6 Hardware V 1 Port 1 Port 2 Port 3 Port 4 Port 5 Near End Looped NO NO NO NO NO Ctrl PgUp Ctrl1 PgDn for prevnext circuit element e Ifthe circuit element is a TIU 2850 or TIU 1850 a status screen similar to the one below appears AS28606 TIU 2850 Status Element Z Element type TIU 2858 Element SAN JOSEL1 2 Firmuare V 4 Hardware V 8 Frequency i EQP Clock NO NET Clock NO DIU NO EXT TTL NO EXT 422 NO Two clocks NO Ctrl PgUp Ctrl PgDn for prev next circuit element 5 View all the circuit elements in the range The CID Qu and Ctrl Gn key combinations respectively let you access the previous or next circuit element in the range you have selected To display the status of a circuit element such as a CSU at the far end via the ESF Data Link press after accessing the near end circuit element Access Manager 2000 User Manual 8 19 Monitoring and Troubleshooting Access Manager 6 After viewing the current status press CF2 to return to the On line Access Menu Reviewing CSU status Except for Low Densit the CSU monitors the status conditions for both the NET and EQPT i e data equipment sides Loopbacks apply to one side only The status items are as follows Field Value Meaning Loss of Signal SeeAT amp T Reference 62411 Loss of Frame SeeAT amp T Reference
113. 8 Y Enable NET side B8ZS 7N Poll far end status F8 NOPOLL Regenerate CRC 6 to NET Y RLB loopback timeout 1 MIN Enable YEL transcode to NET Y Enable PRM A GCM Signal to EQP on NET errors Y AISCnot SIG during loopback Y Signal to EQP on NET LOF Y EQP Distance feet F8 8 133 Signal to EQP on NET LOS Y EQP framing format F8 SF NET RCV Jitter BUF 4 bits Y Enable EQP side B8ZS 7N Data Link idlecode Flags N Regenerate CRC 6 to EQP Y Power up near end self test Y Enable YEL transcode to EQP N Loopback Enable F8 Y Signal to NET on EQP errors Y Enable testing options F8 Y Signal to NET on EQP LOF Y DIU data bus used F8 NONE EQP RCV Jitter BUF 4 bits Y DIU timing F8 NONE Enable EQP OOF transparency N Disabling this option also disables the indented options below it Press F5 to update element F6 to update entire range F8 for options Ctrl PgUp Ctrl PgDn for prev next circuit element These options are described in the following sections This option determines whether the circuit element is installed and Installed and operational This option marked with an asterisk must be set to YES Operational in order to enable any of the following options including collection of performance monitoring data alarm reporting etc You must set the Installed and Operational option for the circuit element s parent node to YES before Access Manager will allow you to set
114. 9 2 19 2 S Baud Rate Configuration Options for AS2000 and ConnecTI1 Plus Port 1 Channels1 and 2 Port 2 Channel 3 Port 3 Channel 4 Port 4 Channel 5 Use this mode to transmit subrate data on data Port 1 The rate on this port can be 0 3 0 6 1 2 2 4 4 8 or 9 6 kbps After selecting DSOA also set the data rate individually for data Port 1 Ports 2 through 5 are not available if the DSOA mode is selected In this mode the data is repeated enough times to fill the 48 kbps payload Use this mode to transmit data on a 19 2 kbps port with forward error correction FEC In this mode Port 1 is used for transmission with error correction according to AT amp T Publication 54075 Ports 2 through 5 are not used in this mode Use this mode to transmit 19 2 kbps on EQP Ports 1 and 2 and subrate data of 9 6 kbps or less on Port 3 In this mode Ports 4 and 5 are not available When this mode is chosen the rates for Ports 1 and 2 are automatically entered in the Baud Rate column of the DIU 2140 Configuration Menu and you must specify the desired subrate for Port 3 as described in Baud Rate on page 5 101 The DSOB channels are assigned as follows Port 1 Channels 1 and 2 Port 2 Channels 3 and 4 Port 3 Channel 5 Ports 4 and 5 are not used After choosing the data transmission mode option above specify the data rate for each data port as required The rates for some of the ports may already be entered depending
115. AC TAC NCC DIU SHELF 1 Network Elements TAC DIU DIU DIU MASTER NCC DIU DIU SHELF 1 gt To next node SHELF 2 SIM Accesses one 551VST MLS Shelf containing up to ten circuit elements 4016 R CSUs Access Manager connects to the SIM a plug in module in the shelf NC E Accesses up to five 551VST MLS Shelves containing up to ten circuit elements 4016 R CSUs per shelf Access Manager connects to the NC E module 551VST ML List 1 Accesses up to two 551 VST Multiline Shelves containing up to 14 circuit elements 4016 List 1 and or List 2 CSUs per shelf Access Manager connects to the NMC List 1 module 551VST ML List 2 Accesses up to two 551 VST Multiline Shelves containing up to 14 circuit elements 4016 List 1 and or List 2 CSUs per shelf Access Manager connects to the NMC List 2 module Access Manager 2000 User Manual 1 7 Access Manager Overview Le Circuit Element Access System 2000 Accesses up to two multiline shelves containing up to 13 circuit elements per shelf NCC 2020 TA 2010 DIU 2130 DIU 2140 and TIU 2850 Access Manager connects to the master NCC 2020 a plug in module which is also a circuit element Access System 2000 is also available in a dual line configuration see previous page under Dual Line Nodes Only AS2000 and ConnecT1 Plus nodes can be daisy chained The master NCC 20
116. Activity menu appears again Verify that the STAT LED is lit yellow on the near end and far end CSUs NCC or TAC indicating the test is in progress If the STAT LED flashes red and yellow at the far end the test has failed CSU is detecting errors in the looped QRSS signal Replace the far end NCC orTAC and repeat the acceptance procedure The near end NCC or TAC and the T1 circuit were checked in the previous steps using the LLB loopback of this procedure Select the View Test Status Results option Ifthe screen shows some Errors the test has failed Replace the far end NCC or TAC and repeat the acceptance procedure The near end NCC or TAC and the DS1 circuit were checked in the previous steps using the LLB loopback of this procedure Press to return to the Select CSUTest Activity screen then select the Abort Test in Progress option and press Eren Press to return to the On line AS2000 screen Choose the Loopbacks option and press Enter Enter the Shelf number and Plug slot number of the NCC or TAC and press the CF5 function key Choose the Deactivate Network Loopback PLB and LLB option and press Enter Access Manager 2000 User Manual CSU acceptance testing J 54 Type Y to specify the far end Network Loopbacks and press Enter J 55 Repeat this procedure for each remaining NCC and TAC to be tested J 56 This procedure is complete The NCCs and TACs are now ready for operation Access Manager
117. B is set and the network does not supply timing then NET timing the unlooped CSU is invalid and introduces errors in the test When this test is complete you will remove the loopback and restore the CSU to its original timing You will then configure the CSU timing that is required for this test 8 52 Access Manager 2000 User Manual Testing CSU You will activate the CSU loopback that is required for this test For example when sending a test signal toward the NET network an RLB is first activated at the near end NCC or TAC An LLB or PLB can be activated at the far end As another example when a test signal is sent toward the EQPT equipment a PLB is first activated at the near end This T1 test signal application is shown in the figure below Figure 8 2 Applying a T1 test signal Test toward equipment gt ax eX gt D Eqpt y LB Network LLB PLB Eqpt DET T J Near end NCC or TAC Far end NCC or TAC Test toward net _ gt a DET Eqpt PLB Network s GEN 4 NCC or TAC GEN Test Signal Generator DET Error Detector Counter To test an AS2000 CSU 1 When you get the On line Access sub menu select the Select Test option The Specify Circuit Element to Receive Test Request screen appears 2 Enter the shelf in which the desired NCC or TAC is located This number can be from 1 to 4 in each Access System
118. BER exceeded 66 102 Near NET BER exceeded cleared 67 103 Near NET ES L exceeded 68 104 Near NET ES L exceeded cleared 69 105 Near NET ES exceeded 6A 106 Near NET ES exceeded cleared 6B 107 Near NET UAS exceeded 6C 108 Near NET UAS exceeded cleared 6D 109 Near NET LLB looped 6E 110 Near NET LLB looped cleared 6F 111 Near NET PLB looped C 6 Access Manager 2000 User Manual The Status Code Tables Status Code hex Decimal Equivalent Description 70 112 Near NET PLB looped cleared 71 113 Near NET LOS alarm 72 114 Near NET LOS alarm cleared 73 115 Near NET RAI alarm 74 116 Near NET RAI alarm cleared 75 117 Near NET LOF alarm 76 118 Near NET LOF alarm cleared 77 119 Near NET AIS alarm 78 120 Near NET AIS alarm cleared 79 121 Near NETTest SIG alarm 7A 122 Near NETTest SIG alarm cleared 7B 123 Near CSU loss of external clock alarm 7C 124 Near CSU loss of external clock alarm cleared Access Manager 2000 User Manual C 7 Table C 7 AS2000 Near End Equipment Status Codes Status Codes hex Decimal Equivalent Description c9 201 Near EQPT BER exceeded CA 202 Near EQPT BER exceeded cleared CB 203 Near EQPT ES L exceeded CC 204 Near EQPT ES L exceeded cleared CD 205 Near EQPT ES exceede CE 206 Near EQPT ES exceeded cleare CF 207 Near EQPT UAS exceeded DO 208 Near EQPT UAS exceeded cleared
119. BER threshold 5 79 Alarm Log archive record E 3 Alarm log 6 2 6 3 Alarms accumulation 5 19 5 21 channel protocol 4 10 double reporting of 5 66 5 81 monitoring by Accumaster 4 20 monitoring by other hosts 5 18 monitoring by Accumaster 2 15 plain English format C 1 print inactive 6 10 report record formats C 1 selecting by time date for deactivation 6 5 status operations 6 1 tagging for deactivation 6 4 terse messages C 1 viewing current 8 25 Archive alarm log records 6 8 file formats E 1 performance database records 7 15 archive 7 15 Automatic data port configuration 4 20 Index 1 Index Bar chart of performance data 7 6 Cc changing 4 21 Circuit 1 9 definition 5 102 listing all definitions 5 107 viewing a definition 5 107 Circuit element 5 47 5 57 Circuit element 1 8 definition 5 44 mixed 4016 List and 2 CSUs 5 57 multiline plug ins 1 9 single line 1 8 ComDesign Mux 4 19 adding node 5 40 port 1 10 Comline adding 4 17 built in D 12 COM 1 port assignment 4 17 comlines 4 16 Configuration DIU 2140 5 98 configuration 5 98 configuration error messages 5 102 Configuration operations 1 16 4 16 communication ports 4 16 Configuration SMDS CSU defining alarm conditions 5 78 to 5 81 Configuring network circuit elements 5 44 ConnecT1 Plus multiline node configuration 1 6 Connections direct connect access arrangement 4 19 remote dial up port access arr
120. CC 1020 and TAC 1010 indicate a PLB in progress SPAN is equivalent to network NET Equipment Message 551 VST List 1 SPA sOOPED 551 VST List 1 A 4016 List 1 SPA LOOPED 551 VST List 1 B SPA EAR END LOOPED 551 VST List 2 4016 List 2 SPA OOPED 4016 R SPA LOOPED NCC orTAC NET LED flashes amber LLB Line Loopback When a line loopback LLB is activated the signal from the DS 1 network is looped back to the network Since the looped signal does not pass through the CSU except for the repeater and critical protection circuitry the LLB is useful for testing the DS1 line All BPVs received from the network are returned on the transmit pair Most CSUs may be configured to pass the network signal intact to the EQPT or send unframed ALL ONESs i e AIS to the EQPT during loopback A far end LLB can be activated and deactivated via the 4 kbps ESF Data Link or with inband codes sent from the near end CSU These inband codes can be generated by all Verilink ESF CSUs except for the 551 VST Access Manager 2000 User Manual 8 41 Monitoring and Troubleshooting Access Manager 8 42 LE List 1 1 A and 4016 List 1 Note that Access Manager blocks transmission of the inband loop up and loop down codes from the far end CSU to the near end CSU The following LEDs light up on the CSUs NCCs CCCs and TACs during an LLB SPAN is equivalent to network NET
121. CHANNEL PC 4 PC 8 in IBM PC XT andAT on pageD 9 Refer to the appropriate hardware manual for other port addresses IRQs Shared I O addresses and status masks NOTE 2 If your personal computer has a physical COMport before the Digiboards are added see the following tables show the numbering sequence for data ports Table D 5 Serial Ports for First Digi CHANNEL PC 4 PC 8 in IBM PC XT arndAT on pageD 9 e Table D 5 Serial Ports for First Digi CHANNEL PC 4 PC 8 in IBM PC XT andAT on pageD 9 e Table D 6 Serial Ports for Second Digi CHANNEL PC 8 in IBMPC XT and AT on pageD 10 In this case the first port of the digiboard would be labeled COM 2 If your computer has more than one physical COM port before installing the Digiboard the number of the first Digiboard port would rise respectively REMEMBER no matter how many physical COM ports your computer has ALWAYS number the first DigiBoard port address at 100H NOTE 3 Use only IRQ 2 3 4 or 5 or your PC may not work with Access Manage If IRQ 2 or 4 is used the Shared I O Address for this board should be 189H NOTE 4 Install multiple Digi CHANNEL PC X boards without daisy chaining Therefore you should use the IRQs shown in these tables and set both boards to Board Identification Number 0 i e jumper J9 pin 2 to pin 3 an jumper J10 pin 2 to pin 3 CAUTION Do not insiall software drivers provided by Digiboard for the PC 4 o PC 8 Sinc
122. CO Error Free 99 3 Availability 99 857 AVERAGE CO to CO Error Free 96 5 Availability 99 7 define user filter thresholds as percentages define user filter thresholds in seconds Press ft or ist char Enter to select Esc to cancel Steps 2 through 5 deal with choosing filters for the performance data 2 Access Manager 2000 User Manual If you selected USER on the Choose register for data analysis screen all of the filters shown in the screen above are available to you If you selected ADDITIONAL or EQP only theNo Filter and Bar Chart options are available Select the performance data analysis filter you want and press Enter a If you choose P Use continue with Step 4 b If you choose S Use continue with Step 5 c If you choose other filters or the Bar Chart option continue with Step 6 When you select a particular filter you ask to see only that data which exceeds the filter s parameters Base your selection on the following descriptions of the filters Reporting performance data No Filter This option allows you to display all 15 minute intervals within the selected time frame which have been stored in the database including the intervals for which data was not available when the circuit element was polled HCDS Filter High Capacity Digital Service HCDS filter performs data analysis based on the standard tariff of 95 error free seconds and 99 7 availability DDS Filter This is equi
123. E Configuration Display and SIM Configuration Display screens a The possible CSUs are numbered 1 to 28 a The Far End CSU indicator is on the line below the near end a The right side of the screen has a Power Supply A and B 551 VST List 1 A or List 1 B or A B C and D for 551VST List 2 status indication Access Manager 2000 User Manual 8 9 Monitoring and Troubleshooting Access Manager for an AS2000 node shelf number shelf type Firmuare V4 2 1st Letter S NCC2 2 C TACZ201 D DIUZ130 O DIUZ14 T TIUZ85 undetermined 2nd Letter 0 Operational Alarm enabled N Operational Alarm disabled A typical Access System 2000 node configuration is shown below Slot 2 on near end Far end CSU of CSU in Slot 2 AS28880 Configuration SMDS Hardware U 8 di F A R DD 2D aD Tt 2D Tt 2D Tt D vD vD vD a D i a SF S OA ZR 3 1 hon Iov oon INOV loon 1won orv Leen INEM Iwen M DIU2132 Absent X Missing S Spare Press F8 to retrieve amp store node and element configuration To have the maximum number of slots each node can have up to 2 multiline and 4 dual line shelves numbered 1 2 3 and 4 The multiline shelves have 13 slots for circuit elements and the dual line shelves have 2 slots for circuit elements In this screen the slots are numbered S01 to S13 reading from left to right Paired with each of these slots is FAR which designat
124. ESF Data Link The mode of access for near end nodes is either by direct connection or through a statistical multiplexer or modem additionally one node controller can access another node controller through a daisy chain Circuit Element A circuit element is a single module of the parent node to which Access Manager is connected If the parent node is a single line module such as a 551VST List 2 CSU it has only one circuit element If the parent node is a multiline module such as an AS2000 type the node may have several elements Circuit A circuit consists of any two network circuit elements and the interconnecting DS1 line that have Access Manager access in a DS1 network Route A route consists of the two network circuit elements at DS1 network circuit end points as accessed by Access Manager For Access Manager a circuit and a route are functionally equivalent The On line Menu allows you to access nodes and circuit elements for testing and maintenance functions Through this menu you can acquire the configuration status and DS1 performance data of the network You can also reset the user registers and perform out of service testing Access Manager 2000 User Manual 1 17 Access Manager Overview 1 18 Le It has the following major branches On Line Access Menu Display ___Access Range _ Element Configuration Display __Circuit Status Diagram ___ Status Element __ User Statistics ___ Telco Sta
125. F10 gt key to save the changes 7 Remove the Reference Diskette from drive A 8 Reboot your computer To configure Access Manager install the Comlines as described in Chapter 4 Configuring Access Manager Ensure that your computer has been rebooted before you start configuring the Comlines Tabl eD 4 Serial Ports for Digi gt CHANNEL MC 4 or MC 8 in Micro Channel IBM PS 2 on pag eD 6 lists the parameters used to define the ports of the DigiBoard MC 4 and MC 8 The following list describes conditions for the table columns of Table D 4 Serial Ports for Digi CHANNEL MC 4 or MC 8 in Micro Channel IBM PS 2 on page D 6 PORT DigiBoard DigiCHANNEL MC 4 boards use only Ports 1 through 4 COMline Name For an MC 8 eight consecutive Comlines must be reserved even if all ports are not used The starting Comline can be from COM 1 to COMS9 For an MC 4 four consecutive Comlines must be reserved The starting Comline can be from COM1 to COM13 If the built in serial port is not used you may start with COM1 Port Address and Shared I O Address Use a different IRQ number for each DigiBoard with the first board being IRQ 3 Use only the following IRQs for the second board 4 or 5 Access Manager 2000 User Manual D 5 IRQ The Shared I O Status Port Mask always has the same value for the same port number independent of the port address range of the board Status Mask The following range of starting and ending Port Address
126. Facility Data Link or Connection Option Direct Modem or Daisy Chain X 25PAD Report alarms Baud Rate Note 1 9600 1200 2400 1200 9600 9600 Query Path COM 1 16 Phone No None Port Name Alarm Path COM 1 16 Phone No None Access Manager Port Name Previous Node in Chain Node Name None None None Note 2 3 Enable Alarm Reporting Yes Yes No Yes Do not report alarms Alarm Path None None None None 5 22 Access Manager 2000 User Manual Configuring nodes None ComDesign Access Arrangement Facility Data Link or Connection Option Direct Modem or Daisy Chain X 25PAD Enable Alarm Reporting No No No No Report alarms only when Access Manager contacts node Alarm Path None None None None Enable Alarm Reporting Yes Yes No Yes NOTE 1 Currently a modem COMline configured for 2400 baud cannot be used to originate calls to a nod configured for 1200 baud Configure the node in Access Manager for 2400 baud and allow the modem to automatically downgrade to 1200 baud NOTE 2 Modem and ComDesign are not available for the second and third AS2000 nodes in a daisy chain although either of these access arrangements are available to the first AS2000 node NOTE 3 The Previous Node in Chain option is only available for AS2000 nodes Access Manager s new Alternate Alarm Path AAP feature is available Defining alternate for use with Access System 2000 products alarm paths The alternate alarm path lets you establish separate
127. HERE AUTOMATIC Press Enter the program 4 If you are using ppeANYWHERE to control Access Manager from a remote VT 100 terminal or equivalent emulation type AM2000 BW VT and press Enter LES Note The BW command may be optional for your setup Refer to Creating a batch file for automatic start up on p age2 9 for detailed information on the BW command When Access Manager is started in the VT100 mode the bottom of the screen displays escape key sequences instead of function keys Access Manager 2000 User Manual 3 17 Using Access Manager LE Making a selection Entering information into the screens Note When Access Manager is started in the VT100 mode the bottom of the screen displays escape key sequences instead of function keys 5 After Access Manager is started the AM2000 Startup Screen appears and prompts you to enter a user name to log into Access Manager Figure 3 1 Username Screen on page 3 2 shows this screen All menu selections can be made by pressing the or H keys to highlight the desired option and then pressing Enter t that option You can also select a menu option by typing the first character of that option unless there are multiple options with the same first character When multiple menu options appear with the same first character and you type that character Access Manager always chooses the first option If an option is numbered then typing that
128. I 0 status port mask COMMENTS cc eee eee eee eae Ce ee er as Press F5 to save definition F8 for access arrangement list All numeric entries except the baud rate are in hexadecimal and are followed by an H You can enter the H manually or the program will automatically enter it The Comline definition is made up of numerous variables To change any variables continue with the following sections You can do the following a Add one or more comlines a Edit delete or view existing comlines m List print all the comlines that have been defined From the Installation screen select Comlines The screen labeled Revise Comlines Definitions appears Revise Comline Definitions add new comline definition Edit edit comline definition Delete remove comline definition Vieu view comline definitions List print comline definitions Press f or ist char Enter to select Esc to cancel Access Manager 2000 User Manual Configuring the site Adding a new comline definition 1 From the Installation Menu select Comline 2 From the Revise Comline Definitions screen select Add 3 The Add Comline Definition screen appears showing the default value for each item listed Add Comline Definition Comline name 6 Port addr soe ees he hans oe IRQ number ceeeeeeee Baud Rate see c cere eees Access arrangement Shared I 0 status port addr Shared I70 status port mask Comm
129. I O This data entry field is used for interface boards with more Status Port than one serial port and using a shared IRQ number and Mask shared I O status port address Appe ndixD Installing Serial Ports gives the correct shared I O status port masks fo each port number Comments Up to four lines of alphanumeric comments and spaces can be entered with 30 characters per line This field does not affect operation of the Comline A note about AS2000 or ConnecT1 Plus If the node is an AS2000 type daisy chained to other AS2000 type nodes the daisy chain connection to the first node must be direct and Modem 4 20 Access Manager 2000 User Manual EE Configuring the site Call Answer Modem Answer Only ComDesign Mux and Autoconfig are not available for the second and third nodes Access Manager uses Hayes protocol for modems If the phone number is not preceded by an alpha character Access Manager assumes that the phone line in use is a dual tone multifrequency DTMF line and prefixes the phone number with the characters ATDT However if the phone line requires dial pulsing you must enter the prefix ATDP to the number yourself Refer to the modem manual for more information on how to use these commands This number should include an access prefix followed by a comma if the lines are connected to a PBX The comma causes the modem to pause for a set time period to allow for a second dial tone after dialing the access prefix
130. Interface Specification This information is proprietaryto AT amp T Table C 1 Terse Alarm Message Layout Field Byte Length Description 1 0 1 SOH 0 x 01 2 1 2 2 Year of the alarm timestamp C 2 Access Manager 2000 User Manual The Status Code Tables Field Byte Length Description 3 3 4 2 Month of the alarm timestamp 4 5 6 2 Day of the alarm timestamp 5 7 8 2 Hour of the alarm timestamp 6 9 10 2 Minute of the alarm timestamp 7 11 12 2 Second of the alarm timestamp 8 13 32 20 Name of the node 9 33 37 5 Node 10 38 40 Node or Circuit Element type 26 551VST List 2 33 NC E 32 Sl 24 551VST ML List 2 NMC List 2 48 NC 49 TAC 56 ConnecT1 Plus 58 CC 11 41 42 2 Shelf number A value of 00 indicates the alarm is for the Controlle NCC CCC itself rather than for a specific shelf 12 43 44 2 Plug in number A value of 00 indicates that alarm is for the shelf specified by shelf number Otherwise the alarm is for a specific plug in NOTE If you are using AS2000 or ConnecT1 Plus equipment use Field 13 for byte 45 Otherwise use Fields 13A and 13B 13 45 3 These bytes are used as status codes for identifying changes in condition of Access System equipment 13A 45 1 Set or clear flag 1 status changes reported are set conditions 0 status changes reported are cleared conditions 13B 46 n Status codes changed E
131. Main Me This allows you to configure the Access Manager Here you set up certain housekeeping functions like date and time what comlines are used and where you want reports sent and printed These commands affect the active alarm counter and the alarm log database Alarm Status Menu An active alarm is an alarm record in the log which has not been manually deactivated by the user and cannot be deleted or archived Alarms that are deactivated can be deleted and or archived Allows you to define or edit the configurations of the nodes circuit elements circuits and routes in the network Configuration Menu Allows you to access nodes and circuit elements for testing and maintenance functions On Line Access Menu e Through this menu you can acquire the network configuration status and DS1 performance data You can also reset the user registers and perform out of service testing Allows you to process DS1 performance data stored in the Access Manager database Database Access Menu Not all sub menus will be accessible at all times Whether or not a sub menu is accessible depends on the type of node you are accessing Access Manager 2000 User Manual 1 13 Access Manager Overview The Utilities option of the Main Menu allows you to configure the Utilities Access Manager system It has the following major branches Date Time Installation Site ___Report __ On l
132. Manager This section provides you with information about screen appearance and content using the keyboard and keystrokes navigating between screens This section discusses the basics of moving around in the Access Manager screens Using a color monitor If you are in a View screen or if the present access level prevents you from making changes to a particular part of the database the entries and options appear in red If you are in an Edit or Add screen and the access level allows you to change an entry or option the entries are displayed in white on blue at the cursor position and in blue on white for all other positions Screens When you first log into Access Manager you re presented with a Username screen shown in Figure 3 1 Username Screen on pag e3 2 Access Manager 2000 User Manual 3 1 Using Access Manager Figure 3 1 Username Screen Access Manager serial numbe Access Manager 2008 Serial Number NONE Copyright Verilink Corporation 1988 1989 1996 1991 1992 Enter Username input screen for user name In this screen you enter your username and susequently your password This logs you on to Access Manager 2000 Once you ve logged on the Main Menu will appear That screen and all other Access Manager 2000 screens are framed within the boundaries of the screen shown in Figure 3 2 Basic display on host PC on page 3 3 3 2 Access Manager 2000 Us
133. NO NO NO NO PgUp PREV Element PgDn NEXT Element lt FAR CSU NEAR CSU This screen shows a typical status screen for a 551VST ML List 2 CSU If the CSU is a multiline element its slot and shelf appear in the first line 3 View all the circuit elements in the range The Ct Gaup and CID Gia key combinations respectively let you access the previous or next circuit element in the range you have selected To display the status of a circuit element such as a CSU at the far end via the ESF Data Link press after accessing the near end circuit element All circuit element revisions except for the 551 VST List 1 B CSU respond to this command A 551 VST List 1 A does not have the status display capability When the far end status is displayed press to see the near end CSU status again Access Manager 2000 User Manual revision levels Displaying individual circuit element status 4 Press CF2 to return to the On line Access Menu Reviewing the status This figure shows status and configuration information for a 4016 List 2 CSU in a shelf 551UST ML List 2 CSU Status 1 CSU 1 CSU type 4016 LZ Element SAN JOSEL1 Circuit SJ ML TO LA WEST Firmware V4 7 Hardware VZ EQP SPAN BER Exceeded Lou Density Pulses NO Line Power Loss Out of Frame NO Use FCC Part 68 only CRCiFrm bit Errors NO Enable Transparent Mode BPU Errors NO Far end Polling Enabled EQ
134. O the TIU is timed internally ee Note fan external timing frequency has been applied and the above condition still exists check the external device providing the timing frequency and all connecting cables Displaying circuit status If you want a larger overview of what errors are occurring in the circuit you can review a status diagram of the circuit To review the circuit status 1 In the On line Access sub menu move the cursor to Circuit Status Diag and press Enter 8 24 Access Manager 2000 User Manual Displaying circuit status A status diagram like the one below will appear These display information when a circuit and far end circuit elements are defined AS26886 CSU Status diagram Circuit NOT SPECIFIED Near SIGMAL1 1 gt p lt No Pulses Loss of Signal Loss of Frame Out of Frame CRC Error BER Exceeded UAS Exceeded Ctrl lt PgUp gt Cntl lt PgDn gt for prev next circuit element All possible error indications are shown in the screen above 2 After viewing the current status diagram press F2 to return to the On line Access Menu Alarms are shown at the location at which they occur If alarms are present the DS1 line section in alarm appears in flashing red If no alarms are present the line section is green or blank if you are using a monochrome display Alarm designations are shown flashing adjacent to the circuit section in which they o
135. OH 2 COM3 108H 3H 140H 1H 3 COM4 110H 3H 140H 2H 4 COM5 118H 3H 140H 3H 5 COM6 120H 3H 140H 4H 6 COM7 128H 3H 140H 5H 7 COM8 130H 3H 140H 6H 8 COM9 138H 3H 140H 7H NOTE 1 The DigiBoard DigiCHANNEL PC 4 and PC 8 were formerly called DigiCHANNEL COM 4 and COM 8 respectively If you are installing a second DigiCHANNEL PC 8 board see TableD 6 Serial Ports for Secon DigiCHANNEL PC 8 in IBM PC XT and AT on pageD 10 for more Comline definitions Refer to the appropriate hardware manual for other port addresses IRQs Shared I O addresses and status masks NOTE 2 DigiBoard Digi CHANNEL PC 4 boards only use Ports 1 through 4 NOTE 3 If your personal computer has a physical COMport before the Digiboards are added see the following tables show the numbering sequence for data ports e Table D 5 Serial Ports for First Digi CHANNEL PC 4 PC 8 in IBM PC XT andAT on pageD 9 e Table D 6 Serial Ports for Second Digi CHANNEL PC 8 in IBMPC XT and AT on pageD 10 In this case the first port of the digiboard would be labeled COM 2 If your computer has more than one physical COM port before installing the Digiboard the number of the first Digiboard port would rise respectively REMEMBER no matter how many physical COM ports your computer has ALWAYS number the first DigiBoard port address at 100H NOTE 4 The options shown are the factory default options Use only IRQ 2 3 4 or 5 or your PC may no
136. ONF on the DigiWARE disk that comes with the DigiCHANNEL board 1 Make a working backup copy of your original IBM Reference Diskette and store the original in a safe place The backup disk must be a formatted high density 1 44 megabyte 3 5 inch diskette At this time also make a copy of yourDigiWARE disk and store the original in a safe place 2 Copy the 6FES ADF and 6FE ADF files from your DigiBoard DigiWARE disk to your working copy of the Reference Diskette The ADF file contains the information that the system needs to know about the Digi CHANNEL MC 4 or MC 8 board Access Manager 2000 User Manual D 3 Hardware Installation PS 2 Configuration CAUTION It is imperative that the 6FE5 ADF and 6FE6 ADF files are copied to your configuration disk Reference Diskette BEFORE you install the DigiCHANNEL board The self configuring PS 2 system may not be able to boot up with the board in place and the ADF file missing You can t go back and copy the file with a system that doesn t boot The second procedure hardware installation involves installing the DigiCHANNEL board in your system unit Refer to your PS 2 hardware manual for this procedure When you have completed the hardware installation you are ready to use the disk prepared in the preparation procedure and boot the system to run the IBM Automatic Configuration program With the DigiCHANNEL MC 4 or MC 8 board installed in the system unit you are now ready to co
137. P SPAN Looped NO AIS Cnot SIGNAL loop back ESF Framing NO AIS Cnot ESS keep alive B8ZS Encode NO BER Threshold B8ZS Decode NO Repeater Loop Time out sec Regen Transmit CRC NO PRM Enabled YEL Al Tran Enable NO Framed all ones to SPAN YEL Al Trancode To NO Idle code flags PgUp PREV Element PgDn NEXT Element lt FAR CSU NEAR CSU Both equipment side and network status of the CSU is displayed Notice that one column of status conditions applies only to the DTE side while beside it is a column of status conditions applying only to the NET side The parameters listed in this display depend on the type of CSU The Circuit Element Status screen is identical except for the Enable Alarm Latch Framed All Ones and Idle Code Flags options which are only on the 551 VST List 1 B and List 2 only for the following node types e NC E e SIM e 551VST List 1 B e 551VST List 2 e 551VST ML List 1 with 4016 List 2 Access Manager 2000 User Manual 8 15 Monitoring and Troubleshooting Access Manager The fields and their values are described below Field Value Meaning BER Exceeded No The user set BER threshold for the network has not been exceeded Line Power Loss No The critical circuits are receiving power line or local Enable Transparent No The CSU is not operating in transparent ode mode Far end Polling No The near end CSU is not set to poll the
138. P side B8ZS encode Repeater loop timeout Csecs Enable EQP side B8ZS decode Enable far end polling 7 Regenerate CRC to EQP side Enable transparent mode 7 EQP side ESF framing 7 Use FCC part 68 rule only AISCnot SIGNAL loop back AISCnot ESS keep alive Enable alarm latch 7 5 x Disabling this option also disables the indented options below it Press F5 to update circuit element 5 52 Access Manager 2000 User Manual Configuring circuit elements e 551VST List 2 CSU Edit Options for 551UST LIST 2 CSU 5 xInstalled and operational 7 Retrieve performance data 7 Retrieve far end data 7 Enable alarm reporting 7 Enable remote configuration 1 E BER threshold 4 9 gt Repeater loop timeout Csecs Enable far end polling 7 Enable transparent mode 7 Use FCC part 68 rule only AISCnot SIGNAL loop back 7 AISCnot ESS keep alive Enable alarm latch 7 Enable PRM 7 J 9 Enable span side B8ZS encode Enable span side B8ZS decode Regenerate CRC to span side Span side ESF framing 7 Enable YEL transcode to span Enable EQP side B8ZS encode Enable EQP side B8ZS decode Regenerate CRC to EQP side EQP side ESF framing 7 Enable YEL transcode to EQP Idle code flags 7 Disabling this option also disables the indented options below it These options m
139. Parts per Million Payload Loopback Performance Data Phase PLB ppm On line is a selection of Access Manager 2000 available from the Main Menu Under On line are operations that access the contents of a circuit element s performance registers and any trouble conditions which the circuit element may be detecting Under the On line menu circuit elements may be commanded to run diagnostic tests and set loopbacks The current configuration of network elements is accessible from the On line menu of Access Manager 2000 See Out of Frame A condition when any two of four or two of five consecutive frame bits received from the T1 line are incorrect This causes the CSU to attempt to reframe A second during which an Out of Frame condition exists A technique used to help detect data transmission errors A non information bit is added to a byte This refers to the number of unique units present in a group of one million units This loopback loops the signal from the DS 1 T1 line back to the DS 1 line intact The signal passes through the CSU when using PLB including the repeater making it useful for testing the CSU from the far end circuit Information generated and stored by the CSU of an NCC or TAC that indicates the transition quality of a signal received from the DS 1 T1 equipment or network This information includes data such as ESF error events errored seconds etc The performance data is stored in numerous reg
140. S is sufficient to enable retrieval of near end performance data but not sufficient to retrieve far end performance data For this you ll need to set the Retrieve Far End Performance Data option 5 62 Access Manager 2000 User Manual Retrieve Far En Performance Data Enable Alarm Reporting Configuration Options for 551VST Elements These registers are known as near end and far end user registers because only the user can reset them The Telco can examine this data but cannot reset these registers a The default setting for this option is YES This option permits Access Manager to retrieve and store the performance data from a far end CSU through this CSU For this option to work the following two conditions must be met a The Retrieve Performance Data option must also be set to YES b An Access Manager circuit must be configured between the near end and far end CSUs The following descriptions will aid you in setting the Retrieve Far End Performance Data field a If access to a far end CSU is not required set this option to NO a If access to a far end CSU is required for collection of performance data set this optionto YES The default setting for this option is NO Before you can enable alarm reporting with this option the parent node must have the following a Its Enable Alarm Reporting option enabled and b A downloaded alarm path If a CSU circuit element should not report alarm conditi
141. SEFS registers e B 24 Hour Additional data This Bar chart shows the performance of the CSU registers including the OOFS LOFC LOSS RAIS AISS and BERS registers e C 24 Hour EQPT data This bar chart shows the performance of the CSU registers including the ES UAS ES L OOFS DTED and DBER registers It is important to note that these are the only EQPT side registers and all other registers are NET side e D 24 Hour Teco data This bar chart shows the performance of the nodes registers including the ES UAS BES SES and LOFC registers 8 34 Access Manager 2000 User Manual Displaying 24 Hour Performance Data Bar Charts 3 The 24 Hour xxx Performance Data Bar Chart of the first CSU circuit element is now displayed Online 24 Hour USER Performance Data for SIGMAL1 1 Errored Seconds 01 30 1992 16 36 16 38 26 30 80 3 64 30 08 38 12 30 PgUp Prev Register PgDn Next Register ESC Cancel F8 Options PgUp PREV CSU PgDn NEXT CSU lt FAR CSU NEAR CSU View performance data bar charts from the other registers To access the previous or next CSU circuit element in the range you have selected use the Ctrl Ceti and Ctrl Qana key combinations respectively To display the registers of a CSU at the far end via the ESF Data Link press after accessing the near end CSU circuit element 4 If you wish to print the bar chart or change the Y axis press The following screen appears
142. SIM NC E 551 VST ML List 1 and 551VST ML List 2 multiline nodes This manual presents information mainly through menu descriptions Access Manager has two types of menus a The AS2000 type of menus that reflect the functions of AS2000 and ConnecT1 Plus Nodes a 551VST type menus for the other types of nodes The various configurations for these nodes are described in the following section Single Line Nodes The single line nodes with which Access Manager 2000 interfaces are as follows a 551VST List 1 A CSU a 551VST List 1 B CSU a 551VST List 2 CSU Access Manager 2000 User Manual 1 5 Access Manager Overview Dual Line Nodes ConnecT Plus Accesses up to four dual line shelves containing up to 2 circuit elements CCC 1020 TAC 1010 DIU 1130 and TIU 1850 per dual line shelf Access System 2000 Accesses up to four dual line shelves containing up to 2 circuit elements NCC 2020 TAC 2010 DIU 2130 and TIU 2850 per dual line shelf Access Manager connects to the master NCC 2020 a plug in module which is also a circuit element The AS2000 is also available in multiline node configurations Multiline Nodes The multiline nodes with which Access Manager interfaces are shown in Figure 1 3 Typical AS2000 Multiline Configuration on pa ge1 7 1 6 Access Manager 2000 User Manual Figure 1 3 Typical AS2000 Multiline Configuration ACCESS MANAGER 2000 M e RS 232D DAISY CHAIN RS 232D T
143. ST N N N N NN N Port Z N Y N ST N N N N N NO N Press F5 to update element F8 for options CEQP Clock amp LOS Ctrl PgUp Ctrl PgDn for prev next circuit element Channel Assignment should be entered like this example 1 3 6 8 10 5 92 Access Manager 2000 User Manual Configuration Options for AS2000 and ConnecTI Plus Installed and Operational This setting should be the same as the Installed and Operational option setting of the associated CSU Enable Alarm Reporting This setting should be the same as the Enable Alarm Reporting option setting of the associated CSU Save Configuration to DIU To store the configuration from the database into the DIU set the Save configuration to DIU option to Y Ifthis option is set to N any updated changes are saved to the database but are not downloaded to the DIU Connected CSU Shelf and Plug Numbers Enter the Access System 2000 shelf number and plug in slot number of the CSU to which the DIU is connected This setting allows the DIU to send data to and receive data from that CSU over the DIU data bus assigned to that module The shelf number can be from 1 to 4 Channel Assignment Assign one or more DSO channels of the DS1 line to each DIU 2130 and DIU 1130 data port based on the data equipment s transmission speed EQP Speed One channel is required for every 56 kbps or 64 kbps of bandwidth For example if the customer data equipment operates at 256 k b ps it needs four DSO chann
144. Select Previous CSU lt Ctrl gt lt PgDn gt lt Esc gt lt C gt lt N gt Select Next CSU lt Ins gt lt Ins gt Toggle insert overwrite lt Del gt lt Del gt Delete character space lt F1 gt lt Esc gt lt 1 gt Help lt F2 gt lt Esc gt lt 2 gt Go to previous screen lt F3 gt lt Esc gt lt 3 gt Return to Main Menu lt F4 gt lt Esc gt lt 4 gt Toggle between manual and automatic alarm acknowledge modes lt F5 gt lt Esc gt lt 5 gt Accept updated info to element lt F6 gt lt Esc gt lt 6 gt Accept updated info to range of element lt F7 gt lt Esc gt lt 7 gt Toggle status of data monitor lt F8 gt lt Esc gt lt 8 gt Show a list of options lt F9 gt lt Esc gt lt 9 gt Log off Access Manager without shutting down lt F10 gt lt Esc gt lt 10 gt Shut down Access Manager with LEVEL4 access onl not available lt Esc gt lt C gt lt S gt Update pcANYWHERE Screen To get a help screen that provides function key definitions Help press CF1 3 12 Access Manager 2000 User Manual Error Messages Basics This displays an on line help screen labeled Function Key Definitions This is shown in Table 3 5 On line Help screen host PC mode Figure 3 5 On line Help screen host PC mode On line Help Function Key Definitions access on line help return to previous menu return to main menu toggle Auto Alarm Acknouledge switch approve update for current eleme
145. Since Access Arrangement controls only the host computer i e PC end of the Comline it is necessary to assure that equipment at both ends of the connection be set for the correct access arrangement See the Verilink SIM NC E 551VST List 2 551VST ML List 1 551VST ML List 2 and Access System 2000 Manuals Editing a comline definition 1 Starting from the Main Menu select Utilities 2 From the Utilities Menu select Installation 3 From the Jnstallation Menu select Comline 4 From the Revise Comline Definitions screen select Edit A list of currently defined Comlines now appears 5 From this list choose the comline to be edited by highlighting it and pressing Enter The current comline definition option settings are now listed Note The allowable entries for the Comline definition options ar determined by the computer and peripheral boards used by Access Manager AppendixD Installing Serial Ports lists the permissible entries for the standard computer and peripheral board configurations Access Manager 2000 User Manual 4 21 Configuring Access Manager Using the entries listed in Appendix D Installing Serial Ports edit the comline definition options as describedin Adding a new comline definition on pa ge4 17 Deleting a comline definition 1 From the Utilities Menu select Installation From the Installation screen select Comline The screen labeled Revise Comline Definitions will appear 2 Fro
146. Status of suai 05 Elapsed Time 00 48 29 Sie Conditions Sending Test Pattern Near End Looped NO NO Far End Looped NO NO Error Counter 3 6 Los NO NO TxD RxD DTR DSR RTS CTS DCD Port 1 N N N N N N N Port 2 N N N N N N N LL RL TM N N N N N N Press F2 to return to previous men V 54 data channel loopback detection The DIU 2130 can now detect the three V 54 leads which equipment can use to activate data channel loopbacks The definitions are as follows e LL The data channel loopbacks on the DIU 2130 at the local node the node to which the DTE sending LL is connected e RL The data channel loopbacks on the DIU 2130 on the far end of the network connection e TM This is set high by the DIU 2130 upon successfully activating LL or RL to notify the DTE of its current state Access Manager 2000 User Manual 8 61 Monitoring and Troubleshooting Access Manager 8 62 Access Manager 2000 User Manual Appendix A Key Acronyms and Terms Term Definition A A Ampere AC Alternating Current Acknowledged Alarm Adjacent Channels AIS Alarm Indication Signal AISS Alarm Indication Signal Second ALL ONEs Alternate Mark Inversion An alarm sent to Access Manager which has been acknowledged manually by the user or automatically by the software If two channels are assigned so there is no unassigned channel between them these channels are said to be adj
147. Symbols and Notices oc ec eeeeeessecseceseeeceseesecesceseceseeseseeeeseseaeeaeeenes xxiii Instruction Symbol eeesseseseserersesererererrersrererserensrereseenenersreresseressreensesee xxiii Dangerous Voltage Symbol esssesssesessessreresssersrsreerrrenrerrssesrsserersrerrsrese xxiii Warning Notice Sareen na a a E a e r xxiii Caution NOCES eoero eenen a e E E EESE XXIV NOLES kin Ret Sind eek Bei ae eee Sci XXiV a BT oE E E E ET XXIV Check Boxes 25 s dieis Ske hla Ree ine Gs BAe Bhs ae XXV Other COMVENELOMNS 245 ec d2 oy eepes sz casieeu cases lecescgeuceveerseevsebsestpes tb veteped sorsoeeeeseets XXV Additional reading neinei xxvi CHAPTER 1 Access Manager Overview cc ccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeceaeeeeeaeeeeneeeseaeeeeaeeseeeeeseas 1 1 Jennine atoi nN sce EET TTT 1 1 Access Manager 2000 User Manual Network Configuring srr e e E e A E E E N ai 1 2 Status and Performance Monitoring e eeeessesseeresesiesrerssesssrerrsreererenrerreseresseeresre 1 2 Alarm and System Event Reporting sessseessseeesereesesessssesrssreersrenreresrerresersserersreet 1 2 Online Access and Testing pieis eiee n e E E A E E A 1 3 Conditions Monitored sosser seeren orerisr sieer tite ietro e peorien eaire re 1 3 Network IEAn aT o N AAEE EEEE EEEE E EEEE E EE TE OEE ELTETE EEA 1 3 Single Line Node gencine R T E A 1 5 D al Line Nodes Sensei a a E a E e 1 6 MALSITE EANO A E eis 1 6 Circuit Blement e a e E E es 1 8 Single Line Circ
148. T1 Network Figure 5 12 551VST List 2 CSU Options Me Edit Options for 551UST LIST 2 CSU J Installed and operational 7 Retrieve performance data Retrieve far end data 7 Enable alarm reporting 7 xEnable remote configuration Enable span side B8ZS encode Enable span side B8ZS decode Regenerate CRC to span side Span side ESF framing 7 Enable YEL transcode to span 10E BER threshold 4 9 Repeater loop timeout Csecs Enable far end polling 7 Enable transparent mode 7 Use FCC part 68 rule only J Enable EQP side B8ZS encode 7 Enable EQP side B8ZS decode 7 Regenerate CRC to EQP side EQP side ESF framing 7 Enable YEL transcode to EQP 7 AISCnot SIGNAL loop back 7 AISCnot ESS keep alive 7 Enable alarm latch 7 Enable PRM eeee cece et t Idle code flags 7 Disabling this option also disables the indented options below it These options may not be available on all CSUs Figure 5 13 NMC L1 with 4016 L2 CSU Options Me Edit Options for NMC LZ CSU 1 1 28 J Installed and operational 7 Retrieve performance data 7 Retrieve far end data 7 Enable alarm reporting 7 Enable remote configuration 16E BER threshold lt 8 4 9 Repeater loop timeout Csecs gt Enable far end polling 7 Enable transparent mode 7 Enable span side B8ZS encode Ena
149. Test SIG applied alarm 142 322 Far NET Test SIG alarm cleared 143 323 Far CSU loss of external clock alarm 144 324 Far CSU loss of external clock alarm cleared Table C 9 AS2000 Far End Equipment Status Codes Status Codes hex Decimal Equivalent Description 191 401 Far EQPT BER exceeded 192 402 Far EQPT BER exceeded cleared 193 403 Far EQPT ES L exceeded 194 404 Far EQPT ES L exceeded cleared 195 405 Far EQPT ES exceeded 196 406 Far EQPT ES exceeded cleared 197 407 Far EQPT UAS exceeded 198 408 Far EQPT UAS exceeded cleared 199 409 Far EQPT ELB looped 19A 410 Far EQPT ELB looped cleared 19B 411 Far EQPT RLB looped 19C 412 Far EQPT RLB looped cleared Access Manager 2000 User Manual Status Codes hex Decimal Equivalent Description 19D 413 Far EQPT LOS alarm 19E 414 Far EQPT LOS alarm cleare 19F 415 Far EQPT RAI alarm 1A1 416 Far EQPT RAI alarm cleared 1A2 417 Far EQPT LOF alarm 1A3 418 Far EQPT LOF alarm cleared 1A4 419 Far EQPT AIS alarm 1A5 420 Far EQPT AIS alarm cleared 1A6 421 Far EQPT Test SIG alarm 1A7 422 Far EQPT Test SIG cleared 1A8 423 Far EQPT low density alarm 1A9 424 Far EQPT low density alarm cleare Table C 10 Additional NCC 2020 Status Code Status Codes hex Decimal Equivalent Description 1 001 Near CSU Power Up 3 003 Far CSU Power Up 1F
150. U Choose if the CSU circuit element you are configuring is to receive its clock from a TIU 2850 installed in the shelf regardless of the source of the clock that is used DIU Choose if the timing source is the TT Terminal Timing signal from a data equipment device connected to a DIU 2130 or DIU 1130 data port This selection also automatically assigns data bus C to the CSU for TT signal application to the CSU After making your selection of CSU options the selected CSU configuration options can be updated individually by pressing CF5 Or all the CSUs in the entire selected range of slots can be updated automatically by pressing E6 To configure the DIUs choose circuit element type DIU 2130 in Step 3 of Getting to the CSU configuration screen on page 5 72 TheD JU 2130 Options Menu appears showing the configuration options to be edited for the first DIU 2130 in the specified range These options are described as follows Figure 5 16 DIU 2130 Options Menu Site MANUAL ACK Alarm Current Node NOT YET DEFINED jl B 2 Jl TEST l AS28006 Options for DIU 2138 Edit Shelf 1 PLUG 1 1 13 Installed and Operational 7 Save Configuration to DIU 7 Enable Alarm Reporting 7 g Connected CSU shelf Port 1 Channel Assignment F8 Port Z Channel Assignment F8 Port 1 EQP Name EQP SER EQP Interface EQP Speed 64K Mode Loop Scramble EQP Clock DTR RTS DSR CTS DCD LOS Enable TU Port 1 N Y N
151. USER data a NDyymmdd XXX Additional data DDyymmdd XXX EQPT data Where e yy year of archive e mm month of archive e dd day of archive e XXX filename extension numbered sequentially from 001 to 999 The month date and year yymmdd used in the archive file name are those that you specify in the Archive Cutoff Date screen The current date or system date is not automatically used The archive process always creates records starting with extension 001 If previous data log archives have been performed with the same cut off date on the same disk drive and in the same directory then existing archive file s are overwritten 7 16 Access Manager 2000 User Manual Archiving performance data To print records with the option of deleting those records Printing reports and deleting the 1 Starting from the Main Menu select Database Access The data Database Access Performance Database Analysis screen appears 2 From this screen select Archive The Archive Performance Database Choose Archive Option screen appears Performance Database Choose archive option print records Cuith delete option Archive copy records to a disk file Cuith delete optiom Delete delete records WITHOUT ARCHIVING Press t or ist char Enter to select Esc to cancel 3 From this screen select Print The Choose Register Set to be Archived screen now appears 4 Select the register type whose performance data records
152. Warning this product relies on Windows 3 x which is not Y2K compliant Access System 2000 Access Manager 2000 User Manual Assembly Part Number 896 502037 001 A 993 VERILINK Verilink Corporation 145 Baytech Drive San Jose California 95134 Important Notice Before performing any operations PLEASE READ AND UNDERSTAND ALL INSTRUCTIONS IN THIS MANUAL WHEN YOU ARE FINISHED PUT THIS MANUAL IN A PROMINENT LOCATION DO NOT THROW THIS MANUAL AWAY unless it is being replaced by a corrected or updated manual VERILINK CORPORATION DISTRIBUTES THIS REFERENCE AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EITHER LIMITED OR IMPLIED Verilink Corporation reserves the right to revise this publication from time to time without notice Some states or jurisdictions do not allow disclaimer of express or implied warranties in certain transactions therefore this statement may not apply to you Copyright 1992 Verilink Corporation All rights reserved This reference was written illustrated and produced using FrameMaker workstation publishing software and AutoCad 10 computer design software Sun IPX and IPC Workstations Sun Sparc Laser Printers and the ITC Helvetica and ITC Times families of typefaces Your right to copy Access Manager 2000 and this manual is limited by copyright law Making copies of this reference or any part thereof without prior written authorization from Verilink Corporation is prohibited by law and
153. When you choose this mode YES the circuit element stuffs a ONE into every string of eight 8 consecutive ZEROs whenever either the average density is below 12 5 or there are more than 80 consecutive ZEROs referred to as FCC Part 68 Rule in earlier manuals This is the default setting If you choose NO this rule is still applied plus the AT amp T TR 62411 density enforcement rule is additionally applied This option determines whether the AIS or the received signal is passed on to one side when the other side is looped back For example if a line loopback LLB is activated and this option is enabled YES an AIS signal is transmitted to the EQP If an LLB occurs with this option set to NO the received signal from the network is transmitted to the EQP during an LLB The default setting for this option is YES Note An RLB always passes the signal to the network regardless of this option setting This option determines whether AIS unframed ALL ONEs is transmitted to the network or Access Manager 2000 User Manual 5 67 Configuring the T1 Network Enable Alarm Latch Enable PRM Enable Span Side B8ZS Encode and Decode Regenerate CRC to Span Side m the signal received from the network is looped back to the network ESS as a keep alive when a loss of signal LOS is detected on the incoming signal from the EQP The default setting for this option is YES AIS keep alive This option determines the m
154. a backup if the first path cannot deliver the message Both paths simultaneously so both Access Managers receive any alarm Access Manager 2000 User Manual 5 27 Configuring the T1 Network 5 28 The Use field is used to assign a relative priority to an alarm path To view the available options go to the Use field and press CF8 A pop up menu will appear with these options SEND The alarm will be reported to this alarm path BACKUP The alarm will be sent to this path if the SEND path is unable to deliver the alarm NONE Alarms are not to be sent to this path The acceptable combinations of options for this field are listed below Primary Secondary Description SEND SEND Send to both addresses specified SEND BACKUP Send to Secondary address only if Primary address is unavailable BACKUP SEND Send to Primary address only if Secondary address is unavailable SEND NONE Send only to the Primary address NONE SEND Send only to the Secondary address NONE NONE Do not send any alarms to either address Based on the relative priorities you want to assign enter your choices in the Primary and Secondary columns Seiting up alarm destination access To set up alternate alarm paths you ll be using either a modem a stat mux or an X 25 PAD to communicate with Access Manager You need to specify the a type of device connected to the node controller speed at which the device operates add
155. a node select Edit This will take you to a screen labeled Se le ct NodetoEdit Use the or D key to highlight the node you wish to edit and press i This will take you to the Edit Node Definition screen Lets operator choose when to set the node clock from the PC running Access Manager Edit Node Definition Equipment type AS20800 Query path type Query path CCOMn phone or PORT Que Baud R Previous Node in chain y Enable Thumbuheel Operation Set Node Clock When Configuring a Enable alarm reporting Pt da Set Node Clock When Polling Node installed amp operational 7 Enable Downline load Firmware 7 N Comments Lets operator install firmware upgrades Press F5 to save definition F8 for options Shelf Type is entered with Multiline M or first M S D D where D 2 slots shelf M or 13 slots shelf Access Manager 2000 User Manual 5 11 Configuring the T1 Network The contents of the Add Node Definition screen and the Edit Node Definition screen are identical Therefore we ll refer to them collectively as the Node Definition screen 5 12 Access Manager 2000 User Manual Summary of tasks Identify the Node Define the Query Path Enable thumbwheel operation Define the Alarm Path s Decide when to reset the Node Clock Enable firmware download Activate the node Conf
156. abase ae 7 To view a circuit element definition Viewing circuit element definitions 1 Starting from the Main Menu select Configuration 2 From the Configuration Menu select Element The Edit Element SelectParent Node screen now appears If this menu has no nodes listed no nodes have yet been configured 3 After the parent node has been selected depending on the type of node one of the configuration actions menus will appear See the following figures e Figure 5 7 Configuration 551 VST List 2 Menu on pag e5 45 e Figure 5 8 Configuration 551VST ML List 2 Menu on page 5 46 e Figure 5 9 Configuration AS2000 Menu on page 5 46 4 Select the View option This option allows you to view an existing circuit element definition without changing it mf ee aa a E For a selected parent node you can print out a report listing all Printing all circuit parameters for that node s circuit elements The report goes to the printer element definitions defined in the Report screen of the Utilities Menu To print out a node s circuit element definitions 1 Starting from the Main Menu select Configuration 2 From the Configuration Menu select Element The Edit Element Select Parent Node screen now appears If this menu has no nodes listed no nodes have yet been configured 3 Select the parent node has been selected One of the configuration action menus appears The menu that appears depends on th
157. able because SEND set for continuous A BACKUP path is specified while the SEND path set for continuous attempts 0 In other words if the SEND path is set to 0 it never gives up and a BACKUP path is irrelevant Either e Set the SEND path for 1 to 256 attempts or e Change the alarm path Use field from BACKUP to NONE X 25 PAD supported only by AS2000 equipment User specified X 25 PAD for use with non AS2000 equipment Check you Alarm pathand Query Path setups to see which of the following connections you re using direct modem or stat mux Then change the entry in the Device Type field to reflect that Access Manager 2000 User Manual 5 33 Configuring the T1 Network Error Message Cause Corrective Action Retry Interval must be the same if SEND SEND specified Although you have specified SEND for both alarm paths you have specified different Retry Intervals Make both Retry Intervals the same Attempts must be limited to 15 or less when MODEM is selected The Device Type iS MODEM and the Attempts are greater than 15 For Attempt select a value from 1 to 15 Enabling thumbwheel operation Resetting the node clock 5 34 For each Access System 2000 or ConnecT1 plus node a To allow a local operator to use the thumbwheel switches on the master NCC 2020 or CCC 1020 for CSU access configuration and or testing select YES default s
158. acent For example if P ort Channels 2 3 5 7 9 and Port 2 Channels10 2 4 then 2 is adjacent to 3 7 is adjacent to 8 8 is adjacent to 9 9 is adjacent to 10 and 24 is adjacent to 1 See Alarm Indication Signal An unframed ALL ONEs bit pattern that indicates that an alarm condition exists upstream in a circuit leading to the downstream equipment This is also called an ALL ONEs Keep Alive or Blue Alarm Signal See Alarm Indication Signal Second A second during which the CSU receives an ALL ONEs AIS code from the network A signal on a DS 1 T1 line which is comprised entirely of ones 11111111 This signal is transmitted when there is an alarm condition upstream on the network or as a keep alive signal to the network from a CSU A 1 544 Mbps signal in which successive ONEs pulses are normally of alternating polarity and in which ZEROs spaces are of zero amplitude Access Manager 2000 Manual A 1 A 2 Term Definition AMI ANSI ASCII Asynchronous Auto configure Available Second B B8ZS Baud Rate BER BERS BES Bit Bit Error Rate Bit Error Rate Alarm Seconds See Alternate Mark Inversion American National Standards Institute American National Standard Code for Information Exchange A type of transmission that is not related to a specific frequency or to the timing of the transmission equipment Messages are controlled with start and stop bits from which the receiver ca
159. ach code is represented by two ASCII characters Since these codes are not unique among various devices the node type must be used in conjunction with the code to identify the alarm type The status codes for the various equipments are listed in Tab leC 2 551VST List 2 Status Codes on pa geC 4 through Ta bleC 5 NMC List 2 Status Codes on p ageC 6 14 n 1 1 Terminator Access Manager 2000 User Manual C 3 Field 15 Byte n 2 Length Description the SOH Field 1 and terminator Field 14 bytes Table C 2 551VST List 2 Status Code Status Code hex Description 00 Near BER exceeded 01 Near SPAN LOS alarm 02 Near EQPT low density 03 Near LLB or PLB looped 04 Near ELB or RLB looped 08 Far BER exceeded 09 Far SPAN LOS alarm OA Far EQPT low density alar 0B Far LLB or PLB looped 0c Far ELB or RLB loope OF Far CSU absent alarm Table C 3 NC E Status Codes Status Code hex Description 00 Near BER exceeded 01 Near SPAN LOS alarm 02 Near EQPT low density alarm 03 Near LLB or PLB looped 04 Near ELB or RLB looped 06 Near fuse blown 07 Near CSU absent alarm 08 Far BER exceeded 09 Far SPAN LOS alarm 0A Far EQPT low density alar 0B Far LLB or PLB looped 0c Far ELB or RLB loope OF Far CSU absent alarm C 4 Access Manager 2000 User Manual 1 Byte n 2 is a One byte checksum This checksum is 2 s c
160. address of the connected device Access Manager 2000 User Manual 5 17 Configuring the T1 Network TIP Before you configure the node make sure you have configured your comlines to support the node s access arrangement The comlines are configured in the Comline Definition screen of the Utilities Menu The query and alarm paths can be set according to the parameters in Table 5 3 Assuring compatibility between Query Path and Comline settings For each path option you are asked to verify how you defined the corresponding comline in the Utilities Comline Definition Access Arrangement menu This is designed to keep oversight from getting you into trouble Table 5 3 Assuring compatibility between Query Path and Comline settings What you should have in the For this Enter the following for Utilities Comline Definition Acces Query path type Query path COMn phone or PORT Arrangement menu None No comlines are used These far end elements are accessed through the ESF Facility Data Link Use this if a node is second or third in a daisy chain up to three are allowed Direct The comline used for example COM3 DIRECT or AUTOCONFIG Modem Phone number MODEM CALL ANSWER MODEM ANSWER ONLY or AUTOCONFIG 5 18 ComDesign Mux At least one comline must be connecte to a modem If you wish to have a separate Query Path from the Alarm Path then the comline reached by the Alarm P
161. ager 2000 User Manual AS2000 or ConnecT1 Plus nodes through a single node connection This access arrangement is called a daisy chain Configuring nodes Type NONE for this field if the nodes are daisy chained and this is the first node Also enter NONE if this is not a daisy chained node If this is the second node in the daisy chain enter the Node Name which you entered for the first node in the chain If this is third node in the daisy chain enter the Node Name which you entered for the second node in the chain Specifying shelf types for AS2000 node For an Access System 2000 node specify the arrangement of the shelves accessed by this node There are three types of shelves to choose from S specifies the Multiline Shelf 2200 MLS 2200 e 13 slots with redundant power supplies A B e Split backplane Bus A M specifies the Multiline Shelf 2000 MLS 2000 e 13 slots with redundant power supplies A B D specifies the Dual line Shelf 2000 DLS 2000 1000 e 2slots with redundant power supply inputs More details about the bus arrangement of each of these shelves is available in the Access System 2000 Overview Manual You must follow certain syntax rules when specifiying AS2000 shelves Use a comma when entering arrangements of multiple shelves For example if the AS2000 node is a multiline dual line combination enter M D for Shelf Type The first shelf in this case M is hardware addressed 1 a
162. ager 2000 User Manual 8 7 Monitoring and Troubleshooting Access Manager Code Condition and Meaning S Spare The CSU is present in a shelf but not configured in the Access Manager database as Installed and Operational The far end CSU if equipped is shown as an operative CSU Undetermined The status of the element cannot be determined Either The node controller SIM in the shelf has e failed e blown a fuse e been powered down or e been removed so that the status of the elements in that particular shelf cannot be determined or An individual multiline CSU has a blown fuse and the CSU is Installed and Operational in the database Access Manager 2000 handles non AS2000 nodes including NC E fora multiline nodes and 551 series nodes non AS2000 node 8 8 A typical NC E Configuration display shows up to five 551VST MLS shelves controlled by an NC E a lag ROO 11 i 1 1 gt IN OBR I ot O IN 1 Gwe tot ot 1 ES 190 RAAu z 1 10 p L m I l OMBAy tol Oh ae H Il piaia I I IO EFi E s gw ieee SO Of 1 Io I t 1 1 EFi oO Ss 1 1 Xfi Beal J 1 Bede 1 EE 11 1i 1 gt Any Fuses Blown No No Yes No No XxX OO OF s e A E a SI XN EEE Firmware V2 9 Hardware VO 8 operative absent X missing S spare undetermined Access Manager 2000 User Manual Displaying
163. ager and CSUs Each CSU must have a parent node In a near end node a node controller serves as the parent node for each CSU on its shelf or shelves Configure all node parameters except alarm reporting Otherwise yov ll be interrupted by alarm messages incidentally caused by the configuration process When you save the node definition the configuration is sent over the comline to the node controller Access Manager 2000 User Manual 5 5 Configuring the T1 Network e Ifaconnection can t be made you ll get an error message Check for the fault e Ifa successful connection is made from Access Manager 2000 to the node controller the Element Configuration Menu appears 3 Configure the near end CSU parameters Menu used Main Configuration Element Edit Node controller 5 Cc ey S A U EEE Access Manager 2000 Near end node If connected to a standalone CSU configure the options for that CSU If connected to a multiline controller sequentially select and configure each CSU you ll use in that multiline shelf DIUs If you are using an Access System CSU with a DIU configure your near end DIU parameters now a Configure the far end node parameters Menu used Main Configuration Node Add Generally each near end CSU is paired over the network with a far end CSU Before you can configure a far end CSU you must define its node Access Manager 2000 will communicate with the far en
164. ager to configure as comlines Each PC 8 board provides up to eight comlines and each PC 4 board provides up to four comlines Installing the Digi CHANNEL PC 4 PC 8 or PC 16 board is a three part procedure 1 Configure the DigiCHANNEL board per the strapping option shown in the following tables e Fora PC 16 board use Table D 7 Serial Ports for DigiCHANNEL PC 16 in IBM PC XT andAT on pag eD 11 e Fora PC 4 or PC 8 board use Table D 5 Serial Ports for First DigiCHANNEL PC 4 PC 8 in IBM PC XT and AT on page D 9 e Ifasecond PC 4 or PC 8 board is used see Tabl eD 6 Serial Ports for Second DigiCHANNEL PC 8 in IBM PC XT and AT on pa geD 10 2 Install the board s in your personal computer PC Refer to your computer manual for these instructions 3 Configure Access Manager comlines to use the DigiCHANNEL boards using the parameters in Tables E 5 E 6 and E 7 LEE Note Your Digiboard user s manual refers to the Shared I O Address TablesD 5 D 6 and D 7 as the Status Register Address Also the Port Address in these tables is referred to as the I O Port Address D 8 Access Manager 2000 User Manual Installing a Digi CHANNEL PC 4 PC S or PC 16 and Table D 5 Serial Ports for First DigiCHANNEL PC 4 PC 8 in IBM PC XT andAT Port No Comline Nam Port Addr IRQ Savina Status Mask Note 2 Note 3 Note 4 Notes 4 amp 5 Notes 485 1 COM2 100H 3H 140H
165. ain and out of service for up to 3 seconds When service returns the new code is installed and running e The downloading process has a self check at the end Access Manager displays a message identifying which plugs were downloaded successfully and which if any failed Downloaded Successfully to plugs 13 4 5 Downloaded Failed to plug 2 Press any key to continue After downloading is complete the Select Plug Type screen reappears Select plug type 1 NCC 2020 TAC 2018 DIU 2136 DIU 2132 DIU 2148 TIU 2856 Press ft number or ESC 10 Press ESQhen CF2Jurn to the Utilities Menu a If you want to verify the new firmware revision level go from the Main Menu into the Online Menu and use the Status element option b If downline loading fails on any plug repeat the procedure on that plug If the trouble continues replace the circuit element in that slot and repeat the procedure on the new circuit element Access Manager 2000 User Manual 4 37 Configuring Access Manager 11 Your circuit element has now been updated and is ready for use 12 This completes APA down line loading 4 38 Access Manager 2000 User Manual Chapter 5 Configuring the T1 Network This chapter gives you instructions for configuring the DS1 network elements with Access Manager These operations are performed from the Configuration menu The tasks outlined in this chapter include a Configuring nodes pag e5
166. alarm message layout C 2 T Tagging files 6 4 Test signals 5 90 enable 8 55 Thumbwheel AS2000 node 5 34 U V W Unrestricted ZEROs 5 86 5 95 User performance data 7 3 User definition access levels 4 23 name 4 23 password 4 23 User definitions access level 1 11 default 4 26 User password access levels 4 23 Utilities Operations 1 14 utilities operations 4 1 X Y Z yellow alarm transcode toward EQP 5 84 yellow alarm transcode toward network 5 87 Index 4 Access Manager 2000 User Manual
167. alarm paths from one node to two different Access Managers Consequently you can simultaneously send each alarm to two Access Managers designate an auxiliary Access Manager to receive alarms when problems exist with the primary Access Manager In addition for each alarm path you can specify the number of times the node controller will try to send an alarm to Access Manager time interval between notification attempts m length of time alarms are gathered before a notification attempt is made Application scenarios There are four ways to physically connect a PC running Access Manager to a node controller located in an Access System 2000 node You can connect directly with a cable or you can use one of three com port access Access Manager 2000 User Manual 5 23 Configuring the T1 Network devices modem stat mux or X25 PAD Consequently when an alarm is sent from the node controller to the Access Manager it will travel along whichever of these connections you have installed The alarm may be sent 1 Directly from the node controller to the PC via a NULL modem cable 2 To a modem which will dial another modem connected to an Access Manager 3 To an X 25 PAD Packet Assembler Disassember which will contact another specified X 25PAD attached to an Access Manager 4 To a stat mux for relay through an assigned port to another Access Manager Direct connection allows you to set up only one dedicated
168. an be deleted and or archived It has the following major branches Alarm Status Menu _Clear ___ Deactivate _View Active ___List Active Print All Archiv Clear This command clears the automatically acknowledged alarms counter Access Manager 2000 User Manual 1 15 Access Manager Overview Configuration Deactivate This command deactivates alarm records and makes them available for deletion and or archiving View Active This command displays all alarm records that have not yet been deactivated List Active This command prints all alarm records that have not yet been deactivated Print All This command prints all alarm records whether or not they have been deactivated Archive This command allows you to print transfer to disk and or delete deactivated alarm records The functions under the Configuration menu allow you to define or edit the configurations of the nodes circuit elements circuit and routes in the network It has the following major branches Configuration Menu Node Element Circuit Route 1 16 Access Manager 2000 User Manual On line Access Access Manager 2000 Main Menu Node A node is any equipment that has single point Access Manager access i e to which Access Manager can connect in order to access its circuit elements for network management The single point of access may be in a variety of modes The mode of access for far end nodes is through the
169. analysis to occur The beginning and end of the period for the analysis is set to the nearest quarter hour After entering the date and time range press CE5 to accept the date time range or press CE2 to return to the previous screen This step does not apply if the Bar Chart filter is chosen Ifthe From and or To dates fall outside the range of available data Access Manager generates a warning message indicating which date parameters have fallen outside the range This message also indicates that the date and time range has been reset Pressing any key returns you to the Enter Date Time Range for Report screen From this screen you can either change the date and time to some period within the available range or you can press 2 to return to the previous screen Ifthe Bar Chart option was chosen in Step 3 a different Date and Time screen appears Enter the starting date and time only The ending date and time is always 24 hours after your entered starting time Access Manager 2000 User Manual Reporting performance data Steps 8 and 9 deal with choosing network elements and circuits 8 After you specify the date and time range the Choose Network Element to be Analyzed screen appears Choose network element to be anaylized Node select node to be examined Location select location to be examined Circuit select circuit to be examined Route select route to be examined Press t or ist char Enter to select Esc t
170. angement 4 19 routing port access arrangement 4 19 serial device 4 20 Connections to nodes 4 21 copy and delete records 7 18 CSU NCC or TAC shelf and plug numbers 5 93 5 99 CSU alarms reporting conditions requirements 5 19 CSU loopbacks 8 47 8 48 activate LLB 8 46 activate PLB 8 47 activate RLB 8 46 deactivate PLB or LLB 8 47 deactivate PLB 8 47 description 8 40 equipment ELB 8 43 repeater RLB 8 42 D Daisy chain 5 14 Daisy chained 4 20 nodes 1 5 Data analysis central office filters 7 5 customer premise filters 7 5 filter selection logic 7 7 user defined threshold percentages 7 6 user defined threshold seconds 7 6 Data analysis 7 5 Data log E 10 Database alarms 6 3 Database access operations 1 20 density enforcement 5 86 DigiBoard PC PS 2 serial port settings D 1 DigiCHANNEL hardware installation D 4 installing PS 2 D 3 PC XT AT installation D 8 preparation D 3 PS 2 configuration D 4 displaying all error event data 7 5 DIU 2130 data scramble descramble 5 96 DIU 2130 DIU 1130 status 8 18 DIU 2130 DIU 1130 8 49 DIU 2130 options 5 93 64 kbps transmission mode Index 2 Access Manager 2000 User Manual 5 96 DS1 channel assignment 5 93 enable 5 93 5 99 EQP clock 5 96 EQP interface type 5 95 EQP name 5 95 EQP serial number 5 95 EQP speed 5 96 handshaking control 5 97 DIU 2140 5 98 DIU 2140 options 5 99 baud rate 5 101 DS1 c
171. another compute you must first enter SERIAL DEVICE for the Access Arrangement of a Comline in the Comiines Definition screen In other words the only time you can use COMx where x isa number inthe Alarm Printer Filename field is when you have defined the comline for a serial device CAUTION However if you re using an actual serial printer you cannot use a name such as COM1 inthe Alarm Printer Filename field If you do Access Manager may halt Instead you must enter LPT1 or LPT2 in the Edit Report Printer Configuration screen and then use the MODE command from DOS to redirect the LPT port to a non Access Manager 2000 User Manual 4 9 Configuring Access Manager Alarm printer filename Alarm printer type NOT APPLICABLE Acknowledge alarm automatically 7 N Alarm channel protocol Press F8 for printer type alarm c W1 PLAIN ENGLISH MESSAGE Digiboard COM port Refer to the DOS manual for proper use of the MODE command Do not duplicate filenames listed in Table 2 1 Access Manager Installation Files on page 2 4 To output alarm messages to another computer 1 Inthe Alarm Printer Filename field enter the comline name 2 Leave the Printer Type field blank It is not applicable Alarm Channel Protocol The Alarm Channel Protocol data entry field appears in the Editing the Alarm Destination screen The Alarm Channel Protocol option is selected by moving the cursor to that line and pressing to bring up
172. artmodem 1200 Option Smartmodem 2400 AT Switch Position p Command DTR status not ignored SW1 up Follows DTR Hangs up amp D2 amp W and goes to command state if signal drops Result code format SW2 down Numbers VO amp W Result code display SW3 down Codes are displayed Q0 amp W Character echo SW4 down Characters not echoed in E0 amp W command state Auto answer SW5 down Disabled S0 0 amp W Carrier detect and data SW6 up Reflects actual result of amp C1 amp S1 amp W set ready attempt to connect TELCO jack type Note 2 SW7 up RJ 11 RJ 41S amp JO amp W RJ 45S SW7 down RJ 12 RJ 13 amp J1 amp W Command SW8 down Enabled Internal jumper set to recognition Command Recognition Communication standard SW9 up Bell 212A B1 amp W at 1200 bps Response to DTR SW10 u Hangs up and goes to Set by SW1 option transition when SW1 is command state up Access Manager 2000 User Manual B 3 Parameter Smartmodem 1200 Option Smartmodem 2400 AT Switch Position p Command NOTE 1 Factory position indicated by boldface NOTE 2 Position of SW7 depends on the type of phone jack used Most installations use an RJ11 jack SW7 up Table B 2 Modem Configuration for OSI Protocol without DTR Lead Parameter Smartmodem M 1200 Option Smartmodem 240 AT Switch Position p Command DTR status ignored SW1 down Ignores DTR state if amp DO amp W signal drops Result code format SW2 down Numbers VO amp W
173. as EDLIN Add the following lines to your batch file as required Table 2 2 Batch file commands for automatic start up Command line Function CD drive AM2000 To change to the directory where Access Manage is installed If the directory is other than AM2000 use that directory s name in lieu of AM2000 For drive use your appropriate drive letter ANYWHERE AUTOMATIC To start up the pepANYWHERE III program AM2000 To use a color PC AM2000 BW To use a monochrome monitor with a color PC or monochrome PC AM2000 VT To start Access manager in the VT100 mode required if ppANYWHERE is used The VT command causes Access Manager to run its VT100 screens This means that function and other key combinations are shown on the screen as the required key strokes used on a VT100 terminal AM2000 VT BW To start Access Manager in the VT100 mode ona monochrome PC required if peANYWHERE is used The BW command causes Access Manager to run in black and white mode If a remote computer is being used with e aVT100 terminal emulation progra _ then the terminal emulation program capabilities determine whether or not the BW command is required e an actual VT100 terminal then Access Manager can be used in color mode by leaving off the BW command TZ xSTn This is used to set the clock only if an Accumaster interface is being used See Time Zone Setup for Accumaster on page2 14
174. at todo serinin a E E E E A E iver 5 26 Assigning priority to an alarm path oo eee ceeeceeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeees 5 27 Setting up alarm destination access oo eee eeeeceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeecseesaeeaes 5 28 Limiting alarm delivery attempts 0 eee cee cee cee ceeeseceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 5 30 Pacing delivery of new alarms ie eee eeeeeeeseeseecseceeceseeeeseeeeseesaesaes 5 31 Resending undelivered alarms 0 0 cece ceeecceeceseeesececeseeseeereeeeeseeeaenee 5 31 Saving the alarm path parameters 00 0 0 cesses cseeesecneesseceesaecseenaes 5 32 Brror messages isic i el as ee othe ee AR eh 5 33 Enabling thumbwheel operation eee eeeeeseeese cee ceseeseeeeceeceseseeeeaecaeeaeeaseneees 5 34 Resetting the node CLOCK oo eeeeeesecseeeeeeeeeseeseecaeceeceaeeseeeeeeaeeseeeaecaesnaeeeeeree 5 34 Enabling firmware download o0 cee eseseeesecseeeseceecesececeseeeeceseeeeseneseneeaeseaeenes 5 35 Activating the Node iz siege i daa eater eee 5 35 Addis anode aene n a cso baie suman ste seu ston R ota Weaver REEE 5 35 Comments ste SR ee SIA ee eR ee SEE eat 5 36 An ounce Of prevention sii oare ee apii sme SKS euei iens 5 37 Conclusion to Adding a Node s sssssseeeeesssseseseesrerrsrerrrseerssrsrrsreserreereees 5 38 Access Manager 2000 User Manual Node Access Farlure s ie 2 2h 2a lei Se ee ee eR 5 39 Editing a node serrr noeneen era ae tudes ip ousublera E E Sa E a E e es 5 40 Deleting a node aenn n ee a ee A aa 5 42 Vie wit a n
175. ate BER threshold on the network side to a rate from 10 to 10 with a default value of 10 A value of ZERO disables the BER alarm function The approximate length of time for automatic alarm to reset may vary according to which BER threshold you select as shown in the following two tables a Table 5 8 Older CSU Circuit Elements BER Alarm Rest Times a Table 5 9 Newer CSU Circuit Elements BER Alarm Reset Times 5 64 Access Manager 2000 User Manual Repeate Loopback Time out Configuration Options for 551VST Elements Table 5 8 Older CSU Circuit Elements BER Alarm Rest Time Applicable equipment BER Threshold Alarm Reset e 551VST List 1 A all revisions 104 4 seconds 551VST List 1 B BER alarm all 10 4 seconds revisions 108 10 seconds 4016 List 1 all revisions pe 107 70 seconds 4016 List 2 firmware revision 2 2 or earlier 108 70 seconds e 4016 R firmware revision 2 4 o 109 660 seconds earlie e 551VST List 2 firmware revision 2 1 or earlie Table 5 9 Newer CSU Circuit Elements BER Alarm Reset Time The longer BER alarm reset times reduce the number of BER alarms reported to Access Manager Applicable equipment BER Threshold Alarm Reset Times 4016 List 2 firmware revision 2 3 104 97 194 seconds or later 5 10 97 194 seconds 4016 R firmware revision 2 5 or later 108 97 194 seconds 551VST List 2 firmware revision 107 97 194 seconds 2 2
176. ate allowed for signals coming from the network Each can be set to any value between 104 and 10 The default is to 10 Go to the EQP BER threshold field and enter the positiv value of the exponent For example for a bit error rate of 10 enter 5 Remember the higher the exponent the lower the threshold Do the same with the NET BER threshold field The default value is 6 for 10 To disable the alarm select 0 zero Set alarm thresholds and interval counts for each of these three types of trouble seconds e Errored Seconds Line ES L that is the number of seconds with bipolar violations indicating formatting errors This refers only to BPVs which are not an intentional part of B8ZS line coding Errored Seconds ES that is the number of seconds with CRC 6 errors indicating a violation of data integrity e Unavailable Seconds UAS that is any second during which a UASS Unavailable Signal State exists Alarm CONDITION SUB MENU Loopback alarm relay Y BER threshold 4 9 7 6 NET BER threshold lt 0 4 9 7 EQP EQP EQP EQP EQP EQP ES L threshold 7 25 ES L intervals count 7 1 Risleritere E E T 25 1 ene eee s 25 Teas 1 NET NET NET NET NET NET ES L threshold ES L intervals count ES threshold ES intervals count UAS threshold UAS intervals count NET
177. ath between Access Manager and your system node you were limited to using either a direct connection a modem or a stat mux to connect If you re using either Access System 2000 or ConnecT1 Plus equipment with this new revision Rev 1 3 of Access Manager software you also have the option of using an X 25 PAD Packet Assembler Disassembler This feature is not available with other Verilink ESF CSUs for example the 551 series The options you have for connecting the Access Manager PC to the node are summarized in Figure 5 2 How to connect the Access Manager PC and the node on page 5 17 An AS2000 node is shown because it s the only one which can use the X 25 PAD 5 16 Access Manager 2000 User Manual Configuring nodes Figure 5 2 How to connect the Access Manager PC and the node Connection Options Direct connection AS2000 Node Modem with NCC 2020 Port 2 Stat Mux Port 3 Port 1 Access Manager Defining query paths To define the Query Path you must identify the device which transfers the query from Access Manager to the node enter the destination address and specify the baud rate used The fields which are used to do this are Query path type The following options are available Select Device Type 1 NONE DIRECT MODEM COMDESIGN MUX amp 25 PAD AUTOCONF IG Press f number or ESC Query path COMn phone or PORT This specifies the
178. ath phone number should be configured to Access Arrangement MODEM ANSWER ONLY Port name assigned in the ComDesign COMDESIGNMUX or RS2000 Multiplexer to the physical port AUTOCONFIG where the node is connected The Alarm Path is the port name assigned in the multiplexer to the physical port where Access Manager that is the PC collecting alarm reports is connected X 25 PAD Port name X 25PAD Autoconfig COMn phone or Port Name AUTOCONFIG Port Name assumes ComDesign mux If you have several PCs running Access Manager you can configure a system so all the PCs can access the node but only one receives the alarm reports Access Manager 2000 User Manual Configuring nodes To do this the Node ID must be the same for all of the PCs The PCs should access the node by modem or through a ComDesign statistical multiplexer Since the PCs are at different phone numbers or ComDesign ports the Alarm Path matches only the last PC that configured it This PC is your designated alarm report PC Alarm reports are only sent to this PC Even when the node is accessed for its current status it only sends the accumulated alarm reports if the alarm report PC accesses it This allows multiple locations to access a node but the alarms are reported only to a single master site The node checks the alarm path sent to it from the PC during the connection sequence If this alarm path matches the one saved in the node or if it
179. aud Rate Async EQP Name EQP SER Press F5 to update element F8 for Mode Baud Rate Ctrl PgUp Ctrl PgDn for prev next circuit element 2 View all the circuit elements in the range The Ctrl Gaua and Ctrl Qana key combinations respectively let you access the previous or next circuit element in the range you have selected To display the status of a circuit element such as a CSU at the far end through the ESF Data Link press after accessing the near end circuit element Access Manager 2000 User Manual 8 27 Monitoring and Troubleshooting Access Manager 3 After viewing the configuration screen press CE2 to return to the On line Access Menu Displaying Telco and User data 8 28 For any Verilink CSU you can review Telco and user data from performance registers These on line registers are located in the CSU element For all Verilink CSUs this information is available in breakdowns of 1 hour and 24 hours You can also view this information in three different forms These include performance data registers statistics and barcharts a Performance data registers provide you with raw data displayed by type of error and time interval a Statistics take that raw data and present it to you in terms of percentages a Barcharts provide a visual representation of the performance data Up to four types of register sets are available forVerilink equipment one for equipment parameters and three for netw
180. aves changes or additions made to the current element or in most data entry screens tells Access Manager to accept the on screen data lt F6 gt Approve update of entire range Pressing for multiline nodes updates the entir range of circuit elements selected with the options enteredinthe Edit Circuit Element option under the Configuration Menu lt F7 gt Data monitor Pressing toggles the status of the data monitor A window appears in the lower left of the screen showing the number of seconds before scheduled dat collection and polling begins During scheduled data collection the right side of the screen shows the circuit element from which data is being collected and the left side shows the data monitor status lt F8 gt Display a list of options Pressing displays a sub menu of the selections available for one of the option fields in the current menu If the function is available it is indicated at the bottom of the menu or in the option field line Access Manager 2000 User Manual 3 7 Using Access Manager 3 8 Key Meaning Definition lt F9 gt Log off Pressing logs you off Access Manager without shutting it down lt F10 gt Shut down Pressing exits you from Access Manager to DOS You must have a LEVEL4 access to do this After pressing a message appears that asks you whether or not to shut Access Manager down Typing Y continues the shut down a When Access Manager is sta
181. ay not be available on all CSUs e NMC L1 with 4016 L2 CSU J Installed and operational Retrieve performance data 7 Retrieve far end data 7 Enable alarm reporting 7 xEnable remote configuration 10E 7 BER threshold 4 9 Repeater loop timeout Csecs Enable far end polling 7 Enable transparent mode 7 Use FCC part 68 rule only 7 AISCnot SIGNAL loop back AISCnot ESS keep alive 7 Enable PRM 200067 J J Edit Options for NMC LZ CSU 1 1 28 Enable span side B8ZS encode Enable span side B8ZS decode Regenerate CRC to span side Span side ESF framing 7 Enable YEL transcode to span Enable EQP side B8ZS encode 7 Enable EQP side B8ZS decode Regenerate CRC to EQP side EQP side ESF framing 7 Enable YEL transcode to EQP Idle code flags 7 x Disabling this option also disables the indented options below it These options are not available on L1 CSU Press F5 to update circuit element or F6 to update entire range Access Manager 2000 User Manual ZBPMBBABABAZAZKHKAZ 5 53 Configuring the T1 Network ConnecT1 Plus CSU ConnecT1 Plus Options for CSU Edit Shelf 1 PLUG 1 1 2 Installed and Operational 7 NET LBO 7 5 15DB F8 Retrieve near perf data F8 Y NET Density enforcement F8 Retrieve far end data F8 N NET keep alive F8 xEnable Remote Configuration N NET frami
182. ble 4 1 Table 5 1 Table 5 2 Table 5 3 Table 5 4 Table 5 5 Table 5 6 Table 5 7 Table 5 8 Table 5 9 Table 5 10 Table 5 11 Table 5 12 Table 8 1 Table B 1 Table B 2 Table B 3 Table C 1 Table C 2 Table C 3 Table C 4 Table C 5 Table C 6 Table C 7 Table C 8 Table C 9 Table C 10 Table D 1 List of Tables Access Manager Installation Files cc ceeeescesecececereceseeenceceneeceeceeeeeeeeesaeceeecnaeeeneeeees 2 4 Batch file commands for automatic Start Up cece cee ceseeseceseeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenes 2 10 Accumaster Time Zone Chart occ cceceeseeseesceseessececsseceeceseeeceseeeeeeeseseeeseeseaeseeeeas 2 14 Function key definitions in PC mode ee ceeseeeeeeeceeeeeeeseeesecasecaecaeesecsseeaseeeees 3 7 Cursor movement key definitions in PC Mode ee ee eee cece eeeceeeesecnseenecsenseeeeees 3 9 Special key definitions in PC mode wo eee eeeeeeeecseeeeecaeeeaeceeaeceeseseeeeeesereeeeees 3 10 Function key and escape key sequences in VT100 terminal mode ee 3 12 Database allocation at time of shipment 0 eee eee ce ceee cee ceneeseceseeeceeeeeeeneeeees 4 13 Parent nodes and their COMPONENES eee ee eseeecseessecnseeseceeceaeceeeseeeeeeeseaseseseaeeaes 5 2 Allowable AS2000 shelf configurations 0 0 0 0 cece cee csseeseeeecesceeeeeeeeeecaeesaeaecneeeeeees 5 16 Assuring compatibility between Query Path and Comline settings eee 5 18 Selecting baud rates by equipment type and access tye eee eececeseceeee
183. ble bit oriented message on the ESF Data Link Send LLB or PLB Deactivate Message to Far End 11 403 These options are also available only for NCC CCC or TAC They deactivate the LLBs or PLBs previously activated via the T1 403 loop up messages above Note Jf the framed ALL ONEs signal is being transmitted send inband codes will not work use options Activate LLB and or C Deactivate PLB and LLB instead However this procedure does not work if the far end CSU is a 4016 List 1 or 551VST List I A In these cases you must first deactivate framed ALL ONEs signal option K then transmit the inband code options D and E and finally restore framed ALL ONEs option J Activating Deactivating DIU loopbacks Loopback descriptions 8 48 This section provides a description of DIU loopbacks and the procedure for activating and deactivating them The data port loopback of a DIU affects only the data ports on which it is activated All other data ports of the DIU remain uninterrupted Access Manager 2000 User Manual Activating Deactivating DIU loopbacks DIU 2130 and DIU 1130 loopbacks The DIU 2130 and DIU 1130 loopbacks are shown in the following figure DIU 2130 gt gt gt Loopback FIFO MUX Logic Driver and Circuit EQUIPMENT RS232 Receiver INTEC Logic INTFC lt e ee The selected data equipment transmitter output is connected to the
184. ble span side B8ZS decode Regenerate CRC to span side Span side ESF framing 7 Enable YEL transcode to span Enable EQP side B8ZS encode Enable EQP side B8ZS decode Regenerate CRC to EQP side EQP side ESF framing 7 Enable YEL transcode to EQP 7 Idle code flags 7 J J Use FCC part 68 rule only AISCnot SIGNAL loop back AISCnot ESS keep alive Enable PRM eeeeeeeee ld x Disabling this option also disables the indented options below it These options are not available on L1 CSU Press F5 to update circuit element or F6 to update entire range 5 60 Access Manager 2000 User Manual Configuration Options for 551VST Elements CAUTION The 4016 List 1 CSU circuit elements can be soft configured using Access Manager However service interruption may occur if the soft option settings do not agree with the hardware switches on the 4016 List 1 printed circuit boards This occurs only when the 4016 List 1 recovers from a power failure and reconfigures itself according to the hardware switch settings Therefore you should configure all 4016 List 1 CSUs so that the hardware switch settings on the CSU agree with the soft options you choose in Access Manager The configuration options for 551 VST type CSUs are summarized in the following table Table 5 7 Configuration options for 551 VST type CSU
185. bled calls Access Manager to report alarms a None The node s network management port is not used Access to the node is limited to the Facility Data Link which implies you re dealing with a far end node or via daisy chain Access Manager 2000 User Manual 5 21 Configuring the T1 Network a ComDesign The node s network management port connects to a statistical multiplexer a X 25PAD The node s network management port connects to an X 25PAD Packet Assembler Disassembler Table 5 5 Node configuration options for older equipment This includes the for 551VST List 1 551VST List 1 A 551VST List 1 B and 551VST ML List 1 These equipment types use TABS Protocol and do not support alarm reporting Access Arrangement Connection ae Data Link Option Direct Modem or Daisy Chain ComDesign Baud Rate Note 1 1200 1200 1200 120 Query Path COM 1 16 Phone No None Port Name Enable Alarm Reporting No No No No NOTE 1 Currently a modem Comline configured for 2400 baud cannot initiate calls to a node configured for 1200 baud Configure the node in Access Manage for 2400 baud and allow the modem to automatically downgrade to 1200 baud Table 5 6 Node Configuration Option for newer equipment This includes the 551VST ML List 2 SIM NC E ConnecT1 Plus and AS2000 These equipment types use OSI protocol The X 25PAD can only be used with AS2000 equipment None ComDesign Access Arrangement
186. bleshoot this error 1 Verify that there is a Comline defined with the proper baud rate for that modem If the node is equipped with a 1200 baud modem and you do not have a 1200 baud modem at the Access Manager site then configure the node in Access Manager for 2400 baud and let the modems automatically downgrade when the connection is made 2 If Access Manager fails to access the second ora successive node of a multiple node Access System 2000 or ConnecT1 Plus system the RS232 daisy chain from the first node to the desired node may be faulty Try accessing a preceding lower numbered node in this daisy chain If the access to that node is successful either the RS232 daisy chain is faulty and the originally requested node or the NCC 2020 or CCC 1020 in the original node may be faulty 3 If Access Manager still fails to access repeat this step going gradually back toward the first Access System 2000 or ConnecT1 Plus node until the access is successful If the RS232 daisy chain cabling is good the master NCC 2020 or CCC 1020 may be faulty in one of the nodes 4 If Access Manager cannot access any node verify that the connected modem is properly configured that the cabling is correct and that the Comline is configured correctly Refer to the appendices for cabling requirements modem requirements and Comline requirements Verify that all the following are true Access Manager 2000 User Manual 5 39 Configuring the T1 Network
187. cal layer of protocol for implementing a pattern that replaces eight consecutive ZERO bits This pattern includes two intentional bipolar violations BPVs that would otherwise indicate transmission errors Using B8ZS allows for 64 kbps per DS 0 with unlimited zeros A violation of the T1 bipolar AMI transmission pattern requiring successive ONEs pulses to be transmitted as pulses of opposite polarities BPVs normally indicate transmission errors B8ZS patterns contain intentional BPVs which are not counted as errors The number of bipolar violations BPVs occurring over a given period of time See ALL ONEs Bits per second a basic unit of measure for serial data transmission kbps kilobits per second indicates a transmission rate of 1000 s bps See Bipolar Violation A second having between 2 and 319 CRC 6 Cyclical Redundanc Checksum error events In most cases an 8 bit quantity of information used mainly in parallel data transfer or data storage Also referred to as an octet An assembly of one or more conductors within a protective sheath made so as to permit the use of the conductors separately or in groups These registers store the previous 24 hours performance monitoring data accumulated as ESs UASs BESs SESs and LOFCs plus the current interval s ESs UASs BESs SESs and LOFCs There is also an ESF Error Event register which provides a continuous count of ESF error events The carrier registers can be r
188. ccur Any change in status reported by the near end CSU causes the screen to be updated Access Manager 2000 User Manual 8 25 Monitoring and Troubleshooting Access Manager Displaying on line circuit element configuration For any AS2000 circuit element you can review the configuration data present in the element as opposed to the database The screens you ll view look exactly like the configuration screens The difference is that the fields are read only Also the color of the displayed information is red for the On line Access menu and blue for the Configuration menu To view on line circuit element configuration 1 Inthe On line Access screen move the cursor to Element Config and press Enter A circuit configuration screen appears for the first circuit element Each type of circuit element has a specific screen The circuit elements and their corresponding screens are as follows e Ifthe circuit element is an NCC 2020 CCC 1020 TAC 2010 or TAC 1010 a configuration screen like the one below appears AS2860 Options for CSU Edit Shelf 1 PLUG 1 1 13 Installed and Operational NET LBO 7 5 15DB gt F8 Retrieve near perf datal F8 NET Density enforcement F8 Retrieve far end data F8 NET keep alive F8 Save Configuration to CSU NET framing format Enable Alarm Reporting F8 Enable NET side B8ZS Poll far end status F8 Regenerate CRC 6 to NET RLB loopback timeout Enable YEL tran
189. cedures in Chapter 2 Installing Access Manager and Chapter 3 Using Access Manager Follow the instructions in these chapters which may refer you to further instructions in other chapters Whether you re a novice or experienced user don t start in the middle of a procedure However if you are in the middle of an operation and are about to choose an option or have been working without the aid of this manual it is still important to find the starting point of the relevant procedure and read each of its steps to be sure you have not skipped any important items When procedures have many steps each step is numbered in the execution sequence as in the following example 1 Starting from the Main Menu select Configure 2 When the Configuration Menu appears select Node Access Manager 2000 User Manual xvii Chapter 1 3 You have now completed this procedure The functional specifications of the various Verilink network access systems differ consequently Access Manager presents a different set of menus for each of the two different types of nodes These two types of nodes are m AS2000 type nodes includes Access System 2000 and ConnecT1 Plus network management systems m 551VST type nodes includes 551 VST type Single Line nodes SIM NC E 551VST ML List 1 and 551VST ML List 2 Multiline nodes This manual presents information through menu descriptions Access Manager has two types of menus a The AS2000 type o
190. cess Manager 2000 User Manual Configuration Options for AS2000 and ConnecTI Plus Installed and Operational This setting should be the same as the Installed and Operational option setting for the associated CSU Save Configuration to DIU To store the configuration from the database into the DIU set the Save configuration to DIU option to Y Ifthis option is set to N any updated changes are saved to the database but are not downloaded to the DIU Connected CSU Shelf and Plug Numbers Specify the AS2000 shelf number and plug in module slot number of the CSU associated with the selected DIU 2140 The shelf number can be from 1 to 4 The plug in module slot number can be from to 13 fora multiline shelf or 1 to 2 for a dual line shelf Channel Assignment Assign an available DSO channel of the associated DS1 line to the DIU This number can be from to 24 This parameter also has an key associated with it so that you can view the allocated channels For additional information see Channel Assignment on page 5 93 Mode To select the transmission mode of the DIU 2140 press in the Mode field The Select Mode screen will appear Access Manager 2000 User Manual 5 99 Configuring the T1 Network 5 100 Installed and Operational Save Configuration to DIU Connected CSU shelf Baud Rate Async B 8 8 Press F5 to update element F8 for Options Baud Rate Ctrl PgUp Ctrl PgDn for prev next circuit elem
191. cility FAREND EQPT Near End DIU 2130 NCC 2020 DSi Faciiy FAR END EQPT EQPT DIU 2130 Data Port Qs CIRCUIT A node is any equipment that has a single point Access Manager port i e to which Access Manager can connect in order to access its circuit elements for network management The single point of access may be in a variety of modes 1 4 Access Manager 2000 User Manual Network Elements The modes of access for near end nodes are standard implementations of RS 232 interface methods that is direct daisy chained through a statistical multiplexer or by modem The mode of access for far end nodes is through the ESF Data Link through the near end node access Since the functional specifications of the various Verilink network access systems differ Access Manager presents a different set of menus for the two different types of nodes The two basic types of nodes are m AS2000type node includes Access System 2000 and ConnecT1 Plus network management systems ConnecT1 Plus is a low cost implementation of AS2000 hardware available in a dual line shelf configuration only AS2000 and ConnecT1 Plus nodes can have up to four shelves per node ConnecT1 Plus nodes have only dual line shelves AS2000 nodes can have a combination of dual line and multiline shelves However of the four possible shelves in an AS2000 node no more than two can be multiline shelves a 551VSTtypenode 551 VST type single line nodes
192. circuit element status in a node Each shelf has one SIM shelf controller and up to ten 4016 R CSU circuit elements The CSUs are designated by C01 to C10 reading from left to right Paired with each of these CSUs is a far end CSU designated by a column labeled FAR For a551VST ML List 1 or List 2 node the status of the 28 possible near end CSUs are on one line with the corresponding far end CSU status on the next line The fuse status is not shown and the power supply status appears on the right side Specifically the display example shows the following On Shelf 1 CSUs 2 and 5 are On Shelf 2 CSU 10 equipped configured e receiving signals from the far end Is a Spare z N 1 oo EES O Any Fuses aoe Blown On Shelf 2 CSU 3 is not receiving a signal from the far end On Shelf 4 the shelf is equipped and the SIM is missing or has failed The status of the first 3 CSUs is undetermined Firmuare UZ Hardware UVO 8 operative absent X missing S spare undetermined On Shelf 3 CSU 10 is missing Th On Shelf 5 the shelf is not equipped SIM is absent blown fise stat s ie YES indicating e CSUs 1 to 8 are not installed in the database that CSU 10 has a blown 5V fuse CSUs 9 and 10 are undetermined If they are physically absent set the Installed and Operational configuration option to NO For the 551 VST ML List 1 and 2 the following differences exist in the NC
193. cknowledged alarms counter to zero 2 A trouble condition that no longer exists An oscillator generated signal that provides a timing reference for a transmission link For an AMI coded signal this is a bipolar violation BPV occurrence For a B8ZS coded signal this is the occurrence of aBPV which is not a zero substitution code When SF D4 framing is used this is a framing error For ESF framing this is a CRC 6 error A physical interface such as DA 15 or DC 37 typically with male and female components See Cyclic Redundancy Check Occurs when the CRC code in areceived ESF signal fails to match the CRC code calculated locally by the CSU A CRC 6 error event indicates that at least one bit of the frame has not been received correctly Access Manager 2000 Manual Term Definition CRC 6 Regeneration CSU CSU Slot Number CTS Current Current Status CV L CV P Cyclic Redundancy Check 1 Cyclic Redundancy Check 2 A mode in which the CRC 6 is recalculated for incoming data before it is retransmitted In this mode any incoming CRC 6 errors are not propagated although the data may be corrupted See Channel Service Unit The plug in slot location of a CSU in a multiline or dual line shelf ClearTo Send The amount of electrical charge flowing past a specified circuit point per unit of time See Ampere A An indication of current line and or circuit element status including CSU signal sta
194. constitutes a punishable violation of the law The following are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies or organizations AutoCad 10 Autodesk Corporation FrameMaker and Frame Technology Frame Technology Corporation ITC Helvetica and ITC Times International Typeface Corporation Access System 2000 Access Manager 2000 Advanced Programmable Architecture and Craft Interface Verilink Corporation Sun Microsystems Open Windows Sparc Printer IPX IPC and Sun Workstation Sun Microsystems Inc FrameMaker and Frame Technology Frame Technology Corporation FCC Warning Statement The Federal Communications Commission FCC Rules require that you be notified of the following This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with this reference can cause interference to radio communications This equipment has been tested and found to comply within the limits for Class A devices pursuant to Subpart J of Part 15 of the FCC rules which are designed to provide reasonable protection against such interference when operated in a commercial environment Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause interference in which case the user s will be required to take whatever measures that can be required to fix the interference at their own expense Per FCC Part 68 requirements the customer is required to
195. creen appears T1 Channel Allocation of SIGMA TEST 1 61 on NONE Unused Channels 1 24 Node Name shelf slot port Channels Press FZ to return to previous menu This screen allows the user to view which channels are already allocated and which channels are available 2 Enter the channel assignments of unused channels in order separating each channel from the next by commas Contiguous 5 94 Access Manager 2000 User Manual Configuration Options for AS2000 and ConnecTI Plus channels may be entered by using a hyphen between the first and last channel Certain DIU 2130 and DIU 1130 applications require unrestricted ZEROs density operation Remember the following a If the data rate is a multiple of 56 kbps and you configure the DIU for the 56 kbps user data channel mode the DIU data ports are in the unrestricted ZEROs density operating mode a If the data rate is a multiple of 64 kbps and you configure the DIU for the 64 kbps user data channel mode review the configuration of the CSU used with the DIU 2130 and DIU 1130 Youhave unrestricted ZEROs operation if the configuration of the CSU is 1I NET Density Enforcement NONE and 2 Enable NET B8ZS YES a If the data rate is a multiple of 64 kbps and you configure the DIU for the 64 kbps user data channel mode you have unrestricted zeros operation if your Channel Assignments are not contiguous and none of the channels are adjacent Alternate channel assignments satisf
196. ctivating and deactivating loopbacks Access Manager 2000 User Manual 8 39 Monitoring and Troubleshooting Access Manager To help you quickly isolate problems within the transmission path most CSU loopback of the Verilink CSUs including NCC CCC or TAC provide the descriptions following four basic loopbacks shown in the following diagram NETWORK INTERFACE CSU EQ SM OUT IN LBO lt A A gt E on SIG CRIT PROC PROC x O DTE ELB PLB LLB RL z EQ SM Repeater SM MON These include the following loopbacks LLB or Line Loopback PLB or Payload Loopback RLB or Repeater Loopback ELB or Equipment Loopback All loopbacks can be activated and deactivated via the data port the diagnostic interface port or an ESF 4 kbps message received from the far end CSU or an intra network device except as described in the previous section 8 40 Access Manager 2000 User Manual Activating Deactivating CSU loopbacks PLB Payload Loopback When a PLB is in effect the signal from the DS1 line is looped back to the line Since the looped signal passes through the CSU including the repeater the PLB is useful in testing the CSU from the far end of the circuit MostVerilink units can be configured to either pass the network signal intact or send an Alarm Indication Signal AIS which is unframed ALL ONEs to the EQPT during a PLB The following LEDs on theVerilink CSUs NCC 2020 C
197. d on pag eB 4 lists the switch configurations for a Hayes Smartmodem TM 1200 and the ATcommands for a Hayes Smartmodem TM 2400 when used to connect a PC running Access Manager to a CSU or Controller without a DTR lead For further information see the Hayes Smartmodem 2400 user manual in the configuration section If a Hayes Smartmodem TM 2400 is to be used with a CSU or Controller it must be configured before connecting it to the CSU or Controller This is performed by connecting it to a An ASCII terminal a APC equipped with an ASCII terminal emulation program a A communications program Access Manager 2000 User Manual B 1 Modem Configuration Commands Modem Initialization by CSU or Controller OSI Compatible Equipment The modem must be configured to communicate at 2400 baud 8 data bits no parity one stop bit All the commands listed i n TableB 1 Modem Configuration for OSI Protocol DTR Lead on page B 3 through TableB 3 Modem Configuration for TABS Protocol on page B 6 must be preceded by the charactersAT For example to disable character echo type ATEO amp W Otherwise the following command should also be entered to cause the modem to recall User Profile 0 on power up AT amp YO amp W The amp W command writes the changes to User Profile 0 See the following tables Table B 1 Modem Configuration for OSI Protocol DTR Lead on pag eB 3 a Table B 3 Modem Conf
198. d Event 5 000 58 bytes Alarm 10 000 62 bytes Performance 3 kinds e data also known as user records 50 000 150bytes e additional 50 000 150bytes dtev also known as EQP records 50 000 150bytes Each of the three categories of performance records can be edited separately To assign database allocations 1 From the Jnstallation screen select Quotas The screen labeled Edit Database Record Quotas now appears Edit Database Record Quotas Current number of alarm records in use 7 You can Maximum number of alarm records allowed edit those Current number of data records in use l Maximum number of data records allowed 58000 Current number of additional records in use 3 Maximum number of additional records allowed 50000 Current number of dtev records in use Maximum number of dteu records allowed 50000 Current number of event records in use 59 Maximum number of event records allowed 5000 Current number of installed circuit elements 2 Maximum number of installed circuit elements_allowed UNRESTRICTED Package ANZ 00 1888 Tells you which network p manager package you have AM2000 8 AM2000 24 AM2000 1000 Press F5 to save definition The Edit Database Record Quotas screen also displays but does not permit you to change the following e The current number of records of each type in use that is stored in the database Access Manager 2000 User Manual 4 13 Configuring Access Manager Assigning coml
199. d node and CSU over the Facility Data Link 5 6 Access Manager 2000 User Manual T1 Network Monitoring Overview Operationally each far end CSU is managed as if it were a node as well as a circuit element The node Query Path field must have NONE as its chosen option Near end node ole node 3 vv cC IC Cc Cc uy S S S S e U U U U Access Manager 2000 _ x T Facility Data Link no c S U Far end node 1 it Far end node 2 In summary the far end CSU is both defined as a node and configured as an element GAS Build the database for the far end CSU parameters Menu used Main Configuration Element Edit Near end node Far end node 3 vv C jc Bp s s A U U EEE Access Manager 2000 q T1 Facility Data Link lt p C C Sij IS UJU Far end nodes 1 amp 2 Select the configuration parameters for each far end CSU yow ll use and use CF5 to attempt to download the configuration A message will come up saying that you need to build a circuit first Although your actual download was unsuccessful you did succeed in building a spot for the configuration in the database 6 Configure a circuit between the CSUs Access Manager 2000 User Manual 5 7 Configuring the T1 Network 5 8 a Access Manager 2000 User Manual Menu used Main Configuration Circuit Add Once the
200. d password A user level of 4 is required for these tests Also verify that the current Access Manager 2000 software revision is 2 3B or higher This revision appears at the bottom of the Main Menu Access the CSU to be tested and temporarily set the repeater loopback RLB time out option of each CSU to be tested to 1 HR Starting from the Main Menu of Access Manager 2000 select On line Access The On line Access Select Node Menu appears Select the Access System 2000 node in which the desired NCC or TAC is located and press Enter The On line AS2000 screen appears 5 108 Access Manager 2000 User Manual J 14 Biss CSU acceptance testing Choose the Loopbacks option and press Enter Type the shelf and plug plug in module slot numbers of the NCC or TAC and press the CE5 function key Choose the Activate Repeater Loopback RLB option and press Enter Type N to specify the near end RLB and press Enter When the loopback warning screen appears type Y to activate the loopback Press to return to the On line AS2000 screen Choose the Select Test option and press Enter Type shelf and plug in slot numbers of the NCC or TAC and press the CE5 function key The Select CSUTest Activity screen appears Choose the Send QRSS Test Pattern option and press Enter The Test Current Node screen appears Enter the following settings and press e Test Duration FOREVER e To Netw
201. data equipment ports at the customer s premises with a NCC or TAC over a T1 network See ESF Data Link The physical connection on the DIU that allows data from the data equipment to enter the DIU A DSU is a multiplexer that apportions the 24 channels of a DS 1 T1 not necessarily of equal size Access Manager 2000 Manual Term Definition Data Terminal Equipment DC DCE DDS Decibel dB Digital Signal Level 0 Digital Signal Level 1 Digital Data Service DDS Digital Multiplexer Demulitplexer DIM DIU DLS DSU DS 0 DS 1 Generally user devices such as terminals and computers that connect to data circuit terminating equipment DCE they either generate or receive data carried by the network Direct Current See Data Circuit terminating Equipment Dataphone Digital Service AT amp T A private line digital service offered with data rates typically at 2 4 4 8 9 6 19 2 and 56 kbps A measure of the relative strength of two signals The number of decibels is ten times the log of the ratio of the power of two signals or 20 times the log of the ratio of the voltage of two signals This term describes the signal carried on a lower than T1 speed carrier facility specifically a 64 kbps rate signal This term describes the 1 544 Mbps digital signal carried on a T1 or higher order carrier facility There are 24 DSOs in a T1 line Each DSO is capable of 64 kbps or 56 kbps signal tra
202. de s configuration and the operational status of its circuit elements If a status change to a circuit element occurs while in the display Access Manager retrieves the current status of the circuit element and updates the display Access Manager 2000 User Manual 8 5 Monitoring and Troubleshooting Access Manager The Display option is not available single line CSUs The single line CSUs are a SSIVST List 1 A a 551VST List 1 B a SSIVST List 2 To view circuit element status in a node 1 In the On line Access sub menu move the cursor to Displa and press Enter 2 You are presented with a configuration screen that corresponds to the node you selected on the On line Access Select Node screen The node types and their corresponding configuration sub menus areas follows e Ifyou selected a 551 VST type node you ll a screen similar to this NCE Configuration Firmware V2 Hardware VO 0 operative absent X missing S spare undetermined e Ifyou selected an AS2000 type node you ll see this screen AS20886 Configuration SMDS Firmware V4 2 Hardware V 8 C SF SF SF SF SF SF SF SF SF SF SF SF SF Shelf T OA BA BA BA BA BA BA BA BA 1A1A1A1A L 1R ZR 3R 4R SR 6R 7R BR GR R 1R ZR BR 1 M 150 2 MX s ist Letter S NCC2020 C TACZ010 D DIUZ130 O DIUZ140 T TIUZ85 7 undetermined M DIUZ132 2nd Letter 0 Operational Alarm enabled N Operational Alarm disabled Absent X Missing S Spar
203. desired node definition values can now be entered Node Name This uniquely identifies each node This identifier is Node ID Location always unique and cannot be duplicated for use with other nodes It can have up to 16 characters including spaces or dashes This identification number can only be in the range from 1 to 65 535 Every time you add a new node the node ID that appears is the next higher available number You may keep that number or change it but two nodes cannot share the same Node ID This identifies the node site usually the location of a customer s equipment This field can be up to 30 characters long It is used to display nodes in alphabetical order by location Multiple nodes can have the same location Equipment type The default type is a 551 VST List 2 CSU Alistoftheavailableoptionscanbeaccessedbypressing CE8 Select Equipment Type 4 551UST LIST 2 551UST ML LIST 2 551UST LIST 1 B 551UST LIST 1 A 551UST ML LIST 1 SIM NCE CONNECT1 PLUS AS24808 Press ft 4 number or ESC GONDU AWN The available equipment types are as follows System Shelf Type s With an AS2000 or ConnecT1 shelf you must specify the type of shelf or shelves you re using You must follow certain rules of syntax when entering this information This information can be found in Specifying shelf types for AS2000 nodes on page 5 15 Previous Node in chain You can access up to three 5 14 Access Man
204. dify the CONFIG SYS file with EDLIN the text editor for DOS or with any text editor or word processor with an ASCII text editor option 2 Reboot the system after you change the CONFIG SYS file The values for FILES and BUFFERS are not ineffect until you do ee Use the following procedure if Access Manager is installed on your host Updating an PC and you want to upgrade to the current version existing Access Mana ger system To update an existing Access Manager system Access Manager 2000 User Manual 2 7 Installing Access Manager 2 8 1 If the current Access Manager directory is named AM2000 create a backup directory named for instance AM2000 BAK 2 Copy the current directory s contents to AM2000 BAK so that the current directory can be used by the update 3 Insert Diskette 1 into drive A or another floppy diskette drive 4 To access that drive type A or the other diskette drive name and press Enter 5 Atthe A prompt type INSTALL and press Enter The INSTALL program s main menu should appear 6 Select the Database Stats option to determine if the host PC has enough space to hold the new software and modified database You need approximately 2 megabytes of hard disk space for the software files plus space equal to the size of your Access Manager database To calculate the size of the Access Manager database add together all files which have the extensions DAT and DBD For example if
205. dress This address is an ASCII string that corresponds to whatever name the port has been given in the stat mux device For example the port in the stat mux may have been named PORT1 CHANNEL2 or CHICAGO 1 To specify the endpoint of the first alarm path go to the Primary Alarm Path field and enter the appropriate contact number or string 2 To specify the endpoint of the auxiliary alarm path go to the Secondary AlarmPath field and enter the appropriate contact number or string Limiting alarm delivery attempts You can choose the number of Attempts to deliver the alarm before giving up If the path is specified as SEND and the number of retries expires the alarm is sent to the BACKUP path Access Manager 2000 User Manual Configuring nodes The valid range is 0 to 255 with the default set to 10 Modems are limited to 1 to 15 attempts If a path s attempts are set at 0 then the alarm is sent as many times as necessar_ until it s delivered In other words think of 0 as no permission to give up If the attempts are set to 4 then only four attempts will be made to deliver the alarm along that path Pacing delivery of new alarms To pace the delivery of new alarms you can specify aWait Time The wait interval is defined simply enough as the amount of time to wait before sending new alarms When the first alarm is received a timer is started with the time specified in this field No alarms are sent to
206. e Press F8 to retrieve amp store node and element configuration 8 6 Access Manager 2000 User Manual Shelf type Configuration symbols Displaying circuit element status in a node 3 When you are finished reviewing the display press CF2 to return to the On line Access Select Node screen You may now select another node The configuration Display sub menus present you with the following information Underneath the word Shelf is a number followed by a dash then a letter example S This indicates that the first shelf in the node is a Multiline Shelf MLS There are only three types of shelves a Multiline MLS 2200 13 slots 551V ST MLB MLE 14 slots a Dual line 2 slots Single self contained unit Configuration symbols or codes are used to display the status of the different elements in each shelf They appear as the second letter in each slot s configuration line Code Condition and Meaning 0 Operative The equipment is installed configured and has not failed at the near end For a far end circuit element it indicates that a T1 signal is being received Absent The module is physically absent from the shelf and is not configured If the incoming T1 signal is lost from a near end CSU the far end displays the element as absent X Missing The CSU or SIM is configured in the Access Manager database but the module itself e is missing e has failed e has a blown 5V fuse Access Man
207. e whether digital or analog A DS 1 performance data register from which either a Telco or customer operator can retrieve data but only a telco operator can reset A computer terminal is an input output device whereby a user is able to communicate directly with a computer A terminal must have a keyboard and a display A pair of insulated conductors that are twisted around each other mainly to reduce the effects of electrical noise Twisted pair is typical of standard telephone T1 wiring Access Manager 2000 Manual Term Definition U UAS See Unavailable Second UL See Underwriters Laboratory Unavailable Second Underwriters Laboratories Unavailable Signal State Unprivileged Password U V User Volts Alternating Current Vac Volts Direct Current Vac W X Z Word Length Counted for every second in which an Unavailable Signal State occurs This term is used by new standards in place of Failed Seconds FS A company that tests equipment for electronic safety If the instrument passes this company s tests it is underwritten and given the UL seal An Unavailable Signal State is declared whenever 10 consecutive SESs occur The Unavailable Signal State will not clear until 10 consecutive seconds of data are processed with no SESs present An ASCII interface CRAFT password that permits an ASCII operator to perform limited operations on an Access System module The operator of any device
208. e Access Manager has its own drivers for these boards using the Digiboard drivers will prevent Access Manager from working with the PC 4 or PC 8 Table D 7 Serial Ports for DigiCHANNEL PC 16 in IBM PC XT and AT Shared I O Port No non oad eo ines i i Status Mask 1 COM2 100H 3H 140H OH 2 COM3 108H 3H 140H 1H 3 COM4 110H 3H 140H 2H Access Manager 2000 User Manual D 11 Shared I O Port No Panes oe eon fies a ites Status Mask 4 COM5 118H 3H 140H 3H 5 COM6 120H 3H 140H 4H 6 COM7 128H 3H 140H 5H 7 COM8 130H 3H 140H 6H 8 COM9 138H 3H 140H 7H 9 COM10 148H 3H 140H 8H 10 COM11 150H 3H 140H 9H 11 COM12 158H 3H 140H AH 12 COM13 160H 3H 140H BH 13 COM14 168H 3H 140H CH 14 COM15 170H 3H 140H DH 15 COM16 178H 3H 140H EH 16 See Note 1 180H 3H 140H FH NOTE 1 Table D 7 Serial Ports for Digi CHANNEL PC 16 in IBM PC XT and AT on pageD 11 assumes you computer is equipped with a built in serial port at COM1 The DigiBoard ports should not include Comlines that are built into your PC and cannot be disabled therefore this table starts with COM2 However if your computer is not equipped with a built in serial port number the DigiBoard ports from COM1 through COM 16 The DigiBoard s first COM port is always given Port A ddress 100H All of the Digiboard s other ports are addressed according to the tables in this appendix NOTE
209. e LPT1 Printer type IBM GRAPHIC PRINTER Is printer 8 column wide 7 Y Press F5 to save definition F8 for printer type This screen defines where the on line information is printed and what type of printer is used The selections and menu are the same as in the Edit Report Printer option described in the previous section Refer to that section for an explanation of the menus and choices You can specify whether alarm reports go to a printer file or a computer This is done through the Edit Alarm Destination screen 4 8 Access Manager 2000 User Manual Configuring the site To select where you want the alarms to go a From the Installation Menu select Alarm The Edit Alarm Destination screen will appear Edit Alarm Destination Alarm printer filename Alarm printer type IBM GRAPHIC PRINTER Acknowledge alarm automatically N Alarm channel protocol NOT APPLICABLE Press F8 for printer type alarm channel protocol F5 to save definition Sending alarms to a printer or file To output the alarm report to a printer or to a file a Follow the same rules for Alarm Printer Filename and Alarm Printer Type as you did for Printer Filename and Printer Type in Configuring the report printer on page 4 5 earlier in this chapter Sending alarms to a computer You can choose to output alarm messages to another computer such as one running Accumaster Before attempting to configure Access Manager to send alarm reports _to_
210. e PC does not have function keys In the VT terminal mode the screen displays the applicable escape key combinations used with the VT100 terminal The PC function keys and their corresponding VT 100 escape sequences are listed inTabl e3 4 Function key and escape key sequences in VT 100 terminal mode on page 3 12 This table also describes the function of each sequence To return to the regular operating mode shut down Access Manager and restart it without the VT command Access Manager 2000 User Manual 3 11 Using Access Manager Table 3 4 Function key and escape key sequences in VT100 terminal mode PC mode VT100 terminal mode Function Key Escape key sequence Description lt Esc gt lt Esc gt lt Esc gt Cancel data Exit request lt Up Arrow gt lt Esc gt lt U gt Move one line u lt Down Arrow gt lt Esc gt lt D gt Move one line down lt Left Arrow gt lt Esc gt lt L gt Move cursor left lt Right Arrow gt lt Esc gt lt R gt Move cursor right lt Home gt lt Esc gt lt H gt Move cursor to first line lt End gt lt Esc gt lt E gt Move cursor to last line lt PgUp gt lt Esc gt lt P gt Move to previous page lt PgDn gt lt Esc gt lt N gt Move to next page lt Ctrl gt lt Left Arrow gt lt Esc gt lt C gt lt L gt Select Far End lt Ctrl gt lt Right Arrow gt lt Esc gt lt C gt lt R gt Select Near End lt Ctrl gt lt PgUp gt lt Esc gt lt C gt lt P gt
211. e data Federal Communications Commission a board of commissioners appointed by the President under the Commissions Act of 1934 with the authority to regulate all interstate telecommunications originating in the United States See ESF Facilities Data Link See Frame Bit Error See Forward Error Correction A technique used by a receiver for correcting errors incurred in transmission over a communications channel without requiring the retransmission of the information by the transmitter An error in the received framing bit pattern The number of whole seconds that a framing bit error has occurred A special purpose computer dedicated to the handling of communication links for a host computer Failed Second See Unavailable Seconds UAS See Failed Signal State A communication link where both pieces of equipment can transmit in both directions at the same time Access Manager 2000 Manual Term Definition G H Hub Office Hz I J Idle Code In band Jitter kbps Kilobits per Second L LAN LBO LED Light Emitting Diode Line Build Out A central location from which an operator can access an Access System 2000 node for administration and or testing The Access Manager 2000 controller is normally located at the hub office for dial up interface with systems at one or more distant customer premises Hertz A unit of frequency equal to one cycle per second The code that is transmitted whe
212. e list of CSU circuit elements which are accumulating test results are displayed on the CSU Tests in Progress screen CSU Tests in Progress Nodenamel shelf plug Test Starts at Length Side CSUL 61 611 1 8 17 26 27 8 58 Access Manager 2000 User Manual Press FZ to return to previous menu Each CSU circuit element is listed with the test it is performing Access Manager keeps track of up to 13 separate tests Test entries are deleted in three ways Testing DIUs Testing DIUs e After the results have been viewed if no 0 time is remaining e When the system is shutdown and restarted again e When more than 13 tests are running concurrently only the last 13 test entries are retained 12 Press CE2 to return to the SelectTest Activity screen 13 If the configuration was changed in order to run this test restore your configuration now You can also use Access Manager to perform end to end tests on a data port of a DIU 2130 in an Access System 2000 node The following tests options are available for DIUs You can apply a pseudo random bit sequence PRBS test signal on a data port under test This four bit pattern can be used to check circuit continuity on an end to end basis Sending a test signal To apply a PRBS test signal to a data port of a DIU 2130 DIU 1130 1 When you get the On line Access sub menu select the Select Test option 2 Select the DIU to apply the PRBS by entering its shelf and plug in
213. e node location or circuit have detailed data 11 Access Manager 2000 User Manual When the Circuit Element Detail screen appears Step 10 use the directional arrow keys to view the different intervals All intervals in the performance database including unavailable intervals within the selected date and time range are displayed except the S User user selected seconds filter Reporting performance data For S Use only those intervals with at least one parameter exceeding the specified thresholds are shown This in a data field Means dots No data is available for that time interval N A The circuit element does not support that type of data collection dis Collection of performance data in the slot was disabled for the period displayed AS2000 and ConnecT1 Plus only 12 The bar chart is displayed If intervals of data are missing in the selected 24 hour interval they appear as a solid block in the line below the time axis If the vertical bar appears below the time axis it indicates there is no data after that time If an asterisk appears at the top of a bar of data it indicates the data is greater than the top of the chart Steps 13 through 15 deal with editing the performance data filter options 13 If you wish to change the options by which you analyze the selected circuit element including changing the Y axis of the bar chart or if you want to print selected data press F8 The
214. e not stored in the Performance Database The performance records are stored in one of three following registers e User Network side User Performance Data Registers These registers are ES UAS BES SES LOFC and ES L The SEFS register is included if the circuit element is a 551 VST type User Registers also include OOFS e Additional Additional Network side User Performance Data Registers Only AS2000 type nodes have these registers The registers are LOFS LOSS RAIS AISS BERS and OOFS e EQP Equipment side User Performance Data Registers Only AS2000 type nodes have these registers The registers are ES UAS ES L OOFS DTED and DBER Access Manager 2000 User Manual 7 3 Analyzing Performance Data 7 4 Move the cursor to Use Additional or EQPT and press Enter The Choose Filter for Performance Data screen appears Choose filter for performance data LC eehaoee display error event data without filter HCDS DDS ENDS CSCPCP MCPCP LCPCP TCOCO ococo FCOCO ACPCP P User S User Bar Chart 24 Hours Graphical Display Error Free 95 0 Availability 99 77 Error Free 99 5 Availability 99 9 CP to CO Error Free 98 75 Availability 99 925 SHORT CP to CP Error Free 97 4 Availability 99 7 MED CP to CP Error Free 97 14 Availability 99 7 LONG CP to CP Error Free 96 8 Availability 99 7 SHORT CO to CO Error Free 99 9 Availability 99 85 MED CO to CO Error Free 99 6 Availability 99 85 LONG CO to
215. e test signal This can be done in one of the following ways e A specific time interval in xx SEC xx MIN xx HR up to 24 or FOREVER e To apply the test signal toward the network type N Access Manager 2000 User Manual 8 55 Monitoring and Troubleshooting Access Manager e To apply the test signal toward the equipment type E e Test from Far End shouldbe Y if you want the far end CSU to send the test signal or N if you wish the near end CSU to send the test signal In either case the CSU must be an NCC 2020 CCC 1020 or TAC e Press CF5 to accept the selected values The test begins when you type Y at the warning prompt whereupon the test signal is applied in the chosen direction and any errors detected by the NCC CCC or TAC are counted and recorded After the test begins the CSU Status results will be displayed for every test pattern option as in the screen below CSU Test Status of SIGMAL 1 011 Test 1 in 8 to Network Elapsed Time 68 00 68 Looped NONE Time Remaining 60 00 60 Errors 812655 Conditions LOS LOF OOF CRC BPU BER Exceeded UAS Exceeded ESL Exceeded ES Exceeded Yellow Alarm Press FZ to return to previous menu Y Y Y Y N Y Y N N N 6 If you are not using a loopback to return the test signal to the transmitting CSU repeat Steps 1 through 4 for the second CSU far end using the same test pattern After both CSUs are transmitting synchronize both CSUs
216. e type of node being used See the following figures to see which menu should appear for your type of module 5 56 Access Manager 2000 User Manual Configuration Menus of 4016 List 1 and List 2 CSUs Configuring circuit elements e Figure 5 7 Configuration 551VST List 2 Menu on pag e5 45 e Figure 5 8 Configuration 551VST ML List 2 Menu on page 5 46 e Figure 5 9 Configuration AS2000 Menu on page 5 46 4 Select the List option When the parent node is a551VST ML List 1 or List 2 and Access Manager has configured none of its CSU circuit elements then the first time you access these circuit elements they are all shown with 4016 List 2 options because the true type of CSUs are not yet known For example consider a 4016 List 1 CSU installed in a 551VST ML shelf and accessed through the Data Link When you configure the circuit element the first time the option menu for a 4016 List 2 is displayed After you press E5 to confirm the configuration with the Installed and Operational and Enable Remote Configuration options as YES a connection is made to the far end node and the 4016 List 1 identification is retrieved through the Data Link When the CSU returns a 4016 List 1 identification it is configured as a 4016 List 1 and not a 4016 List 2 Since the CSU identification is now stored in the database any future access to this circuit element s configuration displays the correct 4016 List 1 options
217. ead by both the carrier telco and end user but they can be reset only by the carrier In communications a physical or logical path allowing the transmission of information to flow from point to point Access Manager 2000 Manual A 3 A 4 Term Definition Channel Service Unit Circuit Circuit Configuration Circuit Element Circuit Name Clear Clock Code Violation Line Code Violation Path Connector CRC 6 CRC 6 Error Event The portion of the NCC or TAC that performs CSU functions such as line framing and coding conversions alarm transcoding performance data storage and processing alarm reporting and circuit loopback and test signal application operations A circuit consists of any two network circuit elements and the interconnecting T1 facility that have Access Manager 2000 access in a T1 network A set of circuit element attributes describing the locations of nodes and equipment in a circuit A circuit element is a single module of the parent node to which Access Manager 2000 is connected If the parent node is a multiline module such as an AS2000 type a circuit element is one of the plug ins in one of shelves controlled by the node it is identified by the parent node s Node Name and a shelf slot index The shelf index is identical to the shelf address set during the hardware installation The name for a circuit supplied by a user of Access Manager 2000 1 To reset the auto a
218. ear on your screen Error Message Cause Corrective Action Invalid USE on Primary Path Invalid USE on Secondary Path You selected a Use type other than NONE SEN or BAKU Go to the Use field and verify that each alarm path has a value of eithe NONE SEN or BAQU Invalid Device specified on Primary Path Invalid Device specified on Secondary Path You selected a Device Type other than DIREC MODEM STAT MUX or X 25 PA Go to the Device Type field and verify that each alarm path has a value of eithe DIREC MODEM STAT MUX or X 25 PA At least one SEND path must be specified A BACKUP path has been selected with no existing SEND path If you want to use a backup path go to the Use field and see which alarm path you ve labeled BAGU Change the other alarm path s Use field to SEN Primary and Auxiliary device types must be the same Two different device types were selected Goto the Device Type field and verify that both alarm paths are either MODEM STAT MUX or X 25 PA Time format must be 1 59 SEC 1 59 MIN 1 24 HR e The Retry Interval is not in the proper format or e The Wait Interval is notin the proper format Go to the Retry Interval and Wait Interval fields Verify the following The time unit is abbreviated correctly The number is appropriate to the time unit For example you haven t entered 27 HRS BACKUP unreach
219. ected to it 4 14 Access Manager 2000 User Manual Configuring the site Access Manager 2000 supports 1 to 16 comlines operating at the following rates Comlines operating at Support these connections 1200 baud e direct e ComDesign Multiplexer modem 2400 baud modem 9600 baud e direct e multiplexer e modem NCC 2020 controller only e X 25PAD NCC 2020 controller only The following are supported if no handshake protocol is used Leased line circuits using full time modems This configuration is specified as DIRECT under the Access Arrangement option a Circuits that are direct connected using short haul modems operating at 9600 baud LEE Note Before defining a Comline in the Access Manager database make sure the printed circuit board with the serial port s is installed in your personal computer Refer to AppendixD Installing Serial Ports for instructions on installing a standard serial board or DigiBoard DigiCHANNEL board in your Personal Computer Access Manager 2000 User Manual 4 15 Configuring Access Manager 4 16 The database is shipped with only COM installed The following screen shows the default definition for COM1 on an IBM PC PS 2 or 100 IBM compatible Add Comline Definition Comline name 6 Port addr ii iki Sees IRQ number ssssssssssssse Baud Rate e ee eee Access arrangement Shared 1 0 status port addr Shared
220. ed to the Access Manager computer always uses the normal PC function keys Function keys The lt F1 gt through lt F10 gt function keys are used to select and or activate specific operations in Access Manager If you are running peANYWHERE the function keys are not available 3 6 Access Manager 2000 User Manual Table 3 1 Function key definitions in PC mode Key lt F1 gt Meaning Help Basics Definition Pressing CF1 displays the on line help screen for Function Key Definitions It provides help specific to the terminal mode PC or VT100 you are currently in lt F2 gt Previous screen Pressing F2 returns you to the previous scree from which you selected the current option It also aborts any data entry you may have made while currently in the Data Monitor scre EZD lt F3 gt Main menu Pressing CF3 returns you to the Main Menu from any point in the program except when pressed from a screen expecting keyboard responses lt F4 gt Auto Ack Manual Ack Pressing toggles between the manual an automatic alarm acknowledge modes In the automatic acknowledge mode the messag AUTO ACK ALARM flashes in the top center block In the monochrome mode the words are highlighted an do not flash NOTE When no user is logged in the alarm mode is automatic and reverts to the mode selected in the Installation menu as soon as a user logs in lt F5 gt Accept update Pressing CE5 s
221. ee 6 100 Ej Percentage available 6 140 8 Thresholds are minimum req d over time date range Enter to disable a specific threshold check Press F5 to accept thresholds entered Press FZ to return to previous menu Enter the desired percentage of error free seconds and percent availability threshold settings and press CF5 to accept the thresholds If you only want to inspect one of these thresholds enter Access Manager 2000 User Manual a zero to disable either threshold check Reporting performance data 5 If you choose S Use_ the Choose Filter Selection Logic screen appears Choose Filter selection logic select if ANY selected thresholds are exceeded And select if ALL selected thresholds are exceeded Press ft or ist char Enter to select Esc to cancel Select from one of the two choices on this screen e Select a logical OR function so that the filter logic is met if any of the thresholds are exceeded per interval e Select a logical AND function so that all selected thresholds must be met or exceeded before the data meets the filter logic for each interval The Select Maximum Threshold s screen appears Select maximum threshold s Errored sSeconds ceeeee08 Bursty Errored seconds Severely Err d SecsS 00 e Unavailable seconds Loss of Frame Counts Errored seconds line Severely errored frame seconds 1 9
222. eeeceeceseseaeeseesseesaeeaeenaes 5 45 Configuration 551 VST ML List 2 Menu cece eeeseceseeseceeceseeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeneeaeesaes 5 46 Configuration AS2000 Menu o oo eeeseeseeeeeeeeeeeseeeeseesseeseecaecsaecaecaceseesseeseensees 5 46 SSIV ST List A Options Menu vrse rni a ae pi e seS eT AOE EOS eves 5 59 551VST List1 B CSU Options Menu oe eeeesecssesseceeceseceeeeeeeeeeeseseeeeeeeeaes 5 59 SSIVST List 2 CSU Options Menus seisin i i E ER iS 5 60 NMC L with 4016 L2 CSU Options Menu ssssesessesssseseseesrerrsreerssreresreresreserrrsreresee 5 60 Typical NCC or TAC configuration option Menu s e ssesseseeseesseeesssreresreresreeesrrereresse 5 76 Loopback Enable Sub menu sssssssssssseeesssssesrssreesrerseersresrsresrerrsreresrenesensreeesrnsenesseerss 5 89 DIU 2130 0Opton Meni ie ee aS A RI E E RSS 5 92 DIU 2140 Option Menu siie n E a E e per EE i aS 5 98 Typical 24 Hour Performance Data Bar Chart essesessseeseeseserersseerrsrssrsresrerrrreseersreee 7 12 DIU 2140 loopback v 12 tess ectecetins A E shee eh dee anes nena eee 8 50 Figure 8 2 Applying a TI test signals oserei e odes RE RN E E EEE NE NE Figure E 1 Circuit Element Detail Menu no data available 0 ccceecccccssecesenceceseeeeeesseeeseeeeees Figure E 2 Circuit Element Detail Menu slot disabled 0 cccceccccesecsesceeeseeeceenneecnseeeesseeeenenee xiv Access Manager 2000 User Manual Table 2 1 Table 2 2 Table 2 3 Table 3 1 Table 3 2 Table 3 3 Table 3 4 Ta
223. eeeeeeeeeeees 5 20 Node configuration options for older equipment eee eee cee ceeeeeeeeeeeneeseesaeenees 5 22 Node Configuration Option for newer eqUIPMENE ee eee ete ceteeeeceeeeeeeeeeeees 5 22 Configuration options for 551 VST type CSUS eee eeseeeeecseeeeecaeesaeceesaeeneenaes 5 61 Older CSU Circuit Elements BER Alarm Rest Times eeeeceeeereeeeeeeenees 5 65 Newer CSU Circuit Elements BER Alarm Reset Times 00 eee ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 5 65 Repeater Loopback Time out Options ee eeesesseeseceeceeceeeeeeecseeseesaecseceseeseeetees 5 66 Model Names for AS2000 and ConnecT1 Plus CSUs and DSUs eee 5 71 DIU 2130 and Data Port Handshaking Signals ee eee eeeeeeeeeeeeecaeeeneenaeeaes 5 97 Types of performance registers cece cseeeeceseeeeceseeeeceseseaecseecseceaecaecsaeeaeeneensees 8 28 Modem Configuration for OSI Protocol DTR Lead 0 eee ceeceececeseeeneecereeeneeeeneens B 3 Modem Configuration for OSI Protocol without DTR Lead eee eeteeeeees B 4 Modem Configuration for TABS Protocol 0 ec eeeecseeeeseeseecreeeseceeceseceeeseeerenseeeeeees B 6 Terse Alarm Message Layout 0 eceieceeeceeesesecsseesecesceseceseeseseeseseseneeseeenessaeeaeenaes C 2 SSIUV ST Eist 2 Status Codes a r ee eean ia e sashes A Ee S S SEES C 4 NC E Stats Codes a8 nie si cag ee ee aie Reine C 4 SIM Stats COMES oriens EEE EAE EER E EN EE E EE ERS C 5 NMC List 2 Status Godes snene igs eee haa eed he tiie one iy C 6 AS2000 Near End Network S
224. eeeeeseaeeseseaecaeeeaessaeeaees 1 13 Username SCHOEN se fesse resne e ease ae eS ena S NKEA OTE ES EEEE E N EES EESE ONSE Enant 3 2 Basic display on host PC sierveren a E aS E E Ee 3 3 Function key display at host PO mrna a a E E Aae 3 4 Escape key sequence display at VT100 terminal ssesesseseeeeeesseesrsererrererrersserersrrresee 3 4 On line Help screen host PC mode eee eeeesecseseseeeeeeeceeceeeeceeeesaeceaeecsaeeeneeeenees 3 13 Utilities Menu for a LEVEL User 0 ceeeeceseeeeceseeeeeeseeeaecaeeeaecaesaeeeensees 4 26 Review System Events Menu Level 1 User 0 ceeseecesesceeeeeeeseceeeeceeecnaeeeeeecsees 4 27 SIM node2 inne a ditain Balch iat ate Sea A E as 5 3 NCTE NOG secre EATE EEE EEEE NE E EE E EEEE EE 5 3 551 VST MEL List node sei a E E Sees ee e aod 5 3 SJIVS EME LISt2 Hode nene ea E T E E A A leeeoepsinaeenees 5 4 Configuration Menu eisien e p eevee a ee desea 5 10 How to connect the Access Manager PC and the node ssseseseseeeseeerererrreerrreeen 5 17 Application using modems oo eee esse ceeseeseceseeeeceseeeeceseeseseaeseeecaessaecaaesaecseesaees 5 25 Application using a stat MUX device ooo eee cteeeeeeeceeeeeeceseeeeeeseecaecaaecaecaaesaeesaenaes 5 25 Application using X 25 PADS oo eeeseseseeseceeeeceeceeceseeseseeeeeseaeeseeeaecaaeeaeseaeeaees 5 26 Access Manager s view of the node wo eeeeesecsseesecsseesecesceeceseeseseeeeeeseaeeaeeeaes 5 37 Configuration 551 VST List 2 Menu ou eee ee cseeeeceseeeecesc
225. eeees D 5 Installing a DigiCHANNEL PC 4 PC 8 or PC 16 and Editing A Comline i D 8 APPENDIX E Archive File Formats cccceccccssecssecseecseesseessaeeseeseessaeeseesaeseaeesaaes E 1 Eyent LOS sentene in a a e E E R E 1 Event Log ID Number Codes s s sssssseeeesssessrsesesseesesreresresrsteserrensrrrssenrssreesrererreeene E 1 Alam Archive Record Layout Log meisies eie E E a SEES E 3 Performance Data Log Performance Database essesssesssesessssssesesresressrssressrssrrsressees E 10 Performance Data Log Records renier iesiri ii e a as E 12 Access Manager 2000 User Manual xi xii Access Manager 2000 User Manual Figure 1 1 Figure 1 2 Figure 1 3 Figure 1 4 Figure 1 5 Figure 3 1 Figure 3 2 Figure 3 3 Figure 3 4 Figure 3 5 Figure 3 6 Figure 3 7 Figure 5 1 Figure 5 2 Figure 5 3 Figure 5 4 Figure 5 1 Figure 5 2 Figure 5 3 Figure 5 4 Figure 5 5 Figure 5 6 Figure 5 7 Figure 5 8 Figure 5 9 Figure 5 10 Figure 5 11 Figure 5 12 Figure 5 13 Figure 5 14 Figure 5 15 Figure 5 16 Figure 5 17 Figure 7 1 Figure 8 1 List of Figures Access Manager 2000 set Up irsinin conne aei e Ee a E ESS 1 1 DSI Network Elements psss eee oeii a au aSa O RERS 1 4 Typical AS2000 Multiline Configuration eee ceeceseeeeceseeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeseneeeeeeas 1 7 Access Manager 2000 Main Menu ou cece ccesseesecesceeceseeeeecseesacaececeeeeeeeeeeaeenaes 1 11 Access Manager 2000 menu tree oo eee eeeceecseeseceecesecesceee
226. eees 6 9 Printing Inactive alarmi Snine a de lvageateds E R TS 6 10 Archiving inactive alarms e ssseesesssseserstsrsreeresrssesrssrrrtsrerrereeresrsesesserrrsrerenreetes 6 11 CHAPTER 7 Analyzing Performance Data ccccceseeeeeeeeeeceeeeeaeeeeeeeeseaeeeseaeeseeneetaas 7 1 Effect of Changing a Node Name oneen cosets e E E A aS N 7 2 Reporting performance data 2 0 eeeecsessssecseeecereceeceeseeeeecesaecececeaeeenaeceeeecseeeeaeenseeeaeeeeees 7 2 Archiving petformance data l pesta re e enpe ea aa E EE OaE tear shearers 7 15 Data Log record format seseeseseesseseesessersreersesrsrrsertererrrseeresrenrsrrnterrsserenserersreet 7 16 Printing reports and deleting the data 0 ee eesescesceceeceeeceeeeeseceneeceeeecaeeeeeecnees 7 17 Copying reports to disk and deleting the data cece cseeneecneceteeseeesees 7 18 Deleting records without archiving the data oo eseeesecseecsecnseeseesseeseens 7 19 CHAPTER 8 Monitoring and Troubleshooting Access Manager cccccceeeeeeeeteeeeeees 8 1 Selecting a node cto thee BR ies Sain et ee eae Ge ey 8 1 Selecting multiline circuit elements 0 eee eseeeeeeeceseeeeceseeesecseecaecsaesaeceaeeaeseseeaeees 8 4 Displaying circuit element status in a node wool e eee eee eee cee ceseeeeecaeceseeseeeeeeeeeseeeeeeneenaes 8 5 SHELL GY Pes sce cdeisceieeeccleustiutesee toate shee E SR EE tees aed Abenseeibebee vepesd ares tatoagten 8 7 Configuration symbols 0 eseeceeeeceeceeeeeec
227. eeesaeeeneees 1 18 Element Configuration and Status Element Element Status 1 19 Circuit Status Diagram oo eee eee eeeeeeceeeseecseesaecaecsaececnseeeeensees 1 19 WSer StatiStics iii ieetenis ech Atti ic ae ees atte 1 19 Telco Statistics 5 cto tied SR agin ei ee 1 19 Access Manager 2000 User Manual Reset User Registers wis ese nr E e E E Sian EE E ETEA 1 19 Performance Data Retrieve kanse eria ia 1 19 Barchart Display erens a EE E T 1 19 LOOpbacks v eai T nk beanie ee anid ene 1 20 Select Test ve s hin dea dined WA ail ee AEA eh Re beens 1 20 Database ACCESS Arraia na e a aae a Ee Ea iR 1 20 Report oh e denn Hid ae E T end 1 20 PLCHIVE i vcseeveed oe n ERRE E OA ONR 1 20 CHAPTER 2 Installing Access Manager cc ccccceeeeseeeeeeeeceneeeeaeeeeeeeeseaeeeseaaeseeeeeeeas 2 1 Equipment Installation ssec a E E E E ET E EEEE 2 1 Minimum System Requirements s e ssseseeeeessseeeeesseeresrerrrtestrresrrrrssenrssenresreeesreetne 2 1 Hard disk storage considerations eseesseseeseeseeseeeeeeseeseereeseerereserseresessee 2 2 Software Msta O aee raea a eeaeee a e E N TEA A ae a eaS Eaa a OEE ESS 2 4 Installing a new Access Manager system eessssseeesssseeesereseesseereseerrrrrserresrrereseee 2 5 Verifying the CONFIG SYS file gerentnennnmanienn nie 2 5 Updating an existing Access Manager system s ss sseesesesreeesrestrersrrerrsrerrsreerrrersene 2 7 Creating a batch file for automatic s
228. eenaeenes 5 83 Enable EQP Side B82 scccss i secdesess ess kick rebcn cia dateben cutee ube ae ich suk EE neh S EEEO deca 5 83 Regenerate CRE 6 fo FQP o iaeiei cszetsSavetseoscivsessgnesvevsdotebs Eas oo SEESE REEE S 5 83 Enable Yellow Alarm Transcode to EQP u ccccesscesssesesceeesseceseneecseeeeessteeesenaees 5 84 Signal to NET n EQP Errors eiis ee To E E EE es 5 84 Signal to NET n EQP LOP oiii a a e ae A e r cases TE EES Sri 5 84 EQP RCV Receive Jitter BUF Buffer 40 Bits 0 0 ccc ceessecesteeeeeeeeeees 5 85 Enable EQP OOF Transparency oo eee eeecceesecseessececeseceeceseeseeeseeeeseseeneeeaeeees 5 85 Network LBO coer eenaa e E EEE E ESEE SEEE TEE 5 85 NET Density Enforcement 000 0 ee ceeeesseceeeeseceecesececeseeeeeeseeeeeeseseeeeaaseaeenee 5 86 NET Keep Alive nirna steeper iaa a E aa oa aE EEEE eas EEEE oka ri 5 86 NET Framing Format sentan ener ae e Ea O E neces tenes ES 5 86 Enable NET B8Z8 rana E E E E E T eee 5 87 Regenerate CRC 6 to NET oo ccsceeeseceseeecesceseceseeseeeeeeseseaeeseseaessaeeaeenaesaes 5 87 Enable YEL Yellow Alarm Transcode to NET cccccessscecesseceseeeeesseeeeeneees 5 87 Signal to EQP on NET Errors ooo cece esceeeeeeeeeeeeecneesaecaeesaecaecsaecneesseeseensees 5 87 Signal to EQP on NET LOR oeren e aree Eer EErEE EEE E EEEE TES E 5 88 Signal to EQP on NET LOS merien aeaee eaa ae KETE Eei 5 88 NET RCV Jitter BUF 40 Bits o ccsscccscsecsceicssscessbei aah sc sdiseicessstaseeudbetos
229. eesceeceeeceeeeeeseeeeeeeeneeaes B 1 Modem Configuration Commands oo ee eeceeeceeseeeeceeeeecseesaecseesaececsseensensees B 2 Modem Initialization by CSU or Controller oo cece eecseeeecseessecnseeseeneensees B 2 OSI Compatible Equipment 0 cee ceeseeceecseessecsseesececesecesseeeeeeeseeeeseeeseeeens B 2 TABS Protocol Conti euration 10 2563 eset enie Mek ecstean ea i eee todo ideas B 5 APPENDIX C Alarm Report Record Format 0 0 0 0 eee cess reser eeeeeeeseseaeeaeeeaeeas C 1 Alarm Record Layout 0 cee a a a aa a a a na C 1 Plain English Alarm Notification eseeeeesssssseesesssesesserresesresterrsseeresrsrrstesesrrnrerreseeresenresrent C 1 Terse Alarm Notification nessico aee rE e E EEEN E IE EEE C 1 Access Manager 2000 User Manual The Status Codes Tables innana besides BR eh ed RE i De C 2 Accumaster Status Code Format 200 0 ceeeecseceeceseceeceseeeeeeseeeeeeseseaeeseeeaesaaeeaees C 2 APPENDIX D Installing Serial Ports cccseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeneeseceeesaeeeeaeeeees D 1 Standard PC or PS 2 Serial Port Settings oo eee eeeceseeeeceeeeeeceeeeeeecaeeesecseesaecaeeaes D 1 Installing a DigiCHANNEL MC 4 or MC 8 and Editing a Comline eee D 3 Preparations alii ctanclatisca eh eee ote eae A RE D 3 Hardware Installation ineen a eb aii a ven tesageae EEEE D 4 PS 2 Configuration 0 52st aig ie MA a ei MEA ie the D 4 Configuring Access Manager to use the MC 4 or MC 8 occ eeeceteeeee
230. eessesssssesreererresrsereees 8 47 Activate Framed ALL ONEs Signal To Network 0 0 0 eee eee eee 8 47 Deactivate Framed ALL ONEs Signal To Network 0 eee eee 8 48 Send LLB or PLB Activate Message to Far End T1 403 eee 8 48 Send LLB or PLB Deactivate Message to Far End T1 403 eee 8 48 Activating Deactivating DIU loopbackS oo eee eeeeceseeeecesecesceeceseeeseseaeeneseeeeneesaenes 8 48 Loopback descriptions 2 0 eee eceseeeceeeseesceeecesceeeeeeeeeseneeseecseesaecaecsaecseseseeeensees 8 48 DIU 2130 and DIU 1130 loopbacks ooo eee cee ceeeeeeeeecneeeaeenees 8 49 DIU 2140 loopbackS c cici ce hssieecbesnceises See cbettcoevectentencunestvacesctesnensosenens 8 49 Procedure for loOpbacks emissies eirese ir kot reisk niaro sepsi E 8 50 Testin CSUS r r e o Ni eaves She sels E AEE Se AE E E eee 8 52 Pes tne D A OE AE EEEE A EATE 8 59 Sendinga test signal oerset ueni ee rier iei eiei 8 59 APPENDIX A Key Acronyms and Terms noonnnennennneenaennsnnsennsnnnnnsnnnsnnsrnnnnsnnnrnnsrnnnnsenne A 1 APPENDIX B Modem Configuration 0 ccccceceeeeeeeeeeeseeeeceeeeesaaaeeseneeseeeeeeaeeneneeenaas B 1 OSI Protocol Configuration sesseeseseseseeseessessesrsrsstesesesreressertsrertsresestesreesrenestnsenesrseses et B 1 Modem Configuration for OSI Protocol With DTR Lead 0 ee eee B 1 Modem Configuration for OSI Protocol Without DTR Lead oes B 1 Hayes Smartmodem 2400 Configuration 0 ieee esescese
231. egenerate CRC to NET Side option This option determines whether the framing format on the EQP side of the CSU circuit element is ESF or SF The default setting is NO SF framing If the EQP uses ESE set this option to YES This option on the equipment EQP is functionally equivalent to the Enable YEL Transcode to Network option above except it is for transcoding yellow alarms toward the EQP If the far end CSU EQP side is also SF the Enable YEL Transcode to EQP option should be set to NO because the yellow alarm is carried in the payload When set to NO this option sets the ESF Data Link idle code to ALL ONEs When this option is set to YES the Data Link idle code is FLAGS The default is NO 5 70 Access Manager 2000 User Manual Configuration Options for AS2000 and ConnecTI Plus CAUTION Set this option to YES only if the CSUs at BOTH ENDS of the circuit have this option available Otherwise set this option to NO After making your selection of CSU options the selected circuit element configuration options can be updated individually by pressing CF5 Or the entire selected range of elements can be updated automatically by pressing Configuration Options for AS2000 and ConnecT1 Plus Elements ConnecT1 Plus dual line hardware is a low cost implementation of the AS2000 firmware software specification The maximum configuration for a single node is 4 dual line shelves Because of the similarity in the user interface w
232. elect Esc to cancel If instead of getting this menu you get a message that there is no detail data you cannot analyze the performance data There are three possible reasons for this message a The circuit elements associated with the selected node location route or circuit have no data that meets the filter s minimum criterion That is a circuit element is only listed for further analysis if it has a percentage of availability and percentage of error free seconds less than or equal to the minimum of the filter a The circuit elements associated with the selected node location route or circuit are not configured No data was collected by Access Manager for one or more of the following reasons e Access Manager was not operating during the time period selected e Polling was disabled for the time period selected e The Installed and Operational option in the selected node and or circuit elements are set to NO e The Retrieve Performance Data option for the circuit elements associated with the selected node location route or circuit are set to NO 7 10 Access Manager 2000 User Manual Reporting performance data From this screen select the circuit element to be viewed for detailed data See Step 13 for the options Steps 10 through 12 deal with choosing performance data filters A distinction is made between the bar chart analysis option and other performance data filters 10 One of two screens will ap
233. els 4 channels x 64 kbps per channel 256 kbps bandwidth for DS1 transmission There are three types of channels Contiguous The channel assignments are in numerical sequence for example Port 1 1 3 Port 2 14 17 and so on for the ports of other DIUs used with the same CSU Contiguous channel assignments allow the DIU 2130 and DIU 1130 to interface properly with AT amp T Accunet bundled DSO applications Access Manager 2000 User Manual 5 93 Configuring the T1 Network Alternate Alternate channels are those which are assigned to a port where every other channel carries user data and the channel before and channel after are unassigned The DIU fills each 8 bit word of the unassigned channel slots with at least two ONEs as outlined in AT amp T TR 62421 For example Port 1 1 3 and Port 2 6 8 10 Alternate channel assignments allow the DIU 2130 and DIU 1130 to properly interface with the AT amp T Accunet bundled DSO applications when unrestricted zeros applications are required and B8ZS is not available Random The random channels are those which are not assigned in either a contiguous or alternate sequence Some carriers allow users to create bundled DSO applications with channels assigned in any order they choose i e random channel assignments To assign DSO channels 1 Atthe Port Channel Assignment Port 2 Channel Assignment lines of the DIU 2130 and DIU 1130 Option Menus press the key The TZ Allocation s
234. eneee 3 14 Alam MESSASES rr raa ereere a Ore a EEE Ee EEE E EEE O S ap Eea Ne N ERER AE o EEAS 3 14 Getting started with Access Manager sessesseeesesssssesrsresrereererrssesresrerrsrertsrenrerrsreersseeese 3 14 Access Manager 2000 User Manual iti Starting the On Site Access Manager 0 0 ce eceeseceecesceseceeceeeseeeeeeseneeseeeneesaeeaees 3 14 TSG SB ING OD EAE EEANN ENERETT EERTE EEE EEES EEEE EE E E EEE EEEE 3 16 Starting the Remote Access Manager eeeesesseeeeeeeesseeessreereresrrrrsserrsseerrereerereereses 3 17 Making a selection ernn e E AAE R a a 3 18 Entering information into the screens e sssseeessesssessesssrsererererreeresenrerrsserreereerses 3 18 Lotri OLE a ee a ee ate eee esi iea EE a E E abuse aaRS EE a tec 3 19 Exiting Access Manager eeceesesecssesecsecsseeecesceseceseeeeseeeeeeesecseecaeesaecasenaeenees 3 19 CHAPTER 4 Configuring Access Manager ccccceeeeeeseeceeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeseeeeseaeeeseeeeeaes 4 1 Configuration procedure OVELVICW cece eeseceeecesseeseeeeceeceseeeeecaecseesaesaeceeceseeeseaeeneesaeeaes 4 1 Configuration tasks cranna e ae e EEE r RA E EEAS 4 1 Utilities M nu sise i eos ocysetippeugbardises satan Sevbeteente iyseeeectiaeesens 4 1 Setting the date and time oo e i e e EEEE E e O o EEES 4 2 Conti suring The Ste e on r Er a EE Epea N aa AE EE E OSAR SEERNES EEI EESE 4 3 Differentiating the Site mennene ne e E e EE a N i 4 3 Configuring the report printer sen
235. ent AS28808 Options for DIU 2140 Edit Shelf 1 PLUG 2 1 13 Select Mode EQP Name 1 DS B 2 19 2 38 3 DS A 4 19 2 FEC 5 19 2 19 2 8 Press ft 4 number or ESC Each mode determines which data ports are to be used The total aggregate data rate for each DIU 2140 cannot exceed 48 kbps Set the DIU 2140 mode to one of the following then press its corresponding number key to select the setting and return to the DIU 2140 Options Menu DSOB 19 2 3S Access Manager 2000 User Manual This mode allows subrate data to be transmitted on all five ports of the DIU In the DSOB transmission mode each port operates at 0 3 0 6 1 2 2 4 4 8 or 9 6 kbps or the five ports may operate in any combination of these rates The signals are multiplexed into one data signal and transmitted over the DS1 network on the assigned DSO channel slot After selecting DSOB mode also set the data rate individually for each data port See Baud Rate on page 5 101 Use this mode to transmit 19 2 kbps data on Port and subrate data of 9 6 kbps or less on Ports 2 3 and 4 When this option is chosen the data rate for Port 1 is automatically entered as 19 2 kbps in the BAUD RATE column and the rates for the other ports must be specified individually in Baud Rate on pa ge5 101 Also data Port 5 of the DIU is not available for use if this mode is chosen The DSOB channels are assigned as follows DSOA 19 2 FEC 1
236. entages of available and error free seconds plus other Telco performance data for the selected CSU and far end CSU Reset User Registers This command allows you to reset the user performance registers and error event registers in both the near end and far end CSUs Performance Data Retrieve These commands allow you to obtain the 1 hour or 24 hour DS1 performance data stored in a CSU or its associated far end CSU You can view either the User data or the Telco data If the CSU is an AS2000 type then EQPT data as well as extra network registers are available Barchart Display This menu option displays performance data in bar chart format for the current 24 hour period Bar chart displays for historic performance data are available through Database Access Access Manager 2000 User Manual 1 19 Access Manager Overview Database Access Loopbacks This command allows you to activate or deactivate a loopback at the near end or far end CSU send an inband loop up or loop down code to the far end CSU or activate or deactivate an ALL ONESs test signal to the far end CSU Loopbacks can help you isolate circuit troubles to either the DS1 network or the CSU at either end For Access System 2000 and ConnecT1 Plus nodes the loopback command also lets you activate and deactivate CSU loopbacks with ANSI T1 403 compatible command messages Select Test This command is available only when interfacing with an Access System 2000 or ConnecT
237. ents see e eee ee eens Press F5 to save definition F8 for access arrangement list e Ifno other Comlines were previously defined COM1 appears as the Comline name in this screen If other Comlines were previously defined the screen shows the next highest available Comline COM2 through COM 16 as appropriate CAUTION If Access Manager 2000 is accessed remotely by Accumaster or a remote terminal COM1 is the remote access port It must be configured in the host PC setup of ppANYWHERE III It is not configured in the database Therefore when using Access Manager in a remote access mode assign COM2 and successive comline from Access Manager as described in the following paragraphs and delete COM1 from the database Note The Comlines must be added in consecutive numeric orderIf a Comline name greater than COM16 is used the message COMLINE NAME MUST BE COMx where x is 1 to 16 appears Access Manager 2000 User Manual 4 17 Configuring Access Manager 4 18 The following data entry fields appear in the Add Comline Definition screen Field Name Comline name Meaning The Comline name can be COM1 through COM16 No other values are accepted by Access Manager Port Addr This is the port address of the serial interface Refer to the manual supplied with your computer or to Appe ndixD Installing Serial Ports for this address IRQ Number The IRQ number is the interrupt request number
238. ents Circuit revise circuit definitions Route revise route definitions Press f or ist char Enter to select Esc to cancel 5 54 Access Manager 2000 User Manual Configuring circuit elements 2 From this screen select Element The screen labeled Edit Element Select Parent Node now appears EDIT ELEMENT Select Parent Node Node Name Location Equipment Type NEW YORK SALES VERILINK HQ AS 2060 SEATTLE SALES VERILINK HQ 551UST LIST 2 Press Home End PgUp PgDn t or to browse Enter to select Esc to cancel If this menu has no nodes listed it means that no nodes have been configured yet 3 Select the parent node If it is an AS2000 node a screen listing configuration actions appears Configuration AS28080 Plug yas select shelf and PLUG range Edit edit circuit element definition Delete delete circuit element definition Vieu view circuit element definition List print circuit element definitions Confg display ASZ2 8 configuration Press t or ist char Enter to select Esc to cancel 4 Select the Delete option The screen labeled Select Shelf and Plug Range for Delete appears The menu will look very similar to this Select Shelf and PLUG range Shelf number From PLUG number 1 To PLUG number zZ Press F5 when selections are completed Access Manager 2000 User Manual 5 55 Configuring the T1 Network 5 Enter the range and press CF5 This saves the information to the dat
239. enu type L toselect Print All Circuit Definitions and the circuit definitions will be printed Configuring routes Although screens have been created for connecting circuits by configuring routes routes have not been implemented in Access Manager software Therefore we have removed any references to routes from this manual Access Manager 2000 User Manual 5 107 Configuring the T1 Network CSU acceptance testing Before performing the CSU acceptance tests from an Access Manager 2000 PC verify the following E E E E The Access Manager 2000 PC is powered up started and ready for operation The Access System 2000 node definitions are already entered in the Access Manager 2000 database The CSU of each NCC or TAC to be tested is configured If the Access Manager 2000 PC interfaces with the Access System 2000 over a modem or multiplexer the node to be tested has already been auto configured for modem or multiplexer communication To perform the CSU acceptance tests from an Access Manager 2000 PC proceed with the following steps Note These tests use the CSU repeater loopback RLB function The J 2 J 3 J4 RLB remains active until the operator defined time out period ends For test purposes you can temporarily change this interval from an Access Manager 2000 PC The default RLB time out setting is one minute Start up the Access Manager 2000 PC and log in by entering the proper user name an
240. eported are clear conditions 10 Plug in number 9 i e slot number 11 Node or Circuit Element type 26 551VST List 2 33 NC E 32 SIM 24 NMC List 2 E 4 Access Manager 2000 User Manual Alarm Archive Record Layout Log Field No Description 12 13 27 Alarm bit 0 See the alarm bit description for your specific type of equipment in the following tables Table E 4 551VST List 2 Alarm Bit Definition on p ageE 6 Table E 5 NC E Alarm Bit Definition on pa geE 7 Table E 6 NC E Alarm Bit Definition 2 on pageE 7 Table E 7 NC E Alarm Bit Definition 3 on pageE 8 Table E 8 SIM Alarm Bit Definition on pageE 8 Table E 9 NC E Alarm Bit Definition 2 on pageE 9 Table E 10 NMC List 2 Alarm Bit Definition 1 on pageE 9 Alarm bits 1 through 15 or Status Codes 28 Node Name 29 33 Not used Table E 3 Alarm Archive Record Layout for AS2000 and ConnecT1 Plus Field No Description 1 Year last two digits 2 Month 3 Day 4 Hour 5 Minutes 6 Seconds 7 Circuit element name i e node name shelf slot 8 Node ID number 9 Shelf number 10 Plug in number 9 i e slot number Access Manager 2000 User Manual E 5 Field No Description 11 Node or Circuit Element type 48 NCC 49 TAC 56 CCC 12 Alarm numbers 13 Node Name 14 33 Not used
241. er Manual Basics Figure 3 2 Basic display on host PC Shows current node when in On line Access or alarm mode i b manual or automatic Configuration mode where Access Manager is located y number of current automatically acknowledged alarm logged in user name and access level MANUAL ACK Alarm Site Current Node NOT YET DEFINED number of active alarm program revision level j Date Time VERINET Date and time by TEES system clock Thu 1 23 92 10 55 26 2 3 DIE main function key definition in reverse video Access Level Current User 4 TAYLOR Fi Help F2 Previous F3 Main Menu F4 Alarm Mode F9 Log OFF F1i Shut Doun Differences in displays when in VT100 mode The personal computer and VT100 display the same information on their respective screens with the following exceptions a Operating Access Manager locally on the personal computer results in the display showing all commands as function keys F1 to F10 This is shown in Figure 3 3 Function key display at host PC on page 3 4 Access Manager 2000 User Manual 3 3 Using Access Manager Figure 3 3 Function key display at host PC Main Menu Utilities revise administrative data Alarm status review acknowledged alarms Configuration revise system configuration tables Online access performance data inquiry and testing Database access stored performance data analysi
242. er has logged the performance data of the DS1 circuits it is monitoring It also manages the analysis with viewing and printing archiving and deletion of these records Monitoring and Troubleshooting Access Manager Provides a reference for the On line branch of the Access Manag er2000 menu On line includes accessing circuit elements for their current status and configuration Performance data which is held in registers of the circuit elements but not yet stored in performance data records Chapter 8 can be viewed printed and reset Circuit testing options including loopbacks are controlled through the features in On line Key Acronyms and Terms This section provides a list of the key data communications acronyms and terms used in T1 service Modem Configuration Describes the dial up modem configuration required for operation Alarm Report Record Formats Describes the alarm report record format Installing Serial Ports Shows the installation of serial communication ports Archive Flle Formats Describes the performance data archive file formats XX Access Manager 2000 User Manual Summary of Access Manager changes For information about Access Manag er2000 not covered in this manual callVerilink Field Service 408 945 1199 Summary of Access Manager changes Following are the highlights of Revision 1 3 changes to Access Manager 2000 1 Access Manager 2000 packages have been renamed Old Name O
243. er to obtain periodic updates of the Access Manager 2000 software Please call Verilink s Technical Assistance Center TAC for details of the software maintenance contract Table of Contents Using This Manual senansa aaa eis etisalat eden nbn ete xvii Targeted AUdience sero eene A E e E A E E E EE xvii What s in this Manual sorreran e a E AE EE Ee xvii Chapter 1 iresi R E R R E E E E a i xviii Chapter 2 onin n E SA ei AS et ee E AS XIX Chapter g oer chases docs faut ae a aane eea e Aa e Secu sua cad eae Ea SHEO S ENS peoa XIX Chapter 4 2 tiivten lie eee Rd E EA XIX Chapter Decac cates Se aoleee e atch Vaheot A E E nae E E EA RAS XIX Chapter 6 2308 hein ee eis a SAG Be RS AE ia ie XIX Chapter eevee h sie ke A ETE descend EREE E A OE EEE EEE XX Chapter 822scc eke ie i ees es eas eg XX Append KA mersi tei E E E ERRE EEEE cobareen a E T TE XX Appendix Ban ee E eet hla neha Rh es ees A A XX PS PPOM 1x O EPEE ANEETA EEE E EESE E ETE E E E E XX Appendix Daa dd Seetioias eicies eda ties cece eae a oe een t ee sega deed eee XX Appendix E orrie aa E free eu ane Sone aenenanddevabenun sabe bimbens E S XX Summary of Access Manager changes 0 0 0 0 ceceeeceseeeseeeecseeeeecaeesaecsaesaeceeeeseceseeseeeeeeseeees xxi Conventions used in this QSuide sirsie nei ae esn e menan eere ae E ES EERE xxii The way text appears oiro i na e E EEA E A R A xxii Italicized and Bold Text nissenana n xxii Courier Bold Text ccs Ga a A E ee xxii Special
244. erely Errored Seconds LOFC Loss Of Frame Counts EQPT Data equipment user resettable parameters ES Errored Seconds UAS Unavailable Seconds ES L Errored Seconds Line OOFS Out Of Frame Seconds DTED EQPT Low Density Seconds DBER EQPT Bit Error Rate Alarm Second Additional Verilink defined Data network user resettable parameters OOFS Out Of Frame Seconds LOFS Loss Of Frame Seconds LOSS Loss Of Signal Seconds RAIS Remote Yellow Alarm Indication Second AISS Alarm Indication Signal Seconds BERS Bit Error Rate Second Access Manager 2000 User Manual 8 29 Monitoring and Troubleshooting Access Manager To access 551 type performance registers Accessing performance 1 From the On line Access submenu registers Element status Circuit status diag 1 Hour USER data 1 Hour TELCO data 24 Hour USER data 24 Hour TELCO data Bar chart USER IXC TELCO bar chart USER statistics TELCO statistics Reset USER registers Loopbacks On Line 551UST List 2 display display display display display display display display display display circuit element status circuit element status diag 1 hour USER performance data 1 hour TELCO performance data 24 hour USER performance data 24 hour TELCO performance data 24 hour USER performance data 24 hour TELCO performance data USER avail amp error free secs TELCO avail amp error free secs reset USER performance registers activate deactivate loopback modes
245. ermines if the Access Arrangement is DIRECT MODEM CALL ANSWER or COMDESIGN MUX When the AUTOCONFIG option is chosen the order of automatic configuration attempts is as follows e ComDesign Multiplexer at 9600 baud e Modem at 2400 baud e Modem at 1200 baud e Direct Connection at 9600 baud Default selection The automatic configuration procedure takes up to one minute If none of the options are successful the default is chosen 4 The failure to AUTOCONFIG could be caused by any of the following e Option setting on modem set incorrectly See Append ixB Modem Configuration for the proper modem settings e ComDesign Multiplexer port not configured correctly See the ComDesign manual for proper port configuration The port names assigned in the multiplexer must be the same as the names assigned in Access Manager e Access equipment ComDesign Multiplexer or modem not connected to host PC Connect the equipment and retry auto configuration Serial Device Serial output only connection with no flow control A Serial Device Comline sends alarm messages to a printer or to another computer using the Accumaster protocol Shared I O This data entry field is used for interface boards containing Status Port more than one serial port and using a shared I O status port Address and interrupt IRQ Appe ndixD Installing Serial Ports gives the correct shared I O status port addresses for each port number Shared
246. es and Shared I O Status Port Addresses may be used each port address is 8h above the previous port on the board CAUTION When adding Comline definitions make sure you add them in consecutive ascending Comline Name order COM1 COM2 COM3 etc and consecutive ascending port number port 1 port 2 port 3 etc If your computer has Digi CHANNEL MC 4 or MC 8 boards and if you add Comline definitions in any other order Access Manager may lock up your computer For example this may happen if you do not install port 1 as COM3 and then install port 3 as COM2 IF ANY OF THESE CONDITIONS EXIST YOUR COMPUTER MAY LOCK UP The following list may assist you in troubleshooting this problem Reboot your computer and restart Access Manager The database recovery process should delete the incorrect record and allow you to log onto Access Manager a Copy the COMLINE DAT and COMLINE KEY files from the original database disk and restart Access Manager If this does not clear the problem contact Verilink Field Service for assistance Current revisions of Access Manager have software to prevent the user from performing an incorrect installation for every other combination Table D 4 Serial Ports for DigiSCHANNEL MC 4 or MC 8 in Micro Channel IBM PS 2 Port No Comline Nam Port Addr IRQ basins Status Mask 1 COM2 DB80H 3H DBCOH 1H 2 COM3 DB88H 3H DBCOH 2H 3 COM4 DB90H 3H DBCOH 4H 4 COM5 DB98H 3H DBCOH
247. es the far end CSU if the near end slot holds a CSU circuit element ButFAR should be disregarded if the near end slot holds a DIU or a TIU Finally the first column to the right of the shelf number indicates the slot of the node s master controller an NCC 2020 or CCC 1020 The node s master controller must always be in Shelf 1 Slot 1 The near end Access System 2000 circuit element status is displayed with two letters shown in the SO1 through 13 columns The first letter identifies the type of circuit element Code Element Element Function s NCC 2020 Node Controller and Channel Service Unit CSU c TAC 2010 T1 Aggregate and Channel Service Unit CSU 8 10 Access Manager 2000 User Manual Displaying circuit element status in a node DIU 2130 High Speed Data Interface Unit TIU 2850 Timing Interface Unit DIU 2132 SMDS Data Interface Unit DIU 2140 Low Speed Data Interface Unit Codes are used to display the status of the different elements in each shelf They appear as the second letter in each slot s configuration line Code Condition and Meaning 0 Operational Alarm Enabled The equipment is installed configured and has not failed at the near end For a CSU or DIU it also indicates that alarm reporting is enabled For a far end circuit element it indicates that a T1 signal is being received e Ifthe O is green it indicates the element is not in alarm e Ifthe O is red it indicates the element
248. eseceseeseceseseceeeeseseeeeseseneeaes 5 105 Deleting a circuit definition oo eeceeeeeeeeecaeeceecaeesaecacsaecescnseceseeeeeeees 5 107 Viewing a Circuit definition oo neieiet 5 107 List all circuit defimitions 20 ee eeesssesccececeeeeesseceeeecueecaeeseeeecaeceeaeceeeeaeeeneees 5 107 COpfISULINg TOUTES viereesi ersero eere orne eeraa seier ene sapea EEES E ETSE ERES Ei EES E ESSEER ENES 5 107 CSUsacceptance testing isi hi isch ee Ea K rE E RE bine EE det 5 108 CHAPTER 6 Alarm reporting eeeeeeeeeeeeeereeiesreieerrtinsrrrinsrnrinsrnrinsrnntinsrnrinsrnnrrnne e 6 1 Clearing the autoacknowledged alarm counter 2 0 eeessesseeecesseceeeeceeecaeceeeecereeeneeeeees 6 1 DGactiVating al arms A eea ia e ae a rE A ET aE NEE aE E aia 6 2 Tagging Alarm Records for Deactivation 00 0 eeeseesceesceceseeececereeeseceeneeaeeeseeeeees 6 4 Selecting Alarm Records by Date and Time for Deactivation ce eeeeeeeeeeeees 6 5 VIEWING active alarms siro rioa t EE ER E oa ee eee Sa cep a 6 6 Lising active al arin moirininrnnennni ne a e a e a eaa 6 7 Printing alll alarms rrecn a E RE E E EEE 6 7 Access Manager 2000 User Manual Archiving Mactive alarms ccevsds ceesesgesceecssdeecueed sececescusvecescesdsessvsensesebavestuesebcovsbeewepveesssess 6 8 Alarm Log RECord LOrM ats ssseeckes scsseieeeresessensvst ance ssh etestevie soonest eereser ese 6 8 Deleting inactive alarms oo eee eseeseeesceeeeeeeeeeseeecseesaecseesaecsecsaecseenseeeeees
249. eseeeaeeseecaecaaecaecsaeaecseeseseeeeereeeees 8 7 oe LOL ANON A S 2000 MOE seere oeiee ee e ea a reee Ene asee E aa E 8 8 sastran AS 2000 nodenn ches eens ee ee eee 8 10 Displaying individual circuit element Status 0 cele ee ese ceee ce ceeeeeeceseesececeeceeeeseeeeees 8 13 Non AS2000 node eats cane he eens Sees eee pet E ete ad 8 13 Reviewing The Status iscci cecepeceeescesapapecceslsstasedesesvseusdvsesoyesraveusevgedepeveusets 8 15 AS 2000 NOE sos cee 8 Saar ede ENR ee ea ee dnl Se eee 8 17 ReViewint CS U status reisen n ean a E A EEES 8 20 Reviewing DIU status s ossioeosso eriet eronneen E e Enee iere 8 21 Reviewing TITUS tats sc s5 sss Sesecessocdeeg loch hesnes neei Sanse oE sse 8 22 Displaying Circuit Stats 2 eee cs eeeeseeseeeceseeseecaeessecaecsaecsecsaeesecseeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeseaeeeseaes 8 24 Displaying on line circuit element configuration ele eececeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeenees 8 26 Displaying Telco and User data 0 eceseecceeecsseseecsecssecaeceseeseceseeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeseneeeaeena 8 28 Accessing performance registers sirier sessu d esei isesi henospes einen eih 8 30 L hour data SCreens sroneisivierie eneee E S EE E a TES N ert enas 8 32 24 hour data screens aiana e E E E 8 32 Getting around in the screens esesssseeeeeeeesesressererrseerrsreresresrrrrsseereseee 8 33 Displaying 24 Hour Performance Data Bar Charts eeceseeesceeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeenees 8 33 Computing statistics iene eau Beenie ee E EAER 8 3
250. esired loopback by typing Y All loopbacks are enabled by default Figure 5 15 Loopback Enable Sub menu LOOPBACK ENABLE SUB MENU Enable LGB ecicoec irran eve era rae at Enable PLB ce sss cae ae ik wate wa Enable ELB ccc eee ee eee t Enable RLB 000000027 Enable LLB CT1 4 3 7 Enable PLB CT1 4 3 7 Press F5 to return to previous menu To allow the CSU to do any of the following Enable Testing Options Send or respond to inband loopback codes a Apply atest signal to a DS1 circuit when commanded by Access Manager via the On line Menu Apply atest signal to a DS1 circuit when commanded by local switch controls at the circuit element Execute the following steps 1 Setthe Enable Testing Options field to YES 2 Press to access the following screen INBAND LOOPBACK CODES and TEST SIGNALS SUB MENU Send Receive Inband Loop Code Send Test Signal eeeeee8 7 Y Framed Test Signal 7 Y Press F5 to return to the prvious menu 3 Select a framed or unframed test signal Setthe Enable Testing Options field to NO disabled to use external test equipment or prevent unauthorized circuit testing through the CSU Access Manager 2000 User Manual 5 89 Configuring the T1 Network DIU Data Bus Used The default for all testing options is YES Send Receive Inband Loop Cod This option allows the CSU to control loopbacks with inband
251. etion The view option of the Configuration Node screen lets you look at the node s configuration without changing the current settings To view a node definition without changing it 1 From the Configuration Node screen select the View option The Configuration menu will appear From the Configuration Menu select Revise Node Definitions by typing N The Configuration Node screen appears Type V to select the View Node Definition option The Select Node to View screen displays the Access Manager nodes the same as in the Select Node to Edit screen Use the directional keys to position the cursor at the node you wish to view Press to select that node The detailed node definition now appears If you re using a color monitor the text appears in red to show that no editing is allowed when in the viewing mode A single node and its circuit element definitions can be printed by using the Print option To print the nodes configuration settings 1 2 3 From the Configuration Menu select the Node option to go to the Configuration Node screen Select the Print Node Definitions option by typing P The Select Node to Print screen now shows the nodes in the same manner as the Select Node to Edit screen Use the directional keys to position the cursor at the node you wish to print Access Manager 2000 User Manual 5 43 Configuring the T1 Network Listing all nodes 4 Press the key to
252. etting To prevent unauthorized use of these switches select NO This setting disables the thumbwheel switches Until this release of Access Manager the node clock in the NCC2020 and NCC 1020 would be set from the PC running Access Manager whenever you configured a node Access Manager polled the node controller for performance data Now you can choose whether or not you want the clock set in either or both of these conditions This is especially helpful whenever two Access Managers in different time zones communicate with the same node In such an instance yov d probably want to give only one Access Manager the power to set the clock The two parameters which deal with this in the Node Definition menu are Set Node Clock When Configuring N Set Node Clock When Polling N Entering a Y will enable the feature Entering an N will disable it Access Manager 2000 User Manual Enabling firmware download Activating the node Adding a node Configuring nodes In AS2000 nodes the Enable Downline load Firmware option gives permission for an operator logged in with LEVEL4 access to download a new personality or features to the circuit elements in that node The actual code download is executed from the Utilities menu a To allow code download to the circuit elements in that node select YES a To prevent downloading to the node select NO default value After installing the
253. f menus reflect the functions of AS2000 and ConnecT1 Plus Nodes a The 551VST type menus reflect the functions of all other types of Nodes The various configurations for both of these types of nodes are described in Chapters 2 3 4 and 5 Chapters 6 through 8 provide reference operations and information Each of these chapters addresses one of Access Manager s five primary menus Utilities Configuration Alarm Status Database Access and On line Once you have started a procedure Chapter s4 and 5 use Chapters 5 through 9 for specific portions of the operation If you are not sure how to select an option go to the beginning of the operation in each section where the instructions will guide you from the Main Menu If you have never used Access Manager Chapter 1 Access Manager Overview furnishes you with a quick overview Access Manager Overview Describes an overview of the functions features and operation of Access Manager If you are a novice user take time to read this chapter xviii Access Manager 2000 User Manual Chapter 2 Chapter 3 Chapter 4 Chapter 5 Chapter 6 What s in this Manual Installing Access Manager Provides instructions for installing the Access Manager software on an IBM PC AT or 100 IBM compatible computer It also outlines the controller and peripheral equipment requirements for using Access Manager Using Access Manager Provides the instructions for performing various Acce
254. f the CSU The PLB therefore includes most of the CSU circuitry in the looped path Deactivate PLB This command deactivates a PLB in progress Activate EQPT Loopback ELB This loopback loops the CSU toward the EQPT just inside the input output transformers on the EQPT side As most of the CSU circuitry is bypassed by this loopback ELB is useful for testing theEQPT to CSU cabling Deactivate EQPT Loopback ELB and RLB This command deactivates an ELB or RLB in progress Activate Framed ALL ONEs Signal To Network This command causes framed ALL ONESs test signal to be transmitted to the network This signal can be used in conjunction with a far end LLB or PLB to do limited testing of the network and far end CSU An upgraded Access Manager 2000 User Manual 8 47 Monitoring and Troubleshooting Access Manager Le firmware revision in the CSU is required to use this feature If you hav an NCC 2020 or CCC 1020 and TAC 2010 orTAC 1010 this function is available from the On line Select Test Menu Deactivate Framed ALL ONEs SignalTo Network For 551 VST type CSUs this command deactivates the framed ALL ONEs test signal activated by the Activate option above Send LLB or PLB Activate Message to Far End T1 403 These options are available only for the NCC 2020 or CCC 1020 and TAC 2010 or TAC 1010 of Access System 2000 type nodes Each option activates an LLB or PLB at the far end NCC CCC orTAC by sending it an ANSI T1 403 compati
255. far Enabled end CSU status AIS Not Signal Yes AIS is sent to the non looped direction Loopback during a PLB LLB or ELB AIS Not ESS Yes AIS is used as a network keep alive signal Keep Alive BER threshold 6 The BER threshold is 10 Other options include INVALID DISABLED 4 5 6 7 8 and 9 INVALID indicates that an incorrect combination of hardware switches has been set Repeater Loopback 300 The permissible range for the RLB time out Time out is from 1 to 43 200 seconds PRM Performance No PRMs are not being sent If this status is Report Messages YES the PRMs are transmitted according Enabled to ANSI T1 403 1989 Framed All ONEs to No A framed All ONEs test signal is not being SPAN NET sent to the network The first YES indicates that an excess of ZEROs or a low average density is being received from the EQPT The second YES indicates that the CSU is receiving pulses from the NET Idle Code Flags No The ESF Data Link has an All ONEs idle code not an ANSI flags idle code Low Density Pulse No Out of Frame Yes No The signal from the EQPT is out of frame Access Manager 2000 User Manual while the NET signal is not out of frame LE AS2000 node Field Value Displaying individual circuit element status Meaning CRC Frm Bit Errors Yes No The framing bit error are being received from the EQPT while no CRC errors are being received from theNET For ESF framing YES indicates
256. far end is configured you must configure a circuit between the near end CSU and its far end CSU A circuit provides a path for all informational flow between the two CSUs It defines how the CSU will talk to the node and hence to the network manager Add a circuit between the near end From DS1 point and the farend To DS1 point Near end node Far end Node Name San Jose Node Name NYC Cc S U hp AY mpa 72 Access Manager 2000 Circuit A gt SAA Circuit B Circuit C C jc S S U 1 1 1 3 KEY Far end 2 4 shelf 2 slot 4 Node Name Chicago For both of these options you must enter the Node Name exactly as you first defined it character for character If you re dealing with multiline CSUs you must also select a shelf number and slot number For Circuit A From DS1 point San Jose 1 2 To DS1 point Chicago 1 1 For Circuit B From DS1 point San Jose 1 4 To DS1 point Chicago 1 3 For Circuit C From DS1 point San Jose 1 12 To DS1 point NYC 1 2 fa Download the far end CSU configuration built in Step 5 Menu used Main Configuration Element Edit T1 Network Monitoring Overview Now that you ve built a circuit with the help of the database place holder you created in Step 5 return to the far end CSU configuration screen and download the parameters you set DIUs If you are using an Access System CSU with DIU y
257. ff of 99 6 error free seconds and 99 85 availability Access Manager 2000 User Manual 75 Analyzing Performance Data 7 6 FCOCO Central Office to Central Office interoffice long circuit length greater than 1000 airline miles This filter performs a 24 hour data analysis based on the standard tariff of 99 3 error free seconds and 99 85 availability ACPCP Average Customer Office to Customer Office interoffice This filter performs a 24 hour data analysis based on the standard tariff of 96 5 error free seconds and 99 7 availability P User This filter allows you to set the filter thresholds as percentages of error free seconds and availability S User This filter allows you to define the thresholds in terms of seconds per 15 minute interval for ES UAS BES SES LOFC ES L SEFS and OOFS Only the register intervals that exceed the thresholds are displayed Bar Chart This additional option allows you to observe a graphic display of the performance data for the 24 hour period selected The data displayed depends on the hardware revision level of the CSU circuit element whose data is requested For AS2000 circuit elements the data displayed depends on the register set USER Additional etc selected 551 VST type hardware revisions 2 0 and earlier show only the ES UAS BES and SES data If you choose P Use the Select Minimum Threshold s screen appears Select minimum threshold s Percentage error fr
258. finish of polling etc a record is made and saved logged to database in Access Manager 2000 These events can then be viewed at a later time Extended Superframe Format an AT amp T imposed T1 framing standard that provides a frame synchronization cyclic redundancy check and checking data and link bits This standard allows errors to be stored and retrieved easily enhancing network maintenance The Extended Super frame framing format divides a 1 544 Mbps DS 1 line into four main sections and contains 24 frames 1 Traffic and signalling 1 536 Mbps Divided into 24 64 kbps channels in one frame 2 Framing 2 kbps 3 CRC 6 2 kbps See ESF Error Event 4 Facility Data Link 4 kbps See ESF Facility Data Link Access Manager 2000 Manual A 9 A 10 Term Definition F Failed Second Failed Signal State Far En FCC FDL FE FEC Forward Error Correction Frame Bit Error Frame Bit Errored Second Front end Processor FS FSS Full Duplex See Unavailable Seconds UAS A failed signal state is declared whenever 10 SESs occur consecutively The FSS will not clear until 10 consecutive seconds of data are processed with no SESs present New standards refer to a failed signal state as an Unavailable Signal State UASS This refers to a circuit element located at the remote end of a T1 circuit which may be accessed through the ESF Data Link to control and retrieve performanc
259. for values ofx and n 2 10 Access Manager 2000 User Manual Setting up the remote terminal Software Installation After making any changes to your start up batch file save the file and reboot your system Limitations a ProComm can operate in the color mode if the remote PC has a color graphics card and monitor a Due to the use of certain escape key combinations Crosstalk XVI cannot be used a If Access Manager is to be used from a remote VT100 terminal most of the time the AUTOEXEC BAT file should first start up pcANYWHERE and then start in VT100 mode a If Accumaster is being used the line SET xSTn must precede any command that automatically starts Access Manager in the AUTOEXEC BAT file This section describes how to set up a remote terminal and keyboard This requires the installation of ppANYWHERE pcANY WHERE is a remote access software program available from Dynamic Microprocessor Associates It lets you operate an IBM PC XT AT PS 2 or 100 IBM compatible from a DEC VT1000 or VT 1000 emulator at a remote location The remote PC or terminal operates as the monitor and keyboard for the local system You must install ppANYWHERE if Access Manager will be run with Accumaster ppANY WHERE permits the Accumaster operator to access and control Access Manager from the Accumaster console Proper operation of ppANY WHERE requires the following a ahost PC with a minimum 192K of system RAM 45K of RAM is used w
260. g hours and allocate database storage space Through Access Manager you can configure Verilink DS1 24 channels DSO single channel and subrate circuit elements for proper operating modes and for performance data collection Each circuit element is associated with a parent node which provides the interface to Access Manager These nodes may also be configured Access Manager maintains a database of the configuration of each node and its associated circuit elements This database includes the performance data collection for example alarm thresholds and reporting options the interface to Access Manager options and the DS1 for example line coding and framing format DSO and subrate operating characteristics options The configuration functions of Access Manager also allow you to define each circuit in the network for performance data analysis and testing for example signal output during loopback Access Manager allows you to download new architecture to any Access System 2000 circuit element New architecture may include feature or performance enhancements or changes to a circuit element s basic function Access Manager provides local and remote non disruptive status and performance monitoring of Extended Superframe ESF DS1 transmission circuits from a central site typically a hub office You can access any circuit element to retrieve current status and performance data You can also tell Access Manager when to poll the as
261. g nodes a SIM a NC E a Access System 2000 The node will auto dial Access Manager and report status changes if both of these conditions are met a the Enable Alarm Reporting option is set to YES and b the Alarm Path option is set to anything other than NONE or DIREC For all of the latest revisions of the above listed multiline nodes not the single line 551 VST List 2 if Alarm Path is set to NONE and Enable Status Change Reporting is YES these circuit elements will report all accumulated uncleared alarms to Access Manager when they are contacted by Access Manager either during on line access or scheduled polling Selecting options based on access arrangement To continue configuring the node you must view the following tables and select the appropriate data to enter into upcoming fields a Table 5 8 Older CSU Circuit Elements BER Alarm Rest Times a Table 5 9 Newer CSU Circuit Elements BER Alarm Reset Times Choose the table for your specific type of node Each column is an access arrangement type Determine which column applies to the node you are adding Enter the values in that column when you configure the node The access arrangement types listed in these tables are a Direct The node s network management port connects directly to a comline on the Access Manager host PC a Modem The node s network management port connects to a modem that receives calls from the Access Manager host PC and if ena
262. g the near end CSU circuit element 3 This completes the User Telco Statistics procedure Access Manager 2000 User Manual 8 37 Monitoring and Troubleshooting Access Manager Resetting User performance registers Use this sub menu to reset User registers The NCC CCC andTAC do not maintain CV L and CV P performance data registers To reset user performance registers 1 When you get the On line Access sub menu select Reset USER Registers The Select Registers to Reset screen appears Near end Near end Far Far Far Far end end end end Select Registers to Reset for Shelf 1 CSU 1 2 performance data ESF error events performance data ESF error events registers J register N registers N register N CU L error counter N CU P error counter N Press F5 to reset a single CSU or F6 for entire range Note Counters marked with are not supported by all equipment types 2 Enter Y for all those registers you wish to reset Enter N for those that should not be reset Near end Performance Data Registers Include User Additional AS2000 only and EQPT AS2000 only registers For AS2000 these are NET side ES UAS BES SES LOFC ES L SEFS and OOFS Included for AS2000 CSUs are NET side LOFS LOSS RAIS AISS and BERS and the EQPT side ES UAS ES L OOFS DTED and DBER registers Near end ESF Error Events Register The sum of the following error events CRC 6 errors and OOF events
263. ght orange plastic located in the middle of every CIM faceplate It can be connected to an external device such as a light bell or buzzer to provide a noticeable alarm when a loopback toward the net is activated or cleared Decide how long an alarm condition must persist before the CSU reports it to Access Manager 5 80 Access Manager 2000 User Manual Configuration Options for AS2000 and ConnecTI1 Plus Go the the Alarm Set Delay Time field and select the delay time in the range of 0 to 255 seconds The default value for the this option is 3 seconds 5 Decide how soon an alarm condition will clear Gotothe Alarm Clear Delay Timefield and select the delay time in the range of 0 to 255 seconds The default setting for the this option is 10 seconds 6 Decide how soon an LOF alarm will clear Go the the Alarm Clear Delay Time for LOF field and select the delay time before a loss of frame LOF alarm condition clears Choose a value in the range of 0 to 255 seconds The default is 10 seconds Set this option to one of the following Poll Far End Statu Option Description NO POLL At both ends to disable alarm polling Select this option the default when the nodes at both ends are connected to Access Manager and both nodes report local alarms Otherwise the same alarm is reported to Access Manager twice POLL To have the near end CSU automatically poll the far end CSU for alarms every four
264. haeesoseesiens 5 88 Data Link Idle Code Idle code Flags eee eeceecceneecsseeeceeseeeeneceeeceaeeeseeenees 5 88 Power up Near End Self Test cers ccsscccssssscccests ctestey caevecssesbnpesacs tates esstevevenssoqeteue sugees 5 88 Loopback Enable 1 icin ison Rea Re AA eR RAN Aen einen 5 88 Enable Testing Options esisiini irion ates cab aabdbes spesetbnenogeapcapectsbedeans 5 89 Send Receive Inband Loop Code oo eee ee ceecseeseeseceeceeeeeeseeeeneesaes 5 90 Send Test Signal cincti scvaeniey cavssesstatscessastaneeestactvses save hoes 5 90 Framed Test Signal mieis fies sees coh fests sconces Geko nteseenh chan eh de oE 5 90 DIU Data Bus OR s R E E E AET 5 90 DIU TIMNA ieii nr E e E EEE Mei a nee EE a eee 5 91 DIU 2130 and DIU 1 1 30 Configuration e sseeeesesssseeeseseeessrrersereresrsserrrsreersese 5 92 Installed and Operational e esseseeeeeeesseseeeesseesesetersreereersseresserresrenrsrensn 5 93 Enable Alarm Reporting s ssesssscsvecsss eoesnseoseevedbehsoveesseteoaensscenseosnes 5 93 Save Configuration to DIU eee eee eeeeeceeceseceeeeseeeeeeseseseeseeeneeaaesaes 5 93 Access Manager 2000 User Manual vii viii Connected CSU Shelf and Plug Numbers 0 0 0 0 cee ee ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 5 93 Channel Assignment cscs oresoao rnea e EEEE escusssaibed AERES EK OS 5 93 EQP Name a ea nathan eek Senin aati 5 95 FOP SER r t ea a EE R EA Sloat E E oes 5 95 EQP Interface saot nk eee hie AeA AS dA eds 5 95
265. hannel assignment 5 99 synchronous data interface 5 101 transmission mode 5 99 DIU 2140 8 19 DIU data bus assignment 5 90 DIU loopbacks 8 49 descriptions 8 48 DIU2140 8 49 DIU testing sending a test signal 8 59 Download APA 1 15 personality 1 15 Drop and insert 5 90 DTR Lead with B 1 DTR lead without B 1 E enable 5 90 enable EQP OOF transparency 5 85 enable remote configuration 5 77 enable testing options 5 89 EQP performance data 7 3 EQP framing 5 83 EQP side B8ZS encode decode 5 70 5 83 Equipment type 551VST ML Listl 5 3 Event Log 4 28 Event log E 1 F G Far end circuit element configuration 5 47 far end configuration 5 47 Field entries 3 18 Files README DOC 2 5 Framed test signals 8 55 framed 5 90 I J Inband codes enable 5 90 inband loop test 5 90 installed and operational 5 76 5 93 5 99 Keep alive network 5 86 L line or payload loopback 1 3 Loopback inband 5 67 loopback enable 5 88 Loopbacks activating the alarm relay 5 80 CSU options 8 46 deactivate T1 403 LLB or PLB 8 48 DIU enable 5 96 timing 8 43 8 50 8 52 see also Alarm conditions loss of signal 1 3 Menus add comline definition 4 17 choose filter for performance data 7 4 choose filter select logic 7 7 circuit element detail 7 11 description and organization 1 11 inactive alarm record choose archive option 6 8 installation Access Manager 4 3 main 3 17
266. he lt RETURN gt key to end the entry of one or more keystrokes The designation lt ENTER gt is used throughout this manual If a message appears on the screen it is fully capitalized as follows the message NOT YET DEFINED displays All program and data file names are fully capitalized as follows the USER KEY file is copied References to names of other chapters sections and menus are initial letter capitalized and italicized as follows refer to the On line Menu Access Manager 2000 User Manual XXV Additional reading The manuals listed provide detailed information on the Verilink single line and multiline DS1 T1 network systems with which Access Manager interfaces They can be ordered directly from Verilink Manual Book Titles 551VST List 1 CSU 551VST List 1 A CSU 551VST List 1 B CSU 551VST List 2 CSU Part Number 880 500501 001 880 500501 001 880 500993 001 880 501558 001 551VST MLB MLE List 1 NMS 551VST MLB MLE List 2 NMS 4016 R User s Manual Shelf Interface Module SIM 880 500543 001 880 500969 001 880 501713 001 880 501048 001 Network Controller Expansion NC E Shelf NCC 2020 and TAC 2010 DIU 2130 High Speed Data Interface Unit DIU 2140 Subrate Data Interface Unit 880 500987 001 880 501522 001 880 501520 001 880 501519 001 Access System 2000 Installation and Maintenance Access System 2000 Local Operations The Book on ESF Verilin
267. hen pcANY WHERE is left resident ahost modem a aremote modem and aremote terminal or a PC running terminal emulator software to control the host PC 1 All references to ppeANY WHERE III throughout this document are generically called pcANYWHERE Access Manager 2000 User Manual 2 11 Installing Access Manager For detailed information on the installation or operation of pcANYWHERE refer to the manual supplied with it Additional default setting information regarding use with Access Manager is given in this section To install ppANYWHERE in a host PC 1 Install ppANYWHERE onto the host PC hard disk into the same directory where Access Manager was installed Typically this directory is named AM2000 2 Copy pcANYWHERE files from the program diskettes into that directory as explained in the ppAN YWHERE user s manual The following ppANY WHERE III parameters settings should be used when configuring the host PC pcANYWHERE z Parameter Setting Baud rate The baud rate setting depends on the modem type in use This setting can range from 50 to 57600 baud or it can be set to Auto baud Access Manager works at 1200 and 9600 bau with a modem or if direct connect up to 19200 baud The DEC VT100 default setting is 300 baud Com Port Alway COM Connect type There are 3 connection options Direct Connect Automatic Modem or Manual Modem with the following limitations e For Direct Connect do not use
268. ield Basics For example the Main Menu shown below provides access to five other menus Alarm status Configuration Online access Database access Press f 4 or ist Main Menu revise administrative data review acknowledged alarms revise system configuration tables performance data inquiry and testing stored performance data analysis char Enter to select Esc to cancel If you select the Utilities option the Utilities Menu appears Every field which calls for a choice shows the default or chosen option on the right When the available options are few the options may be enclosed in parentheses after the field text and before the option area on the right From month From day 81 thru 12 CBL thru 3D From year 4 digits From hour lt 00 thru 23 minute 15 30 45 Enter date fime range for report Press F5 to accept range entered Press FZ to return to previous menu option entry area TS To month lt 81 thru 12 1 shave 1 To day 01 thru 31 gt 1 eee 1980 To year 4 digits 2050 Wise toe i To hour lt 00 thru 23 gt oe To minute CBA 15 30 45 gt When multiple options are available for a field the field s text will usually be followed by an or instructions at the bottom of the screen will tell you to use to display options When you press 8 a list of options will appear superimposed on
269. ifying the CONFIG SYS file For Access Manager to run you must havea CONFIG SYS file which satisfies two requirements It must Access Manager 2000 User Manual 2 5 Installing Access Manager reside in the root directory of your hard disk s boot drive normally drive C and contain the following lines FILES 24 This command line sets the maximum number of files that can be open at one time The minimum number required for Access Manager is 24 but the number can be larger if required by other programs BUFFERS 20 This command line sets the number of disk buffers DOS allocates in memory when it starts The minimum number required by Access Manager is 20 but this number can be greater if needed by other programs Ifa CONFIG SYS file did not exist in the install drive directory then the one from the database disk was copied to it However if the install drive for example drive D is not the same as the boot drive normally drive C you ll need to determine whether or not the boot drive has an appropriate CONFIG SYS file The following instructions assume that your host PC boots from the C drive If the boot drive letter is other than C use that letter in place of C in the steps below To determine whether the boot drive has an appropriate CONFIG SYS file 1 Atthe DOS C gt prompt type CD and press Enter 2 Atthe C gt prompt type CONFIG SYS and press Enter a If DOS return
270. iguration for TABS Protocol on page B 6 Be careful if you enter commands after you have completed the Smartmodem configuration Any subsequent commands at a different baud rate may override the 2400 baud speed selection The last command entered and stored with amp W determines the speed at which the Smartmodem initially answers an incoming call Note This configuration does not apply to CSUs and Controllers in the OSI Mode It is for use only with non OSI Protocol CSUs or Controllers To properly initialize the modem after it is configured powered up and connected to the CSU or Controller the CSU or Controller should be powered down for a few seconds and then powered up again This will allow the CSU or Controller to initialize the modem and configure itself The following devices operate with the configuration shown in Table B 1 Modem Configuration for OSI Protocol DTR Lead on page B 3 a NC E B 2 Access Manager 2000 User Manual OSI Protocol Configuration a SIM a Current 551VST ML List 2 with List 2 MLB shelf or upgraded List 1 shelf and NMC List 2 Controller a Current 551 VST List 2 a Access System 2000 a ConnecT1 Plus a 551VST List 2 without DTR lead hardware revision 0 0 as displayed by Access Manager a 551VST ML List 2 Controller with List 1 shelf without DTR lead Table B 1 Modem Configuration for OSI Protocol DTR Lead Parameter Sm
271. iguring nodes The following diagram shows you how what tasks are involved in configuring the node Node configuration option Node Name Node ID Location Equipment Type System Shelf Type Previous Node in Chain Query Path Type Query Path COMn phone or PORT Query Baud Rate Enable Thumbwheel Operation Enable Alarm Reporting Set Node Clock When Configuring Set Node Clock When Polling Enable Downline Load Firmware Node installed amp operational How the option lets you complete your task Lets you identify each node with a unique name and number Identifies the equipment type location shelf arrangement and node order in a daisy chain Lets you define the method Access Manager will use to open an informational path to the node Allows an operator to configure by using thumbwheel switches on the circuit elements Lets you define an alarm path from the node to Access Manager For Access System equipment yov ll be able to define alternate alarm paths Lets you choose when to set the node clock from the PC running Access Manager Lets you deny or allow an operator to use Access Manager to download firmware into circuit elements Lets you activate the node for operation in the network and with Access Manager Access Manager 2000 User Manual 5 13 Configuring the T1 Network Identifying the node Use this option for a 551VST List 2 with ASCII interface firmware The following
272. ine Alarm ___ Hour __ Quotas ___Comlines User Definitions Event Log L Code Download Date Time This option allows you to set the system date and time Installation This option allows you to define the system site name define the system printer s select the hour to start polling for performance data allocate database records for alarms event logs and performance data and define serial communications COM ports User Definitions This option allows you to specify user names passwords and access levels 1 14 Access Manager 2000 User Manual Alarm Status Access Manager 2000 Main Menu Event Log This option allows you to view print and archive system events such as user log in user log out time of scheduled data polling Access Manager start up shut down etc Code Download This option allows you to download new firmware code in order to update the element firmware or to provide custom applications to a circuit element NCC 2020 TAC 2010 DIU 2130 or DIU 2140 Only Verilink Access System 2000 modules have this Advanced Programmable Architecture APA feature APA is not available for anyother Verilink single line or multiline systems The Alarm Status Menu commands affect the active alarm counter and the alarm log database An active alarm is an alarm record in the log that has not been manually deactivated by the user and cannot be deleted or archived Alarms that are deactivated c
273. ine definitions e The current number of installed CSU circuit elements that is configured in the database as Installed and Operational e The maximum number of CSU circuit elements which your Access Manager Package permits to be installed If there is no restriction in the package this is shown as UNRESTRICTED The type of Access Manager package you have is shown last This can be AM2000 8 AM2000 24 or AM2000 1000 When the current number of records reaches the maximum allowed no new records will be added You may increase the maximum number of records allowed to prevent loss of data or you may choose to take some time to archive or delete the older data Adjust the maximum allowable record numbers as needed Select one of the following actions e To save the changes made press CE5 The changes are saved and the current records used counts are updated e To exit the menu without saving the changes press F2 If you do not increase the allocations you may reduce the records in use by saving them to another file using the Archive function A comline or communication line is a serial port on your computer It is used to transmit to or receive data from a network node or another computer through an Electronic Industries Association EIA standard RS232 interface When you assign a comline definition you specify what protocol or language the port will be using to communicate with any device conn
274. ing ppANY WHERE III type AN YWHEREAUTOMATIC Press Enter the program 4 To start Access Manager use one of the following commands If you are using a Type color monitor with a color adapter card AM2000 monochrome monitor with a monochrome adapter AM2000 BW card monochrome monitor with a color adapter card AM2000 BW After Access Manager is started the AM2000 Username screen appears and prompts you to enter a user name to log into Access Manager Access Manager 2008 Access Manager serial numbe e Serial Number NONE Copyright Verilink Corporation 1988 1989 1990 1991 1992 Enter Username input screen for user name Access Manager 2000 User Manual 3 15 Using Access Manager Br When Access Manager is shipped from Verilink the database has only one user name defined LEVEL4 LEVEL4 has an access level of four Now youre ready to log on To log on Logging on 3 16 1 Access Manager 2000 User Manual At the AM2000 Username screen you need to enter a user name If you still haven t typed a valid user name after three attempts Access Manager exits to DOS e If you are logging on to Access Manager for the first time type LEVEL4 and press Enter e If your system administrator has already set up user definitions in Access Manager type your user name up to 28 characters and press Enter After Access Manager accepts your user name a password entry sc
275. ing two Access Managers to manage the same node enter the same node configuration data in the Node Definition screen at both Access Managers Yes this creates a redundant information base The only deviation from this rule occurs when using modems operating at different baud rates This is explained in 3 2 When setting up alternate alarm paths to two different Access Managers you must make the same entries for Alarm Path Access Manager 2000 User Manual 5 37 Configuring the T1 Network 5 38 Definition at each Access Manager That way each network manager knows under what conditions it will be receiving alarms from a node When using modems always set the Baud Rate to the speed of the slowest modem in the path you re configuring To clarify let s refer to Figure 5 6 Access Manager s view of the node on page 5 37 The baud rate for the Query path from Modem A to Modem C would be 2400 This value is entered in the Node Definition screen at Access Manager 1 e The baud rate for the Query path from Modem B to Modem C would be 1200 This value is entered in the Node Definition screen at Access Manager 2 e The baud rate for the Alarm path from Modem C to Modem A Primary Alarm Path would be 2400 This value would be entered in the Alarm Path Definition screen at both Access Managers e The baud rate for the Alarm path from Modem C to Modem B Secondary Alarm Path would be 1200 This value wou
276. int and list node definitions The following subsections will show you how to arrive at the appropriate screens for the procedure you wish to execute All of the fields within each screen are described in the order they appear from top to bottom ee To do any node configuration you must first get to the Node Definition Getting to the screen Node Definition scree To access the Node Definition screen 1 From the Main Menu select Configuration This will take you to the Configuration Menu Configuration revise node definitions Element revise circuit elements Circuit revise circuit definitions Route revise route definitions Press f or ist char Enter to select Esc to cancel 5 10 Access Manager 2000 User Manual Identifies the acm Defines query pat Identifies the node For onfiguration by hardware switches Defines alarm path Activates node System Shelf TypeCs gt M Configuring nodes 2 From the Configuration Menu select Node This will take you to the menu labeled Co nfiguration Node Configuration Node GERM dd new node definition Edit edit node definition Delete delete node definition View view node definition Print print node definition List print all node definitions Press ft or ist char Enter to select Esc to cancel a If you are adding a node select Add This will take you directly to the Add Node Definition screen b If you are editing
277. interval plus up to the previous 96 intervals 24 hours Access Manager 2000 User Manual The percentage of available seconds is calculated by dividing the available seconds by the total seconds Computing statistics m The percentage of error free seconds is calculated by dividing error free seconds by available seconds The Telco Statistics display is the same as the User Statistics display except that the analysis is based on the performance data in the Telco registers rather than in the User registers To access User or Telco Statistics 1 When you get the On line Access screen select either USER Statistics or Telco Statistics 2 The CSU statistics screen appears AS2906 1 USER Performance Data Statistics CSU 1 CSU type AS28898 CSU element SIGMAL1 11 circuit NOT SPECIFIED ESF error events 65535 Number of valid intervals 96 Seconds in current interval 129 Total seconds 86529 Total errored seconds i Total failed seconds 86241 Available seconds 288 Available seconds percentage 8 33 Error Free seconds 288 Error Free seconds percentage 100 00 PgUp PREV CSU PgDn NEXT CSU lt FAR CSU NEAR CSU View all the CSUs in the range To access the previous or next CSU circuit element in the range you have selected use the Ctr Gaup and Ctrl Goo key combinations respectively To display the registers of a CSU at the far end via the ESF Data Link press after accessin
278. ion enable 5 64 repeater loopback time out 5 65 Span NET side ESF framing 5 69 transparent mode 5 67 yellow alarm transcode toward EQP 5 70 yellow alarm transcode toward NET 5 69 A B Access arrangement 4 19 5 20 direct connect 4 19 Index remote dial up 4 19 Access level 1 11 Access protection 1 11 Access Manager 4 1 functions 1 1 overview 1 1 updating 2 8 user interface connections 1 10 Access Manager 2000 Main menu tree 1 13 Access Manager Connections 4 20 Accumaster 2 15 direct connect 1 10 remote dial in answer port 1 10 remote dial up port 1 10 routing port 1 10 serial device 1 10 Access Manager Requirements pcANYWHERE 2 2 Access System 2000 single node configuration 1 6 1 8 Access System2000 5 102 query and alarm paths 5 15 Accessing a single line CSU 8 3 Accumaster 4 20 before starting 2 15 setup 4 11 4 17 4 20 setup alarm printer 2 15 setup time zone 2 14 status code format C 2 Activate framed ALL ONEs to network 8 47 activate T1 403 LLB or PLB 8 48 Active alarm 1 15 Additional performance data 7 3 affect of resetting registers 8 39 Alarm record layout C 1 Access Manager 2000 User Manual thresholds 7 6 Alarm conditions defining 5 78 to 5 81 turning on the alarm relay 5 80 Alarm conditions setting Alarm Clear Delay time 5 81 alarm delay time 5 81 alarm thresholds 5 79 to 5 80 interval counts 5 79 to 5 80 LOF Clear Delay time 5 81 NET
279. ion screen appears This menu sets the operating and reporting characteristics of the circuit element s of this node CAUTION A change to a node name is not carried over into any circuit or route definitions using the node For proper operation during database analysis any change in a node name should also be made in the appropriate circuit or route definition s 8 To return to node definition editing press CF2 Access Manager now disconnects the node and returns to the Select Node to Edit screen You can delete a node from the Access Manager database at any time Before deleting a node remove any alarm path reporting telephone number that has been configured Otherwise the node if physically installed still attempts to call in alarms To delete a node from the system 1 From the Configuration Menu type N to select the Node option The Configuration Node screen now appears 2 Type D toselect Delete Node Definition The Select Node to Delete screen now shows the Access Manager nodes in the same manner as the Select Node to Edit screen 3 Use the direction keys to position the cursor at the node you want to delete 4 Press to select the node You are now prompted to confirm that you want to delete the selected node 5 42 Access Manager 2000 User Manual Viewing a node definition Printing a node definition 3 Configuring nodes Type Y to delete the node or press any other key to abort the del
280. is applies to data collected from the nodes and circuit elements on a scheduled basis over short or long periods of time depending on how much data has been stored in the Access Manager database Access Manager 2000 User Manual 7 1 Analyzing Performance Data Effect of Changing a Node Name Node Name is missing When you change a node name with the Node Configuration screen this change will not automatically carry over into the circuit definitions Therefore a valid analysis of the performance records of circuits cannot be performed You must change the node name individually in each circuit If you don t you will have missing or invalid configuration data as shown below Select a Circuit Circuit Name From CE To CE ASCII TERMINAL B A ASCII TERMINAL B ASCII TERMINAL A MARKETING DEMO 1 1 TO 1 551U MLB MARKET 11 551U MLB MARKETE31 NCE TO SIM NCE W MODEMEZ 5 SIM FAR END 5 SIM TO SIM TEST SIM FAR END 4 t Press Home End PgUp PgDn t or to browse Enter to select Esc to Cancel Be careful when trying to correlate database analysis over extended intervals Changes to the node name and circuit definitions should be considered when setting the time and date ranges of the analysis Reporting performance data To report performance data 1 Starting from the Main Menu select Database Access The Database Access Performance Database Analysis screen appears 2 From this screen select Report
281. is in alarm Operational Alarm Disabled Element is operational with a disabled alarm reporting capability e Ifthe N is green it indicates the element is not in alarm e Ifthe N is red it indicates the element is in alarm Absent The module is physically absent from the shelf and is not configured If the incoming T1 signal is lost from a near end CSU the far end displays the element as absent Missing The element is configured in the Access Manager database but the module itself e is missing e has failed or e has a blown SV fuse Spare The element is present in a shelf but not configured in the Access Manager database as Installed and Operational Access Manager 2000 User Manual 8 11 Monitoring and Troubleshooting Access Manager 8 12 Code Condition and Meaning Undetermined The status of the element cannot be determined Either The node controller NCC 2020 in the shelf has e failed e blown a fuse e been powered down or e been removed so that the status of the elements in that particular shelf cannot be determined or The node controller does not recognize an element type identifier code The indicators that are red on a color monitor are shown as intensified white on a monochrome monitor The FAR column of the Access System 2000 configuration display shows the status of the associated far end circuit element ample ae igs an p The screen below shows a node consisting
282. is set to NONE alarms are reported to the PC while it is connected If the alarm path does not match alarm reports are not sent When Access Manager disconnects the stored alarms are reported to the proper Access Manager site When the node s alarm path is set to NONE alarms reports are accumulated until the node is accessed for its current status or configuration at which point the alarm reports are sent and the buffer is emptied Any PC accessing this node receives the alarm reports CAUTION Regardless of how you last set the node s alarm path if the accessing PC has in its database alarm path NONE you still ca receive and empty the node s alarm reports buffer Only the 551VST List 2 551VST ML List 2 SIM NC E and Access System 2000 nodes have the ability to perform automatic alarm reporting All other node types should have the Alarm Path option set to NONE The alarm path is the phone number PC communication port or multiplexer port for the alarm reporting port s connected to Access Manager It is downloaded to the node and used to access Access Manager to report alarms Specifying baud rate When defining a query path you must specify the baud rate of the device which accesses the node You can choose 1200 2400 or 9600 baud The default value is 9600 baud Access Manager 2000 User Manual 5 19 Configuring the T1 Network LE Enabling alarm reporting Specifics are given in Table 5 4 Selecting baud
283. isters for operator retrieval The time or angle that a data signal is delayed with respect to a reference point s See Payload Loopback See Parts per Million Access Manager 2000 Manual A 15 A 16 Term Definition Point to point A term used to describe a circuit that interconnects two points directly Port The point of access into a computer network or other electronic device Power Supply A power supply is the device which converts AC to DC or DC toa PAC PDC different DC voltage for use by the NCCs TACs DIUs etc Privileged A password that allows an ACSII terminal operator to perform network Password management functions on a Access System 2000 module Q R QRSS See Quasi Random Signal Sequence Quasi Random Signal Sequence RAI RAM Random Access Memory Read Only Memory Remote Alarm Indication Remote Alarm Indication Seconds Register One of four test patterns sent from the CSU It is used to diagnose problems with either equipment or the telco DS 1 line See Remote Alarm Indication See Random Access Memory A memory device whereby any location in memory can be written to or retrieved from with the same average speed RAM is usually measured in kilobytes A memory device which can only be read See Yellow Alarm The number of seconds during which a CSU is in Yellow Alarm The RAIS counts are stored by the NCCs and CSUs in Access System 2000 nodes A circuit in a CSU that stores a T1
284. ith Access Manager this section may use menu samples from either of the two products interchangeably Most software features are typical to both products Exceptions are noted as follows There are some nomenclature differences in the model names and numbers between the CSUs and DSUs of the two products These are summarized in the following table Table 5 11 Model Names for AS2000 and ConnecT1 Plus CSUs and DSUs Node Type CSU DSU AS2000 NCC 2020 DIU 2130 TAC 2010 DIU 2140 ConnecT1 Plus CCC 1020 DIU 1130 TAC 1010 Not applicable The DIU 2140 is unique to AS2000 hardware Otherwise each element in the AS2000 line has a functional counterpart in the ConnecT Plus line The ConnecT1 Plus functional counterpart to the AS2000 s NCC 2020 Channel Service Unit is the CCC 1020 and so forth Access Manager 2000 User Manual 5 71 Configuring the T1 Network The following section will reflect these similarities by showing the ConnecT1 Plus model name and number in parentheses for example NCC 2020 CCC 1020 Le Note APA Advanced Programmable Architecture provides Access Manager with the ability to download code to the CSU to update firmware or provide for special functions This feature is unique to the AS2000 hardware To get to the element configuration screen 1 From the Main Menu select Configuration Main Menu revise administrative data review acknowledged alarms revise system configuration
285. ition section above 4 Press CF5 to accept the changes or CF2 to cancel editing CAUTION If you edit a circuit or route with a changed node name that name must be updated before Access Manager will recognize the node and accept the changes to the circuit route definition 5 106 Access Manager 2000 User Manual Deleting a circuit definition Viewing a circuit definition List all circuit definitions Configuring routes A circuit can be deleted from the database at any time 1 In the Configuration Circuit screen type D to select Delete Circuit Definition The Select Circuit to Delete screen appears along with the first page of circuits 2 Use the directional keys to position the cursor on the circuit you want to delete 3 Press Enter You are asked to confirm that you want to delete the selected circuit by typing Y Any other response aborts the deletion You can view a circuit definition without changing it by selecting the View option 1 In the Configuration Circuit screen type V to select View Circuit Definition The Select Circuitto View screen appears along with the first page of circuits 2 Use the directional keys to position the cursor on the circuit you want to view 3 To display the detailed circuit definition press Enter A list of all circuit definitions can be printed using the List option 1 In the Main Menu type C to select the Configuration Circuit Menu 2 In that m
286. ivate a loopback on a CSU circuit element for DS1 circuit troubleshooting purposes Each CSU circuit element has loopbacks at four locations along the circuit path Activate Repeater Loopback RLB The repeater loopback RLB connects the CSU output signal back toward the equipment EQPT It loops the whole CSU except the CSU network input and output transformers toward the EQPT This loopback has a time out that automatically releases the loopback after the time selected This time out is programmable from Access Manager Activate Line Loopback LLB The line loopback LLB connects the incoming signal from the network NET back to the network at a point just after the CSU repeater It includes only the NET side repeater and the network side critical circuitry in the loopback 8 46 Access Manager 2000 User Manual Activating Deactivating CSU loopbacks Deactivate Network Loopback PLB or LLB This command deactivates the LLB or payload loopback PLB in the direction of the network Send Inband Loop Up Code To Far End This command causes the near end CSU to send the industry standard inband loop up code to the far end CSU Send Inband Loop Down Code To Far End This command allows the near end CSU to send an inband loop down code to the far end CSU Activate PLB This command causes the CSU to activate the PLB toward the network NET This loopback is performed just inside the input output transformers on the EQPT side o
287. ive Cutoff Date screen not the current date The archive process always creates files starting with extension 001 If you have performed previous alarm log archives with the same cutoff day the existing archive file s are overwritten if they are on the same disk drive and directory Refer to Appendix E Archive File Formats for the alarm archive record format The Delete option removes inactive i e deactivated alarm records from the database i e log without saving them If you wish to save the records before removing them from the database choose the Archive Inactive Alarms option instead To delete inactive alarms 1 Starting from the Main Menu select Alarm Status The Alarm Status Review Alarm Log Database appears 2 From this screen select Archive The Archive Inactive Alarms Choose Archive Option screen appears 3 From this screen select Delet The Select Archive Cutoff Date screen appears Select archive cutoff date Ending month CO1 thru 12 Ending day 61 thru 31 gt Ending year C4 digits Press F5 to accept date entered Press F2 to cancel archive 4 Enter the date of the last alarm record you want deleted 5 To delete the deactivated alarm reports in the selected range press 5 Or press CE2 to abort deletion 6 If you pressed CF5 a prompt appears asking you to confirm that you want to delete the selected alarm records Access Manager 2000 User Manual
288. k Corporation 880 501525 001 880 501531 001 AT amp T Publications 54016 54075 62411 ANSI Specifications T1M1 3 71 403 pcANYWHERE III Software Users Manual AT amp T Accumaster Manuals Access Manager 2000 User Manual Chapter 1 Access Manager Overview This chapter describes the functions and features of Acces sManage r2000 Functions Access Manager 2000 is an IBM PC based or 100 IBM compatible software program that allows you to perform numerous administrative operations on a DS1 T1 transmission network Figure 1 1 Access Manager 2000 set up illustrates how the host computer connects to the local devices which in turn are connected to the remote devices through a DS1 T1 network Figure 1 1 Access Manager 2000 set up Comlines to gt Local Devices Remote Devices Statistical Host PC Multiplexer pedis Access Manager Alarm Printer On line Printer Report Printer A Statistical Multiplexer keyboard monitor Access Manager 2000 User Manual 1 1 Access Manager Overview Network Configuring Status and Performance Monitoring Alarm and System Event Reporting You can set up Access Manager to meet your specific network needs For example you can edit the system date and time add users and passwords to the system define the Access Manager communication ports and data report printers and establish the performance data collection parameters i e define pollin
289. l jumper should be set to enable command recognition to configure the other options in the table After the configuration is complete power down the modem and set the internal jumper to disable command B 6 Access Manager 2000 User Manual Appendix C Alarm Report Record Format Alarm Record Layout The alarm processing logic in Access Manager 2000 allows you to send the alarm notification to a user specified alarm channel This alarm channel can be a serial port printer port or file You can specify alarm notification to be sent in plain English text verbose terse format ASCIl encoded binary or Accumaster Alarm format The terse version is designed to be processed by other computing equipment with all status changes for a circuit element packed into one notification message for alarm activated status and another notification message for alarm cleared status The plain English version sends one notification for each status change It is designed to be used with a printer and to be written to a disk file The Accumaster format is used to send alarms to the Accumaster Integrator system Plain English Alarm Notification Access Manager prints one alarm notification for each alarm condition The notification has the following general format mm dd yy hh mm ss lt alarm description gt at lt circuit element gt Terse Alarm Notification The layout of the terse alarm notifications is given in Table C 1 Terse Alarm Message
290. lculates the necessary timing Automatic configuration of the serial communication port to match the device connected to it Term used to describe either when Access Manager configures its COM ports or when a node configures its network management port Any second that is not a failed or unavailable second UAS See Bipolar Eight Zero Substitution In data transmission the reciprocal of the length in seconds of the shortest pulse used for instance a system whose shortest pulses are 1 300 second is operating at 300 baud See Bit Error Rate See Bit Error Rate Alarm Seconds See Bursty Errored Seconds A binary digit either zero or one The ratio of bits received in error to the total number of bits transmitted The time over which this rate is calculated is not inherent to the definition and can be separately specified For low error rates the Cyclic Redundancy Check CRC can be used to estimate the BER assuming that not more than one error will occur per ESF A count of one second intervals during which a bit error rate alarm existed Access Manager 2000 Manual Term Definition Bit Error Rate Threshold Bipolar Eight Zero Substitution Bipolar Violation Bipolar Violation Count Blue Alarm Signal Bps BPV Bursty Errored Second Byte C Cable Carrier Registers Channel A bit error rate BER level above in which a CSU alarm is generated and reported to Access Manager 2000 A physi
291. ld Capacity New Name New Capacity Performance 14 AM2000 8 8 Insight 40 AM2000 24 24 Signature unlimited AM2000 1000 unlimited 2 Option for enabling and disabling the update of NCC CCC real time clock when configuring the node or polling the node 3 X 25PAD Packet Assembler Disassembler support for NCCs with Revision 4 22 or higher firmware Verilink equipment has been tested extensively with the NET TX7000PAD 4 Support for 9600 baud modem which adhere to the Hayes command set For NCCs with Revision 4 22 or higher firmware 5 Alternate Alarm Path functionality for nodes Supported by assigning the Access Manager PC a Manager ID identifier in the Utilities Installation Site screen 6 In CSU configuration the PRM Performance Report Message option now supports SMDS Switched Multi megabit Data Service 7 Support for TACs LOS of External Clock alarm This is reflected in the Online Status Element and Online Circuit Status Diag screens 8 Access Manager will now track up to thirtee n DIU2130s Data Interface Units with tests in progress Access Manager 2000 User Manual xxi 9 Loss of Signal LOS is now supported in the configuration screen for each data port LOS can be programmed to occur on loss of DTR Data Terminal Ready or RTS Request To Send 10 Data port lead status is now reported to AM2000 from the Online Status Element and Online SelectTes View Test Status Results screens 11 The DIU 2140 is no
292. ld be entered in the Alarm Path Definition screen at both Access Managers The Node Name and Location fields are there to help the user not the system keep track For example Access Manager 1 could have aNode name of SMITH for Node 12 and Acce ssManag er 2 could have a Node name of JONES for Node 12 However minimize user confusion by using identical terms or abbreviations across network managers Conclusion to Adding a Node After you finish entering the required information for each node press CF5 to save the definitions If insufficient or invalid information was entered error messages tell you what to do in order to supply the correct information Access Manager 2000 User Manual Configuring nodes Node Access Failure If Access Manager returns a NO CIRCUITS AVAILABLE message or an Access Manager FAILED TO ESTABLISH CONNECTION TO THE NODE message try to access the node once more Verify that the node is configured to be Installed and Operational If Access Manager still fails to access the node refer to the following paragraphs Dial Up Connection If the node uses a dial up connection verify that the correct telephone number and Hayes modem protocol if required have been entered in the query path of the node definition and that the node modem answers Ifthe NO CIRCUITS AVAILABLE message appears Access Manager could not find an available modem to access the node Use the following steps to trou
293. lement Name is labelled with the node name shelf slot This section describes the interpretation of records in the Performance Data Log This interpretation is the same whether you are examining an archived log that has been saved to a file or a current log in the Circuit Elements Detail Screen called up through the Database Access Menu Figure E 1 Circuit Element Detail Menu no data available on page E 12 shows a typical Circuit Elements Detail Screen The following lines store the different types of information Lines 4 through 11 present Performance Data Log records one record per line see Tab leE 12 Database Archive Files Formats on page E 10 Each column presents different information see below Column 1 through 2 are presented as the Date and Time Column 3 is the circuit element s name Column 4 through 11 are the performance data registers for each 15 minute interval in the reporting time range Dots in the performance data register fields indicate that no data is available for that time interval Fig u reE 1 Circuit Element Detail Menu no data available on page E 12 Figure E 1 Circuit Element Detail Menu no data available Date Time 551UST 551UST 551UST 551UST 551UST 551UST 551UST 551UST 551UST 551UST Circuit Element Detail Circuit Element ES UAS BS SES LOFC ES L SEFS OOFS NNNNNNNN NBS Press Home End PgUp PgDn f or to browse Esc t
294. loop up and loop down codes If this option is disabled the CSU does not respond to inband loopback codes nor will it send inband loopback codes Send Test Signal This option allows the CSU to apply the desired test signal to the circuit If this option is disabled the CSU does not apply test signals when commanded by an operator Framed Test Signal This option allows the CSU to apply framed test signals to the circuit If this option is set to NO disabled the CSU applies only unframed test signals When the CSU is used with DIUs it interfaces with them through one or two of the three data buses on the Access System shelf backplane Press to see the available choices If the CSU is used with a noDIUs select NONE the default DIUs in applications without drop and insert assign data bus A B or C whichever is available WARNING If the TIU 2850 or TIU 1850 is installed in the shelf do not select C because C is dedicated to providing timing from the TIU to the shelf If the TAC is used with DIUs for drop and insert operation selec either D amp I NET or D amp I EQ depending on the desired direction for this operating mode If D amp I NET is chosen databus A is assigned If D amp I EQP is chosen data bus B is assigned 5 90 Access Manager 2000 User Manual DIU Timin Configuration Options for AS2000 and ConnecTI1 Plus DIUs must be synchronized to the CSU for proper operation To view the timing options pre
295. ly when you press CE5 to accept the configuration parameters You can specify different retry intervals for each alarm path The default value is 1 MIN for each path Access Manager will always attempt immediate delivery along an SEND alarm path However there are afew things to keep in mind If both your alarm paths are designated SEND the reality is that delivery is sequential The node will alternate which Access Manager it tries to contact if both lines are busy Also in this case the Retry Interval must be set to the same value If your alarm paths are designated SEND and BACKU respectively the node will retry the SEND alarm path until the number of specified attempts is exhausted Only then will it use the BACKUP alarm path Saving the alarm path parameters Once you ve set the parameters for each alarm path press CE5 This does some error checking to see if the parameters you ve selected are acceptable to the system If you ve made a mistake your screen will display an error message Take the corrective action indicated and try again Once this acceptance test is successful you ll be returned to the uncovered Node Definition screen At that point press 5 to download the configuration to the database 5 32 Access Manager 2000 User Manual Error messages Configuring nodes If you ve made an error in selecting your alarm path parameters one of the following error message will app
296. m carefully Instruction Symbol The International Instruction Symbol is used in the left margin of the manual pages to point out important operating and maintenance servicing instructions Warnings and Cautions particularly use this symbol Please read them Dangerous Voltage Symbol The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol within an equilateral triangle alerts the user to the presence of uninsulated dangerous voltage within an enclosure which may be large enough to constitute a risk of electric shock to persons Warnings and Cautions particularly use this symbol Please read them Warning Notices All Warning Notices indicate a possibility of severe injury loss of life or permanent equipment damage if the instructions are not followed Depending on the specific content Warning Notices may be offset by the Instruction or Dangerous Voltage symbol respectively A Warning Notice appears in the following example Access Manager 2000 User Manual xxiii xxiv TIP WARNING The DIU 2132 contains static sensitive circuits Before unpacking a DIU wear an anti static wrist strap connected to frame ground t prevent shock to yourself or damage to circuits from electrostatic discharge Caution Notices All Caution notices indicate a possibility of equipment damage if instructions are not followed Caution notices will be offset by the Instructions symbol A Caution Notice appears in the example below CAUTION
297. m the Revise Comline Definitions screen select Delete The Select Comline to Delete screen now appears 3 Highlight the comline to be deleted and press Enter A warning message with the Comline and system port number now appears asking you to confirm that you want to delete it WARNING If you are sure that you want to delete COM1 please press y Press any other key to cancel this request 4 Choose one of the following actions e To delete the displayed comline type Y e To cancel the request press any other key CAUTION With a PS 2 using DigiCHANNEL MC 4 or MC 8 boards Comline must be deleted in reverse order from the order in which they were installed The highest COM number on a board Port 4 for MC 4 an Port 8 for MC 8 must be deleted first and then 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Failure to remove the Comlines in the correct order prevents Access Manager from using any ports after the deleted ones 5 After a comline is deleted the system returns to the Select Comline to Delete screen so that you can delete more comlines 4 22 Access Manager 2000 User Manual Updating user definitions 6 When you have finished deleting comlines press CE2 to return to the previous menu Viewing comline definitions This option allows you to view how you have configured your comlines Use the same procedure as described earlier Editing a comline definition on pa ge4 21 except select View rather than Edi
298. menu CAUTION For all installations equipped with 551VST ML List 1 or List 2and 4016 List 1 or List 2 firmware upgrades must be performed to the NMC List 1 or List 2 Controller and the 4016 List 1 CSUs before attempting to remotely configure either of the following a 551VST ML List 1 or List 2 with NMC List 1 Controller with revision 2 3 or earlier firmware with near end 4016 List 2 For operation with Access Manage the NMC List 1 Controller must be upgraded to firmware revision 3 0 or later If 4016 List 1 CSUs are provided they must also be upgraded to firmware revision 2 4 or later Access Manager 2000 User Manual 5 57 Configuring the T1 Network a 551VST ML List 1 or List 2 with NMC List 1 Controller with revision 2 3 or earlier firmware with near end 4016 List 1 with revision 2 3 or earlier firmware and far end 551 VST List 1 B SS51VST List 2 4016 List 2 or 4016 R For operation with Access Manager the NMC List 1 Controller must be upgraded to firmware revision 3 0 or later The 4016 List 1 CSUs must also be upgraded to firmware revision 2 4 or later Configuration Options for 551VST Elements See the preceding Editing the Circuit Element Definitions section for the 551VST type CSU steps required to arrive at the Circuit Element Configuration Options Circuit Elements menus See the following figures for your module s menu Options Menu a Figure 5 10 S51VST List 1 A Options Menu on page 5 59 a Figure
299. mmand set at 1200 or 2400 baud a Remote dial in port This type of port can only answer dial in calls from network devices normally used with INWATS lines a Routing port The routing port is designed to connect to a routing multiplexer such as a ComDesign RS2000 Statistical Multiplexer Multiple network devices may be connected through this type of multiplexer a Serial device interface This is a serial output only port with no flow control Sends alarm messages to a printer or to another computer using the Accumaster protocol An optional external Hayes compatible modem uses the auto dial auto answer feature to automatically forward changes in the status or alarm conditions of the near end or far end CSUs to a central management site 1 10 Access Manager 2000 User Manual Access Levels Access Levels Appendix B Modem Configuration provides the modem configuration information Access Manager provides four levels of user access protection a Level 1 View data only a Level 2 Includes Level 1 capabilities plus limited non service affecting operational changes a Level 3 Includes Level 1 and 2 capabilities plus full maintenance control circuit element loopbacks testing etc a Level 4 Includes all preceding Level capabilities plus Access Manager system administration adding deleting users archiving database files setting passwords etc Access Manager 2000 Main Menu Access Manager is divided int
300. n highlighted by the current cursor position from a menu screen or accepts the value of data entered into a selected field If less than the maximum number of characters are entered in a field press complete the entry for that line and move the highlight to the next line The following four choices require the key to be pressed and held while pressing the second key The key is displayed on the Function Key Definition screen and many othe screens as lt Cirl gt lt PgDn gt lt Cirl gt lt PgUp gt lt Ctrl gt lt Left Arrow gt lt Ctrl gt lt Right Arrow gt Next Element Press the Ctrl Qana key combination to select the Previou Element Near End Far End next circuit element in a selected range This key name appears on the screen as lt Cirl gt lt PgDn gt Press the Gaua key combination to select the previous circuit element in the selected range This key name appears on the screen as lt Ctrl gt lt PgUp gt Press the key combination from the On line screens to select the near end CSU information This key name appears on the screen as lt Ctrl gt lt Right Arrow gt Near end Press the key combination from the On line screens to select the far end CSU information This key name appears on the screen as lt Ctrl gt lt Right Arrow gt Far end lt ESCAPE gt Access Manager 2000 User Manual Press the Tsg key to cancel data input requests on an operational basis and
301. n configured to enable downline loading You can check this in the Node Configuration menu The Enable Downline load Firmware option must be set to Y WARNING During download the circuit element reverts to its original firmware load before the new firmware load is completely downloaded Furthermore the circuit element is out of service for up to 6 seconds during download Therefore downloading should be scheduled as an out of service period Since reverting to the original firmware load in the CSU executes the same operation as a power up restart the performance registers in the CSU will be reset If you want to save the performance registers you should reconfigure the AM2000 to perform scheduled polling before downloading of the CSU is started To download firmware code to the CSU 1 Go to the Main Menu and select Utilities The Utilities Menu will appear Utilities edit system date and time Installation revise installation parameters User definitions revise authorized user list Event Log review system event log Code download download code to hardware Press t or ist char Enter to select Esc to cancel 4 34 Access Manager 2000 User Manual Downloading firmware to the nodes 2 Select the Code download option The Select a Node screen now appears This screen lists all Acce ss System2000 nodes Site MANUAL ACK Alarm Current Node NOT YET DEFINED l B Select a Node Node Name Location E
302. n no user data is present on the net The Idle Code may be configured for ALL ONES or Flags 01111110 Within the same frequency band The slight movement of a transmission signal which can introduce errors and loss of synchronization in high speed synchronous transmission links See Kilobits Per Second A measure of data transfer equaling one thousand binary digits transmitted or received through a medium every one second See Local Area Network See Line Build Out See Light Emitting Diode A light emitting diode is a device which will light up when the proper current is passed through it It is used on Verilink modules for identifying loops errors and other current conditions of T1 lines Line Build Out is the attenuation signal strength used by the CSU to the network interface and is determined byh the distance from the CSU to the first line repeater Access Manager 2000 Manual A 11 A 12 Term Definition Line Loopback LLB Local Area Network LOF LOFS Login Loopback LOS Loss of Frame Loss of Frame Count Loss of Frame Second Loss of Signal Loss of Signal Second An LLB is a loop which takes the signal from the DS 1 network and loops it back toward the network The loop does not allow the DS 1 signal to pass through the CSU except for critical protection circuitry and the repeater making it useful for testing the DS 1 line See Line Loopback A type of high speed data commu
303. n the screen e Ifa list extends beyond the top or bottom of the current screen the screen scrolls in the direction of the pressed arrow key On single screen displays the cursor wraps around to the opposite end of the screen lt Left Arrow gt and lt Right Arrow gt These keys move the cursor to the left or right on a data entry line lt PgDn gt Next Page If more than one screen of information exists for the current screen pressing displays the next screen page of information below the current cursor position lt PgUp gt Previou Page If an additional screen of informati xists above the current screen page pressing s the next screen of information above the current cursor position lt Home gt Pressing Gay moves the cursor to the beginning of a list This includes lists which have more items than can be displayed in a single screen lt End gt Special keys Pressing ea moves the cursor to the end of a list This includes lists which have more items than can be displayed in a single screen The keys described in this section are used to perform special functions within Access Manager A listing of these definitions is provided in Table 3 3 Special key definitions in PC mode on page 3 10 Access Manager 2000 User Manual 3 9 Using Access Manager 3 10 Table 3 3 Key lt ENTER gt Special key definitions in PC mode Pressing the key either selects the optio
304. nchronized timing sources for receive data and transmit data is invalid and introduces errors In general DIU loopbacks may introduce errors if the CSU is THROUGH timed To activate or deactivate DIU loopbacks 1 When you get the On line Access sub menu select the Loopbacks option 2 The Specify Circuit Element to Receive Loopback screen appears e The first field is DIU Shelf Numbe Enter the shelf number of the plug in DIU circuit element which will receive the loopback request e The second field is DIU Plug Nunbe Enter the slot of the plug in DIU circuit element which will receive the loopback request 8 50 Access Manager 2000 User Manual Activating Deactivating DIU loopbacks e Press the CF5 key to enter the DIU slot and shelf number 3 One of the following Select xxx Loopback Activity screens will appear e For the DIU 2130 Select DIU 2138 Loopback Activity Loop up near port Loop down near port Loop up far port Loop down far port Press f or ist char Enter to select Esc to cancel e For the DIU 2140 Select DIU 1130 Loopback Activity tivity Loop down near port Loop up far port GH Loop up near port B C D Loop down far port Press f or ist char Enter to select Esc to cancel e For the DIU 1130 Select DIU 2148 Loopback Activity GH Loop up near port B Loop down near port Press ft or ist char Enter to select Esc to cancel Select the DIU loopback operation y
305. nd the second shelf D is hardware addressed 2 Dual line shelves must always be the last shelf For example when you are entering an MLS 2200 MLS 2000 and two DLS 2000 the nodes could be entered one of two ways S M D D M S D D Access Manager 2000 User Manual 5 15 Configuring the T1 Network Query and alarm paths Table 5 2 Allowable AS2000 shelf configurations on page 5 16 shows several possible configurations of the AS2000 nodes Table 5 2 Allowable AS2000 shelf configurations M MM D D D M D M D D M M D M M D D S S S M S S D M S D S D D S S D S S D D For a ConnecT1 Plus node specify the arrangement of the shelves accessed by this node The only possible arrangements are such that the number of Ds is equal to the number of shelves being used For example for the four shelf maximum the arrangement would be D D D D The query path is used by Access Manager to query the node for status or other information or to download to the node The alarm path is used by the node to report alarms to Access Manager Alarm Paths and Query Paths and hence their device types are set from the Node Definition screen Before you can define these paths for the node you must configure your comlines to support the node s access arrangement The access arrangement specifies the type of connection at each serial port of the Access Manager PC Until now if you wanted to set up an Alarm path or a Query p
306. nds Unavailable Seconds Loss of Signal Seconds 13 Bursty Errored Seconds Errored Seconds Line AIS seconds 14 Severely Errored Seconds Out of Frame Seconds BER Seconds 15 Loss of Frame Count DTE Low Density Seconds Remote AIS 16 Errored Seconds Line BER Alarm Seconds Loss of Frame Seconds 17 Severely Errored Framing Seconds Reserved Reserved 18 AS2000 Reserved Reserved 551VST type Out of Frame Seconds 19 Reserved Reserved Reserved 20 Reserved Reserved Reserved If you change the node ID number item 7 or node name item 6 by Access Manager s configuration commands the archived data will also change as of that date and time For this reason exercise care when trying to correlate data over extended intervals If archive data is used as input for reports unexpected changes in node definitions could produce undesired results For items 11 through 20 the following codes apply a 0 900 Able to access not available a Attempt to access unable to get circuit element data a 2 Not available by design a 3 Data collection disabled For 551 VST type circuit elements Item 18 of the User Performance Data file becomes Out of Frame Seconds only when the EQPT and Additional Performance data files do not exist The User EQPT and Additional data files all exist for AS2000 circuit elements Access Manager 2000 User Manual E 11 Le Performance Data Log Records Note When the Performance Database is archived the Circuit E
307. ne shelf you must enter the same shelf number you used when you set the shelf address during the initial hardware installation Enter the shelf and range of slots in the fields Press CF5 nfirm the range If you enter an invalid shelf number or range of elements an error message appears Re enter the proper numbers Once you confirm the range a warning message appears to let you know that once down line loading begins it cannot be aborted a If you re sure you want to proceed with downline loading type Y at the prompt b Otherwise press any key to exit from this operation Access Manager now downloads the new firmware to the selected elements e First the circuit element reverts to its original firmware whatever s in its EPROM and its processor is reset Once the processor is reset circuit elements perform functions including 4 36 Access Manager 2000 User Manual Downloading firmware to the nodes self test and clearing performance registers During this activity the CSUs are out of service for up to 3 seconds Similarly DIU circuit elements self test and interrupt service to the data ports e After reset the actual downloading begins This can take up to 10 minutes depending on the number of elements receiving the download During download the circuit element operates normally running the original code in the EPROM e When the downloading is complete the circuit element is reset ag
308. nfiguration Menu 2 Then type C to select Revise Circuit Definitions The Configuration Circuit screen of now appears Configuration Circuit JUN dd new circuit definition Edit edit circuit definition Delete delete circuit definition View view circuit definition List print all circuit definitions Press ft or ist char Enter to select Esc to cancel 3 From the Configuration Circuit screen type A to bring up the Add Circuit Definition screen Add Circuit Definition Circuit name From DS1 point To DS1 point Comments eee eee ene Press F5 to save definition 4 When you have finished entering the circuit definition press the CE5 key to accept your entries After the database has been updated you are returned to the Add Circuit Definition screen Access Manager 2000 User Manual 5 103 Configuring the T1 Network Circuit Name In the Add Circuit Definition screen type in the circuit name The name can be either the circuit number or a brief description of the circuit itself The choice is up to you so long as the name you select does not exceed twenty alphanumeric characters From DS1 Point The next option is the From DS1 Point entry which is used to define a circuit element This must include the node name exactly as it is spelled in the node definition and it must also must include any other information needed to define a single circuit element Otherwise an error message appear
309. nfigure the system to recognize the DigiCHANNEL board 1 Insert the Reference Diskette into drive A 2 Boot the system with the Reference Diskette containing the ADF file 3 Follow the on screen instructions to automatically reconfigure your system 4 Type Y when the system tells you that it has found a board it doesn t recognize and asks you whether or not it should run Automatic Configuration The 6FE5 ADF and 6FE6 ADF files contain information used by the automatic configuration program to select interrupts and addresses for interfacing with the DigiCHANNEL board The default settings for the first DigiCHANNEL board are e Board Interrupt 3 e Start of Port Addresses DB80h e Status Port Address DBCOh D 4 Access Manager 2000 User Manual Configuring Access Manager to use the MC 4 o MC 8 Installing a Digi CHANNEL MC 4 or MC 8 and Editing e COM2 Compatibility Disabled The PS 2 auto configuration program automatically selects interrupts or addresses other than the ones listed above if it finds them already being used 5 Review the settings selected to verify the board configuration before attempting to configure Access Manager If a different starting address is desired the start of port addresses should be changed at this time Refer to Table D 4 Serial Ports for DigiCHANNEL MC 4 or MC 8 in Micro Channel IBM PS 2 on page D 6 Note 4 for a list of allowed starting addresses 6 Press the lt
310. ng format k Enable Alarm Reporting F8 Y Enable NET side B8ZS Poll far end status F8 NOPOLL Regenerate CRC 6 to NET 7 RLB loopback timeout 1 MIN Enable YEL transcode to NET Enable PRM 7 N Signal to EQP on NET errors AISCnot SIG during loopback Y Signal to EQP on NET LOF EQP Distance feet F8 133 Signal to EQP on NET LOS 7 EQP framing format F8 SF NET RCU Jitter BUF 40 bits Enable EQP side B8ZS 7 Data Link idlecode Flags 7 Regenerate CRC 6 to EQP 7 Power up near end self test Enable YEL transcode to EQP Loopback Enable F8 Signal to NET on EQP errors Enable testing options F8 Signal to NET on EQP LOF DIU data bus used F8 EQP RCV Jitter BUF 40 bits DIU timing F8 Enable EQP OOF transparency Disabling this option also disables the indented options below it Press F5 to update element F6 to update entire range F8 for options Ctrl PgUp Ctrl PgDn for prev next circuit element KKK ZEKE KK KZ 6 At this point you ll need to configure the parameters available for your equipment type You must delete an AS2000 or ConnecT1 Plus circuit element before you Deleting circuit can replace it with one of a different type element definitions Oo oe To delete a circuit element configuration 1 Starting from the Main Menu select Configuration The screen labeled Configuration appears Configuration revise node definitions Element revise circuit elem
311. ng subsections will show you how to arrive at the appropriate screens for the procedure you wish to execute All fields within each screen are described in the order they appear from top to bottom A circuit is defined as two CSUs Channel Service Units and the connecting DS1 facilities between each element accessed by Access Manager If a network circuit is only an end section and does not have a far end CSU for example a network circuit that terminates ina DACS or ESS switch then an Access Manager circuit cannot be built for the network circuit If you change the node name in the node definition that change in name is not automatically made in the circuit and route definitions that include that node This creates problems during database analysis by circuit and on line element status furthermore in polling the far end data might not be stored properly 5 102 Access Manager 2000 User Manual Defining a new circuit Configuring circuits If you ever edit a circuit or route with a changed node name then the node name must be updated before Access Manager recognizes the node and accepts the changes to the circuit route definition Before you can define a circuit you must already have defined the nodes and circuit elements at each end of the circuit If you have questions refer to the configuration steps defined in Summary of tasks on page 5 5 To define a new circuit 1 At the Main Menu type C to bring up the Co
312. nications connection where all segments of the transmission medium are in the office See Loss of Frame See Loss of Frame Second To log in to a computer is to establish a connection through an input device to identify yourself as an authorized user A method of checking the accuracy of a data transmission in which the transmitted data is looped back to its source for comparison Loopbacks may be initiated from various point along the circuit See Loss of Signal Loss of Frame alarm is declared when a 3 second interval of continuous Out Of Frame OOF or Loss Of Signal LOS state is detected An LOF alarm is cleared when at least 10 seconds of continuous non LOS or non LOF condition exists An accumulation of the number of times a Loss Of Frame alarm is declared LOFS is the total number of seconds that the CSU was in the LOS state The state of a T1 line when no bits are detected on input to the receiving equipment The time for detection of loss of signal will vary depending on the type of equipment used The Loss Of Signal state is then integrated into a LOS alarm after 3 seconds of continuous Loss Of Signal state A second during which the CSU is in a Loss of Signal state These seconds are recorded by the NCCs and TACs in Access System 2000 nodes Access Manager 2000 Manual Term Definition Master NCC 2020 Mbps Megabits per Second Megahertz MHz MLS Modem Multiline Shelf Multiplex Multiplexe
313. nition View vieu circuit element definition List print circuit element definitions Confg display ASZ000 configuration Press f or ist char Enter to select Esc to cancel a To simultaneously configure multiple CSUs which reside on the same shelf choose Select The Select Shelf and Plug Range screen appears Select Shelf and PLUG range Shelf number From PLUG number 2 To PLUG number 2 Press F5 when selections are completed Access Manager 2000 User Manual 5 73 Configuring the T1 Network Type the number of the shelf on the first line the leftmost slot on the second line and the rightmost slot on the third line After you have made your selections press CE5 to save them You will be returned to the Configuration AS2000 Plug screen shown at the beginning of this step b If you have just completed Step 3a or you want to configure a single plug select Edit Configuration AS28800 Plug Select select shelf and PLUG range edit circuit element definition Delete delete circuit element definition View view circuit element definition List print circuit element definitions Confg display ASZ 0 configuration Press f or ist char Enter to select Esc to cancel The Select AS2000 Element Type for Shelf _ Plug_ screen appears Select ASZ 00 Element Type for shelf 1 PLUG 6 1 CSU 2 DIU 2138 3 DIU 2132 4 DIU 2146 Press f 4 number or ESC Ctrl Pglp Ctrl PgDn for prev next circuit element
314. node and verifying that it is ready to be connected to Access Manager set the Node Installed and Operational option to YES This option should only be set if three conditions have been satisfied 1 The communication link to the node has been installed 2 The node has been installed and tested locally 3 The connection is known to operate properly If you set this option to YES when adding a node while Access Manager cannot successfully communicate with the node an error message is generated and the installed option is reset to NO If you set this option to YES when editing a node and Access Manager cannot successfully connect to the node this option stays set to YES The first configuration item to be entered is the node definition Access Manager 2000 User Manual 5 35 Configuring the T1 Network To add a node definition 1 From the Configuration Menu select the Node option type N to revise node definitions The Configuration Node screen appears Edit Delete View Print List Configuration Node add new node definition edit node definition delete node definition view node definition print node definition print all node definitions Press t or ist char Enter to select Esc to cancel 2 Press the A key The Add Node Definition screen appears Equipment type System Shelf Typets Query path type Edit Node Definition TEST 1 TEST AS2888 M DIRECT Query path CCOMn phonet o
315. not at least one access Level 4 user remaining in the database Access Manager 2000 User Manual 4 25 Configuring Access Manager Adding a user definition To add a user definition 1 From the Revise User Definitions screen select Add The screen labeled Add New User now appears Add Neu User Password Access level 1 Press F5 to save definition 2 Enter the user name password and access level Choose one of the following options To save the definition press CF5 To exit without saving press CF2 3 The user names passwords and access levels are encrypted in the database to prevent viewing them with an ASCII file editor The default user definitions shipped with the Access Manager database include the following a User Name LEVEL4 a Password TEST a Access Level 4 The default access level for all new users is Level 1 Not all of the options are displayed on some sub menus for users with an access level lower than LEVEL4 For example the following two figures show two typical screens that appear for LEVEL access users Figure 3 6 Utilities Menu for a LEVEL1 Use Utilities Uae review system event log Press f or ist char Enter to select Esc to cancel 4 26 Access Manager 2000 User Manual Editing a user definition Updating user definitions Figure 3 7 Review System Events Menu Level 1 User Review System Events UE vieu system events List print system events
316. nother character A subchannel is any segment of a DS 0 channel that is used to complete a circuit without effecting other traffic within the DS 0 In the reference the transmission speeds falling between 300 bps and 9 6 kbps Access Manager 2000 Manual A 17 A 18 Term Definition Superframe Synchronous System Node T T1 TAC Telco Telephone Company Telephone Company Register Terminal Twisted Pair The superframe framing format divides a 1 544 Mbps DS 1 T1 line into two major sections and contains 24 frames 1 Traffic and signalling 1 536 Mbps Divided into 24 DSO 64 kbps channels in one frame 2 Framing 8 kbps SF is the predecessor of ESF and still is used when ESF in not available A method of transmission where an uninterrupted block of data is sent Each block is preceded by one or more sync characters to synchronize the receiver with the datastream All modules NCC TACs DIUs TIUs controlled by a master node controller NCC through the Access Manager or ASCII terminal operator interface Each master NCC in a node performs these control functions Each node can have up to 30 modules in any combination A 24 channel 1 544 Mhz bit stream used for data transmission T1 uses two twisted pair conductors to accomplish full duplex transmission T1 Aggregate and Channel Service Unit Module See Telephone Company A company that provides its customers with a communications lin
317. nsmission A digital communications service which carries data at 56 kbps A digital multiplexer takes several lower speed digital lines channels and combines them into one faster digital line channel signal A digital demultiplexer device which takes a digital line and divides it into several usable channels See Data Interface Module See Data Interface Unit See Dual Line Shelf See Data Service Unit See Digital Signal Level 0 See Digital Signal Level 1 Access Manager 2000 Manual A 7 A 8 Term Definition DS 1 Equipmen DTE DTR Dual Line Shelf E EFS EIA ELB Electronic Programmable Read only Memory EPROM Equipment Equipment Loopback Equipment Low Density Second EQP EQPT Errored Second The customers DS 1 data transmission equipment connected to the CSU of a NCC 2020 or TAC 2010 See Data Terminal Equipment Data Terminal Ready A dual line shelf is a component of the Access System 2000 and is used to house two or less plug in modules such as NCCs TACs TIUs and DIUs The DLS also provides three buses and several input and output jacks for module interconnection and usability See Error Free Second Electronic Industries Association see RS XX specifications under the alphabetical listing in this glossary See Equipment Loopback An EPROM is a non volatile memory chip which can be erased by exposing the chip to ultraviolet light It may then be reprogrammed
318. nt approve update for entire range toggle Data Monitor status visability display choice list if available log off current user terminate program The symbol means pressing down Ctrl key while pressing the key following it PgDn next circuit element in range PgUp prev circuit element in range Press any key to continue The screen will be appropriate for the terminal mode PC or VT100 you are currently in If you need technical help refer to this manual orcall Verilink Technical Support at 1 408 945 1199 If you enter an unacceptable value in a data entry screen an error message will appear in the middle of your screen If you re using a color monitor the error message will be white text in a red box The word ERROR will appear at the top This is followed by information which tells you which field and option is causing the error It may point out the appropriate range of values or necessary corrective action Access Manager 2000 User Manual 3 13 Using Access Manager Warning Messages Alarm Messages If you re using a color monitor the warning message will be white text in a red box The word WARNING will appear at the top You will receive a warning message when you re about to perform an operation which may cause a line to become out of service or database information to be overwritten Warning messages always offer you a choice They allow you to choose whether you want to continue the o
319. nt accessed through the node does not support those registers the registers appear as N A in their respective columns However if all the registers for an interval are unavailable due to resetting or disabling of the registers that interval is not shown If multiple intervals contain all zero data they are shown as To and From intervals with the time shown as the start time of the latest interval lowest numbered interval Access Manager 2000 User Manual 8 31 Monitoring and Troubleshooting Access Manager 1 hour data screens A 1 hour register screen looks like this AS280 1 Hour USER Performance Data CSU 1 CSU type ASZ 8 CSU Element SIGMAL1 11 Circuit NOT SPECIFIED Number of Valid Intervals 96 Number of Seconds in Current Interval 578 Total ESF error events 65535 Interval starts at ES UAS BES SES LOFC ES L SEFS current interval gt 16 19 51 568 a a 569 1 16 04 51 3900 2 988 2 15 49 51 8 988 z 6 988 3 15 34 54 900 z 2 2 900 4 15 19 51 900 2 988 Include _ the current 24 hour total 65535 8 8 a 86401 15 minute interval Press F8 to print PgUp PREV CSU PgDn NEXT CSU lt FAR CSU NEAR CSU 24 hour total 86 400 seconds However only a maximum of 65 535 seconds can be displayed You can view the last four 15 minute intervals The 24 hour summary is always shown in the last row To print the performance data press CE8
320. nter Username input screen for user name You cannot shut down Access Manager unless you are logged in with Exiting Access access at LEVEL4 Manager To shut down Access Manager 1 Press any place in the program except when a screen requests any key as a response A warning message now appears 2 To halt Access Manager and return to DOS type Y Any other response returns you to the Main Menu CAUTION The key must be used to exit from Access Manager Do not shut down Access Manager by rebooting the computer Doing so may corrupt the database Access Manager 2000 User Manual 3 19 Using Access Manager 3 20 Access Manager 2000 User Manual Chapter 4 Configuring Access Manager This chapter provides instructions for setting up Access Manager 2000 These operations are performed from the Utilities option of the Main Menu Configuration procedure overview The tasks outlined in this chapter include Configuration tasks Setting the date and time page 4 2 Configuring the site pag e4 3 Updating user definitions pag e4 23 Reviewing and archiving events logs page 4 28 Downloading firmware to the nodes pag e4 33 To access the Utilities Menu Utilities Menu Select the Utilities option from the Main Menu by highlighting the option and pressing Enter or by typing U The Utilities Menu appears Utilities edit system date and tine Installation revise installation parameters User
321. o ieee eseeseeeseecseeesceeeeeeceeeeeeeeseeeaecaeesaecaeesaecseeaeeneens 5 1 Node seere re dicuse pavueesctdychced cranes dead o ae eeoa desde cocahe a aSa sed r spar 5 1 Some rules of thumb sssessseeesssssrsesrssssrsrrsresrserstrrrssrrsseereseeersresesreerenreee 5 4 Cireuit element ssn e a Ge R E R E SES 5 4 CINCUIL set eae A ei alee tn te Boe i ET 5 4 SUMMALY OF ASKS iein neea eeaeee aaa e costae Ee EE REEE EE SS 5 5 Configuration MENU ie Ea a E E S ea S ESEE eats 5 9 Configurins NOdES Perai a a Auta R A E ENESE 5 10 Getting to the Node Definition Screen sssesseessseseeesseeesrsessesesserrrsreersreeresreresesss 5 10 SUMMALY OF TASKS seher no a An E EEE EE oiro EEEE 5 13 Identifying th node nornin Es E EEEa ER 5 14 Specifying shelf types for AS2000 nodes s ssssesesseeeeesseeesseerrersreerrereen 5 15 Query and alarm paths s esessesseeseesseseseeererseeesssessrsessestesesrrsrerssrerssrsresreserresreersseet 5 16 Definine query paths vereor pees areor oreet a NE SEEE E Npa SHES SRE ERES 5 17 Specifying baud rate veia ese A E EE Eaa 5 19 Enabling alarm reporting sys cecs sesecdovetsesves sc ideoussecutuhenesscgesocnoetivecseevl at eee deenseeeeests 5 20 Selecting options based on access arrangement eee cece eeeeees 5 21 Defining alternate alarm paths oo eseceseeeeceeeeeeceeceeeseeeeeeseneeseecaeesaesaee 5 23 Application scenarios 200 0 eee ceeeeseseecseceeceecaeaecseesecnseseeseseeeeseneeees 5 23 Wh
322. o cancel This screen gives you a choice of analysis methods by node location circuit or route In the following sub steps please wait while Access Manager analyzes the performance data records e Ifyou chose Circuit in Step 8 the Select A Circuit screen appears Select a Circuit Circuit Name From CE LA CONTROL CTR SS1UST ML LIST 201 LA CONTROL CTRI1 Press Home End PgUp PgDn ft or to browse Enter to select Esc to cancel Place the cursor at the circuit to be analyzed and press Enter Both the circuit elements associated with the circuit are listed e Ifyouchose Node in Step 8 the Select a Node screen appears Select the node All the circuit elements associated with the node are listed e Ifyou chose Location in Step 8 the Select a Location screen appears Select the node at the location you want All the circuit elements associated with the node are listed Access Manager 2000 User Manual 7 9 Analyzing Performance Data e Ifyouchose Route in Step 8 the Select A Route screen appears Place the cursor at the route to be analyzed and press Enter All the circuit elements associated with the route are listed 9 The Select A Circuit Element screen appears after a period of time dependent on the size of the record log Select a Circuit Element Circuit Element Z Avail Z ErrFree Circuit DUO LINEL 1 1 95 8 99 9 DUO FAR Press F8 for options Press Home End PgUp PgDn t or J to browse Enter to s
323. o cancel Press F8 for options E 12 Access Manager 2000 User Manual Performance Data Log Performance Database N A Not Applicable in the performance data register fields indicates that the circuit element does not support that type of data collection dis indicates that the collection of performance data in the slot was disabled for the period displayed FigureE 2 Circuit Element Detail Menu slot disabled on pag eE 13 Figure E 2 Circuit Element Detail Menu slot di Date Time Circuit Element 037 29 13 66 AMZ B L1 11 3 29 14 00 AMZ L1 11 037 29 15 00 AMZ B L1L 11 3 29 16 800 AMZ AL1 11 837 29 17 08 AMZ G L1L 11 803730 16 45 AMZ 1 11 Press Home End PgUp PgDn f or to browse Esc to cancel Press F8 for options sabled Circuit Element Detail OOFS LOFS LOSS RAIS AISS BERS dis dis dis dis dis dis dis dis dis dis dis dis dis dis dis dis dis dis dis dis dis dis dis dis dis dis dis dis dis dis dis dis dis dis dis dis LS Note All 15 minute intervals are not displayed or recorded The explanation for unrecorded is a Ifa performance data type User Additional or EQPT is disabled dis records are created to mark the beginning and end of the disabled period During the disabled period records are created every 12 hours on the polling hour No other dis records are created a Ifa performance data type i
324. o five categories of operations Each of these may be selected from Access Manager s Main Menu This menu appears after you start Access Manager and log in Figure 1 4 Access Manager 2000 Main Menu Main Menu Utilities revise administrative data Alarm status review acknowledged alarms Configuration revise system configuration tables Online access performance data inquiry and testing Database access stored performance data analysis Press f 4 or ist char Enter to select Esc to cancel The Main Menu provides access to five major menus The sub menus list categories of operations you can perform with Access Manager Each sub menu also has options additional sub menus and screen displays to assist you in selecting and performing an operation Access Manager 2000 User Manual 1 11 Access Manager Overview Figure 1 5 Access Manager 2000 menu tree on page 1 13 provides an overview of the five major menus Next to each menu is a short description of its activities Following that figure are diagrams of each of the five major menus and their options These provide you with a quick review of what s in each major menu 1 12 Access Manager 2000 User Manual Access Manager 2000 Main Menu Figure 1 5 Access Manager 2000 menu tree This diagram provides a view of the major Access Manager 2000 menus The Main Menu supports five major menus Utilities Alarm Status Configuration Online Access and Database Access AM2000
325. ode definition is iosccsestcens ea e E tors iapesepee tate eeaen oe a ened 5 43 Printing a node definition oo eee cee eeseeeeceseeeeceeeeeeceaeseeecseeesecaeesaecaeeaeesensees 5 43 Listing all Odes ae eea aan i E a E N E OES S Ne Stet NEENA 5 44 Configuring circuit elements oo eee cee eeececeseesecseesecseeseceseeseeeaeseeecaeesaecaeesaecseenae 5 44 Element Sub Menu ecenin i e a tert neeatndbeni eerie mune 5 44 Far End Circuit Element i 22 scscesss05csessedseebessecdscensseentbech openssh ssezsenoscenstes 5 47 Select the circuit element range oo eee eee cee ceeeceeceeeeeeeeseeeseeseecaeesaecaecaeenees 5 47 Editing circuit element definitions 0 eee eeeee cee ceeceseeeeeeeeeseeneecaesneeeseeeeees 5 50 Deleting circuit element definitions 20 0 lee eee eee ceeecseceeenecseeaeceeeseeneensees 5 54 Viewing circuit element definitions ee eee eee eeeecneeeseceeeaeceseaecneceseeeensees 5 56 Printing all circuit element definitions oe eee cee eeeeeecneceeeeeeeeeeeseeseesaeenees 5 56 Configuration Menus of 4016 List 1 and List 2 CSUs oe eeeeereeeeeenes 5 57 Configuration Options for 551 VST Element 0 ces ececeescsecesseeceseseesesesessseneeeees 5 58 S51 VST type CSU Circuit Elements Options Menu cece eseseeeceeeeenee 5 58 Installed and Operational 0 0 0 0 eee eeeseeseeeeceseeeeceeeeeeceseseeecseeesecaeesaecaeeseenseaees 5 62 Retrieve Performance Data 0 0 0 eee eseeseeseeseecsecneceseeseeseceaeeseecaecneceaeeseeeeeesees 5 6
326. ode of operation of the local BER alarm When this option is set to NO default setting the alarm indicator on the CSU clears when the alarm condition clears If this option is set to YES the local alarm indicator stays on after the condition clears until the alarm cutoff ACO button is pressed If the ACO button is pressed while the alarm condition still exists the ACO LED and function activate but the alarm LED remains lit When the alarm condition clears the alarm clears and the ACO LED goes off When this option is enabled YES it allows automatic transmission of Performance Report Messages PRMs defined by ANSI T1 403 1989 The PRM transmits the last four seconds of performance data every second on the ESF Data Link for use by Telco monitoring equipment Enable this option only when the use of PRMs is required The default setting is NO The Encode option controls the transmit direction to the NET and the Decode option controls the receive direction fromthe NET These options are both defaulted to NO which selects AMI line coding To select B8ZS coding on the NET set both options to YES These two options are combined in the 4016 List 1 If you enter YES then the CSU encodes the signal to the NET and decodes the signal from the NET This option determines whether the CSU circuit element generates a new CRC 6 code toward the NET or passes the incoming CRC 6 code from the EQP to the NET To pass the incoming CRC 6 bits fr
327. of one multiline shelf with two elements AS20886 Configuration SMDS ist Letter S NCC282 C TACZ 1 D DIUZ13 O DIUZ14 T TIUZ85 7 undetermined M DIUZ132 2nd Letter 0 Operational Alarm enabled N Operational Alarm disabled Absent X Missing S Spare Press F8 to retrieve amp store node and element configuration m Shelf1 Slot1 has an operational NCC 2020 The element is installed configured and has not failed Alarm reporting is enabled Access Manager 2000 User Manual Displaying individual circuit element status m Shelf1 Slot 6 has a missing DIU 2132 The element s configuration is stored in the database but the module itself is missing has failed or has blown a 5V fuse If you press while viewing a Node Configuration screen the current configuration of the node and accessed circuit element is retrieved and stored in the AM2000 database For the 551 VST ML List 1 and 2 the following differences exist in the NC E Configuration and SIM Configuration Display Menus a The possible CSUs are numbered 1 to 28 a The Far End CSU indicator is on the line below the near end a The right side of the screen has a Power Supply A and B for S551 VST List 1 A or List 1 B or A B C and D for 551 VST List 2 status indication Displaying individual circuit element status Non AS2000 node Element status gives you the current configuration status and revision level of the first CSU in the selected range The
328. of the serial interface For the IRQ number refer to the manual supplied with your computer or to Appe ndixD Installing Serial Ports Baud Rate Access Arrangement This field specifies 1200 2400 or 9600 baud for use by the serial interface Access Arrangement specifies the type of connection at each serial ports of the Access Manager PC All of the comlines except SERIAL DEVICE are connected to nodes or devices to which nodes are connected The SERIAL DEVICE connection services another compute or an Accumaster Further details are outlined below To display the access arrangement s 1 Place the cursor on the Access Arrangement option 2 Press E8 The screen showing possible access arrangements appears Select Access Arrangement DIRECT MODEM CALL ANSWER MODEM ANSWER ONLY AUTOCONFIG SERIAL DEVICE 1 2 3 4 COMDESIGN MUX 5 6 Press f number or ESC Access Manager 2000 User Manual Configuring the site The connection choices and their descriptions are as follows Type of connection Description Direct Either e Hardwired to a node Connected to a node through a pair of full time dedicated modems using a dedicated facility Connected to a node via a dedicated port into a multiplexer and conveyed in the multiplexer s payload Modem This choice provides dial out call to a node and dial in call Call Answer from a node A Modem Call Answer Comline uses the Hayes
329. off the data bus from a DIU Ifeitherthe EXT TTL or EXT 422 lineis YES on the screen and Frequency lineis Nx56kbps or Nx64kbps then the TIU is timing off a data port The following items explain the fields in this screen Field Value Meaning Frequency The frequency of the clock source from which the TIU derives synchronization EQPT Clock Yes The source clock is in the signal received fro the EQPT ET Clock Yes The source clock is in the signal received fro the NET DIU Yes The source clock is derived internally from the DIU EXT TTIL Yes The source clock is from an external source not EQPT or NET signal at TTL levels EXT 442 Yes The source clock is from an external source not EQPT or NET signal at RS422 levels Access Manager 2000 User Manual 8 23 Monitoring and Troubleshooting Access Manager Field Value Meaning TWO CLOCK Yes More than one clock source is present This is 2 or more a trouble indication because neither clock is clocks used and the TIU is timed internally Regen Transmit Yes This shows that CRC regeneration occurs CRC toward the network but not toward the EQPT No This shows that CRC regeneration occurs toward the EQPT but not toward the network YEL AL Tran No Yellow alarm transcoding is currently not Enable enabled toward either the network or the equipment If the frequency line on the screen is O and all other indicators are N
330. om the EQP to the network set this option to NO disable CRC regeneration when the EQP generates the CRC 6 code 5 68 Access Manager 2000 User Manual EE Span Side ESF Framing Enable YEL Transcode to Span Configuration Options for 551VST Elements This option is defaulted to YES Note Revision 2 2 or later of the 551VST List 2 firmware forces the CRC options to be correct based on the framing format regardless of what the soft option switches are set to when the CSU is powered up This also applies to the 4016 R with firmware revision 2 6 or later and 4016 List 2 with firmware revision 2 3 or later CAUTION The correct settings for the EQP and NET CRC regeneration options in relation to the framing formats for the EQP and NET are critical to the proper operation of the ESF CSU families except for the 551VST List 1 A If the EQP is set for SF D4 framing and the NET is set for ESF framing the NET CRC regeneration option must be set to YE the EQP is set for ESF and the NET is set for SF the EQP CRC regeneration must be set to YE For any other combination of framing formats the settings of the EQP and NET CRC regeneration options are up to you If these options are not set correctly for the first two cases constant CRC 6 errors result This option determines whether the framing format transmitted to the network is ESF or SF D4 If SF framing is required on the network set this option to NO disable ESF
331. omplement of the sum of all bytes in the alarm record modulo 256 excluding The Status Code Tables Status Code hex Description 12 Power fuse blown 15 SIM absent 20 NC E powered up Table C 4 SIM Status Codes Status Code hex Description 00 Near BER exceeded 01 Near SPAN LOS alarm 02 Near EQPT low density alarm 03 Near LLB or PLB looped 04 Near ELB or RLB looped 06 Near fuse blown 07 Near CSU absent alarm 08 Far BER exceeded 09 Far SPAN LOS alarm 0A Far EQPT low density alar 0B Far LLB or PLB looped oC Far ELB or RLB loope OF Far CSU absent alarm 12 Power fuse blown 21 SIM powered up Access Manager 2000 User Manual C 5 Table C 5 NMC List 2 Status Codes Status Code hex Description 00 Near BER exceeded 01 Near SPAN LOS alarm 02 Near EQPT low density alarm 03 Near LLB or PLB looped 04 Near ELB or RLB looped 06 Near fuse blown 07 Near CSU absent alarm 08 Far BER exceeded 09 Far SPAN LOS alarm OA Far EQPT low density alar 0B Far LLB or PLB looped 0c Far ELB or RLB loope OF Far CSU absent alarm 11 Power Fuse A failure 12 Power Fuse B failure 13 Power Fuse C failure 14 Power Fuse D failure 20 NMC List 2 powered up Table C 6 AS2000 Near End Network Status Codes Status Code hex Decimal Equivalent Description 65 101 Near NET
332. on allows the near end CSU circuit element to poll the far end CSU circuit element for BER alarm status The Enable Far End Polling option works only if the network uses ESF framing When there is no direct or dial up access to the far end CSU enable it for nodes with access to Access Manager through either direct or dial up connections Only one end of a circuit as defined in Access Manager should be set for polling If both parent nodes are set for alarm reporting and both are accessible by Access Manager set the CSUs at both ends to NO POLL in order to avoid double reporting of the same alarm The default setting for this option is NO disabled 5 66 Access Manager 2000 User Manual Enable Transparent Mode Use FCC Part 68 Rule Only AIS Not Signal Loopback LS AIS Not ESS Keep Alive Configuration Options for 551VST Elements This option has a default setting of NO and should remain set to NO unless the CSU circuit element is to transmit an unframed signal using B8ZS Presently only certain U S government agencies are allowed to use the unframed format on the public network In the transparent mode if an unframed signal is received from the EQP and the CSU is not in an inband loopback mode all BPVs received from the EQP are passed straight to the network In the non transparent normal cut through mode with an unframed signal all BPVs from the EQP are removed except those resulting from B8ZS encoding
333. on which mode was chosen above Generally you must specify the rate whenever a data port transmits subrate data at 9 6 kbps or less Asynchronous Set this option to YES for each data port operating in the asynchronous transmission mode or set it to NO if synchronous transmission is used Access Manager 2000 User Manual 5 101 Configuring the T1 Network Each DIU 2140 can have any combination of asynchronous and synchronous data equipment connected to it DIU Configuration Error Messages If you see an error message when you press F5 to store and download your DIU settings the message indicates that the settings you have chosen are invalid One of the following error messages may appear TOO MANY DIU CONFIGURED appears if you assigned more than 24 total DSOs to the same NCC 2020 CCC 1020 or TAC 2010 TAC 1010 DUPLICATE CHANNEL ASSIGNMENT appears if you assigned a channel of a DS1 line to a DIU data port and that channel was previously assigned to another DIU or data port m SUM OF THE BAUD RATES EXCEEDS SYSTEM MAXIMUM 48000 appears if the sum of the data port baud rates assigned to a DIU 2140 exceeds the maximum aggregate rate of 48 kbps INVALID PORT xxx BAUD RATE appears when the baud rate xxx you entered is not valid for the mode of operation selected Configuring circuits This section describes how to add edit delete view and list circuit definitions The followi
334. ons set this option to NO If a CSU circuit element is accessed only through the ESF Data Link set this option to NO To enable alarm reporting for CSU circuit elements accessed only through the Data Link set this option to YES for the near end CSUs whose parent node is accessed directly by modem or by statistical multiplexer The default setting for this optionis YES Access Manager 2000 User Manual 5 63 Configuring the T1 Network Enable Remote Configuration BER Threshold This option must be set to YES andthe Installed and Operational option must also be set to YES to enable Access Manager to configure the selected CSU circuit elements In the following figures the options following Enable Remote Configuration are downloaded to the CSU circuit element when CE5 is pressed View the appropriate figure for your equipment from the list below If this option is set to NO any changes made are only saved in the database but are not downloaded to the CSU circuit element Remote configuration refers to the fact that these options are downloaded from the Access Manager database Note You should set the Enable Remote Configuration option to YES only during the time that the actual remote configuration is being performed This is to avoid performing a remote configuration if this option is set to YES each time you edit a circuit element just to change the data to be collected This option sets the bit error r
335. oo eee ceeeesesseceeceaeceecseseceseeseceeeseaseaeseaecaeeeaessaesaecnaes 4 23 User NaMe ereinen e a punsunes e EE O E Eiana E 4 23 PassWord ua A A ee es 4 23 ACCESS Levelei as E E EER R A O i 4 23 Viewing the user definitions essssseeeeessseeeesrseesteressrerssrerssrersteserreseerrnsenreseeeeses 4 25 Listing the user defini tons eseese seep secvssvessavebessapevechcvspevcescenugevseites senses cues 4 25 Deleting a user definition 0 eee eeeseeeeceseeeeceeeeeeceeeseeecseeesecaaesaecaeeaeensensees 4 25 Adding auser definition sinner SA Seve Se e EE E EE S R E ER 4 26 Editing a user definition sierica nre in n EEE E 4 27 Reviewing and archiving events logs oe cscs eeeseeeeceeceseeeeeeseeeeceseeeaeeseecaecaaecsessaenaee 4 28 Viewing system events oo eee eee eee cess aerer y en ai eE oe eR rae AASE EERIE 4 28 iv Access Manager 2000 User Manual Listing SyStem events eriin cece sscceeeeh E E N E A e E E i 4 29 Archiving system events eane rp e at ESEI EESK EES eS AKE 4 29 Printing event records srair serieen erar seni ressis nester geis 4 30 ALCHIVING SVEN records risme nna p E n Me Aes 4 31 Deleting event records without archiving e esseeeeseseeesrsreererrseerrereseens 4 33 Downloading firmware to the nodes oo ieee ceseesceeeeeeeeeecacesaeeaececeseeseeeeessessaeaeentes 4 33 CHAPTER 5 Configuring the T1 Network ccccccceeseeeeeeeeeeceaeeeeeaeeeeeeeeseaeeesaeeseeneeeaas 5 1 T1 Network Monitoring Overview o
336. or later 108 453 906 seconds 10 647 1 294 seconds The repeater loopback time out is the time period after which the repeater loopback RLB automatically releases It has a default value of 300 seconds 5 minutes An RLB loops the CSU transmit side output towards the equipment EQP through the CSU repeater and disconnects the incoming signal from the NET Without this time out there would be no ESF Data Link access path to the CSU from the far end to tell the CSU to drop the loopback The RLB time out therefore drops the loopback after the time out period has elapsed Access Manager 2000 User Manual 5 65 Configuring the T1 Network Enable Far En Polling You can select one of 32 time outs ranging in duration from one second to twelve hours as listed in Table 5 10 Repeater Loopback Time out Options Table 5 10 Repeater Loopback Time out Options Seconds Minutes seconds Hour Seconds 1 1 60 1 3 600 2 2 120 2 7 200 3 3 180 3 10 800 4 4 240 4 14 400 5 5 300 5 18 000 10 10 600 6 21 600 20 20 1 200 7 25 200 30 30 1 800 8 28 800 40 40 2 400 9 32 400 50 50 3000 10 36 000 oo 11 39 600 ae 12 43 200 Choosing zero seconds is not allowed causing time out to reset to one second Any value greater than 43 200 seconds is reset to 43 200 seconds and any value between those listed is reset to the next lowest value Enabling this opti
337. ork or Equipment N Network e Test From Far End N No Type Y to send the test signal when the test warning screen appears The Select CSUTest Activity screen appears again Verify that the EQP and STAT LEDs are both lit yellow on the near end NCC orTAC The RLB is activated and the test is in progress Note f the STAT LED flashes red and yellow the test has failed CSU is detecting errors in the looped QRSS signal Replace the NCC or TAC _ 16 Select the View Test Status Results option If the screen shows some errors the CSU test has failed Replace the NCC or TAC Access Manager 2000 User Manual 5 109 Configuring the T1 Network 5 110 _ 29 _ 30 17 J 18 J 19 _ 20 21 _ 22 J2 24 J 25 _ 26 _ 27 _ 28 Press to return to the Select CSUTest Activity menu then select the Abort Test in Progress option and press Ene Press to return to the On line AS2000 menu Choose the Loopbacks option and press Enter Type the shelf and plug in slot numbers of the NCC or TAC and press the CF5 function key Choose the Deactivate EQP Loopback ELB and RLB option and press Enter Type N to specify the near end RLB and press Enter Choose the Activate Line Loopback LLB option and press Enter Type Y to specify the far end LLB and press Enter Type Y to activate the LLB when the loopback warning screen appears At the far end NCC or TAC also
338. ork parameters Verilink CSUs have register sets for User performance data and Telco data Older equipment has fewer registers than newer equipment AS2000 CSUs also provide register sets for equipment data and additional Verilink defined user data for more comprehensive network monitoring These register sets are summarized in Table 8 1 Types of performance registers Only the Telco register set cannot be reset by the user If a given register is not supported by the equipment then the data register column will sho N A for not available when you use the On line Menu to access the data summaries Access Manager 2000 User Manual Displaying Telco and User data Table 8 1 Types of performance registers Four register sets are shown here The first 2 sets with a white background are partially or completely available to all Verilink CSUs The last 2 sets shown with shading are only additionally available to AS2000 equipment User Performance Data network user resettable parameters ES Errored Seconds UAS Unavailable Seconds BES Burst Errored Seconds SES Severely Errored Seconds LOFC Loss Of Frame Counts ES L Errored Seconds Line SEFS Severely Errored Frame Seconds OOFS Out Of Frame Seconds For non AS2000 type equipment onl info included in this data set Telco Data network telco parameters not user resettable ES Errored Seconds UAS Unavailable Seconds BES Burst Errored Seconds SES Sev
339. ou need to configure your far end DIU parameters now However you cannot configure the far end DIU over the Facility Data Link You must access the far end DIU via its associated and co located node controller Enable alarm reporting for the nodes Menu used Main Configuration Node Edit Now go back to each node you configured and enable the alarm reporting option Verify your access to the nodes and elements o Menu used Main On line Element Configuration Display Select the near end node Once connected confirm that the Node Name appears in the upper right hand corner of the display screen under the words Current Node Repeat this process for the far end node 10 The nodes are now part of your Access Manager 2000 database You can now go on line to perform diagnostics perform loopbacks and query registers oases All configuration of nodes elements and circuits is done from the Configuration Configuration menu which is selected from the Main Menu menu Access Manager 2000 User Manual 5 9 Configuring the T1 Network Figure 5 1 Configuration Menu Configuration revise node definitions Element revise circuit elements Circuit revise circuit definitions Route revise route definitions Press ft or ist char Enter to select Esc to cancel Each type of configuration is described in the subsequent sections Configuring nodes This section describes how to add edit delete view pr
340. ou want The DIU 2130 DIU 1130 and DIU 2140 of an Access System 2000 node are each equipped with two simultaneous loopbacks for data port i e data channel end to end testing Access Manager 2000 User Manual 8 51 Monitoring and Troubleshooting Access Manager Testing CSUs After selecting the loopback activity the Select Port Number to Receive Loopback Request screen appears Specify Port number to Receive Loopback Request Port number Press F5 when selections are completed Select the data port to loop up by typing its number 1 or 2 for a DIU 2130 or DIU 113031 2 3 4 or 5 for a DIU 2140 and pressing C5 or press CE2 to cancel the operation If you are activating a DIU loopback a warning message now appears telling you that the selected test will place the data port out of service A prompt also appears asking you to confirm that you want to proceed with the loopback To do so type Y Any other response aborts the test If you are deactivating a DIU loopback and previously changed the timing mode of the CSU restore the CSU to its original timing All loopbacks you have activated i e loop up will remain active until you deactivate i e loop down them This procedure applies to AS2000 CSU circuit elements only If the CSU is used with a DIU and a CSU loopback is required determine the appropriate CSU timing for that loopback For example avoid tests with no timing source when an LL
341. out archiving 1 In the Events Choose Archive Option screen select the Delete option The Select Archive Cutoff Date screen appears 2 Enter the cutoff date When you press CF5 to confirm the data a warning message appears asking you to confirm the deletion WARNING Delete all records up to the date specified Press y to confirm or any other key to cancel 3 Type Y to continue with the record deletion process or press any other key to abort record deletion If Y is typed the selected records from the oldest date to the cutoff date are deleted Downloading firmware to the nodes Code Download also referred to Download APA is available only to Verilink Access System 2000 circuit elements NCC 2020s TAC 2010s TIU 2850s DIU 2130s and DIU 2140s This option allows you to download new architecture personality or features from Access Manager to one or more circuit elements in a node APA is an acronym for Verilink s Advanced Programmable Architecture This feature is available only to Level 4 users The procedure that follows takes up to 10 minutes to complete Before you begin verify the following Access Manager 2000 User Manual 4 33 Configuring Access Manager a The download files for the desired Access System 2000 circuit elements have already been installed on the same hard disk drive directory as the Access Manager 2000 software Typically this directory is C AM2000 a The node has bee
342. pear e If the Circuit Element Detail screen appears continue with Step 11 Circuit Element Detail Date Time Circuit Element ES UAS BS SES LOFC ES L SEFS OOFS 715 551UST LIST 30 551UST LIST 45 551UST LIST 00 551UST LIST 15 551UST LIST 30 551UST LIST 45 551UST LIST 00 551UST LIST 15 551UST LIST 988 966 841 19 B B NNNNNNNN NBS Press Home End PgUp PgDn f or to browse Esc to cancel Press F8 for options e Ifthe bar chart of Figure 7 1 Typical 24 Hour Performance Data Bar Chart appears then continue with Step 12 Access Manager 2000 User Manual 7 11 Analyzing Performance Data 7 12 Figure 7 1 Typical 24 Hour Performance Data Bar Chart 988 888 780 688 58a 40a 308 208 108 HOUR 551UST LIST 2 Errored Seconds 11 81 1992 18 08 190 12 14 16 18 26 22 246 8 Press PgUp PgDn or Esc to cancel Press F8 for options LEE Note KEY indicates the end of available data indicates that the data overflows the vertical scale You can select any of the available registers by pressing the Coup or keys The Ctr or Ctr C key combinations can be used to access the far end CSU circuit element or to return to the near end CSU circuit element If you do not see either of the above screens you will probably get a message Stating that there is no detail data This message will appear during Step 9 if none of the circuit elements associated with th
343. peration or take the often wiser course of backing out If you re using a color monitor the warning message will be white text in a red box The word ALARM will appear at the top Alarm messages provide information about the state of either Verilink equipment or the transmission lines A concurrent alarm record is generated and deposited into the database Getting started with Access Manager Starting the On Site Access Manager This section tells you about a Starting the On Site Access Manager pag e3 14 Logging on page 3 16 Entering information into the screens pag e3 18 Making a selection pag e3 18 a Exiting Access Manager pag e3 19 Logging off pag e3 19 If you modified your AUTOEXEC BAT file appropriately after you installed Access Manager then Access Manager and any associated programs will start automatically when you power up your host PC If you didn t then either modify your AUTOEXEC BAT file as explained in Creating a batch file for automatic start up on page 2 9 or 3 14 Access Manager 2000 User Manual Getting started with Access Manager follow the procedure to manually start Access Manager To manually start Access Manager 1 Turn on and boot up your computer so that the operating system prompt usually C gt appears on the screen 2 Type CD AM2000 or the name you assigned the directory where you installed Access Manager Press 3 If you are us
344. quipment Type ACCESS SYSTEM 81 SAN JOSE AS28800 Press Home End PgUp PgDn ft or to browse Enter to select Esc to cancel 3 From this menu select the node in which the target elements are located and press The Select plug type screen will appear Select plug type 1 NCC 2626 Z2 TAC 2010 3 DIU 2136 4 DIU 2132 5 DIU 2140 6 TIU 2858 Press f number or ESC 4 Select the circuit element type from the Select Plug Type screen The Select Code Version screen will appear Select code version EXAMPLE ONLY This does not necessarily show true version numbers Press ft l number or ESC 5 Select the version files to be downloaded to the CSU Press Access Manager 2000 User Manual 4 35 Configuring Access Manager The Select a shelf and plug range screen appears Select a shelf and plug range From SHELF number To Shelf number 1 From PLUG number 1 To PLUG number 1 Press F5 when selections are completed Skip Steps 6 and 7 if the plug type is an NCC 2 0 20 You can extend the range of shelves and plugs across different types of modules Only modules of the type that you ve selected will accept the download Slots and consequently plugs are numbered from left to right The leftmost circuit element that is plug in any shelf is always numbered 1 The second slot is 2 and so on The shelf which includes the node controller is shelf number 1 If the plug is in a multili
345. r Mux This module provides the operator interface between an Access Manager 2000 controller ASCII terminal or NCC front panel thumbwheel switch and an NCC TAC or DIU in an Access System 2000 node When multiple nodes are present each node has one master NCC which is linked through a RS 232D daisy chain to all other master NCCs for Access Manager 2000 operator interface over a single line The Master NCC occupies the first slot of Shelf 1 in each system node See Megabits per second A measure of data transfer equaling one million binary digits transmitted or received through a medium every one second Megahertz means million hertz or million cycles per second See Megahertz See Multiline Shelf Modulator Demodulator an electronic device that enables digital data to be sent across the network A multiline shelf MLS is a component of the Access System 2000 which is used to house 13 or less plug in modules such as NCCs TACs TIUs and DIUs The MLS also provides three buses and several input and output jacks for module interconnection and usability The MLS 2200 shelf provide the same module capacity as well as providing 7 Data Buses A combination of information channels onto a single transmission bearer A multiplexer takes several lower speed lines channels and combines them into one faster line channel See Multiplexer Access Manager 2000 Manual A 13 A 14 Term Definition N NCC
346. r PORT Query Baud Rate Previous Node in chain Enable Thumbuheel Operation Enable alarm reporting Set Node Clock When Configuring Set Node Clock When Polling Enable Downline load Firmware Node installed amp operational Comments Press F5 to save definition F8 for options Shelf Type is entered with Multiline lt M or first M S D D where D 2 slots shelf M or 13 slots shelf Comments Four lines of comments leave room for you to enter information about the node You can enter up to 120 characters including spaces 5 36 Access Manager 2000 User Manual Configuring nodes An ounce of prevention When you configure a node you re actually creating access to a location in the database where an informational picture of the node is stored and can be modified A Node ID provides a means of access to the database and a reference to the location within the database Every network manager which communicates with a given node must use the same Node ID for that node and have the same picture or representation of that node Figure 5 6 Access Manager s view of the node Primary 2400 baud Access Manager 1 Node ID 12 Telephone Network Modem C Node Name SMITH 2400 baud Location FRESNO AS2000 System Node Secondary 1200 baud Access Manager 2 Query Path Alarm Path As a consequence review these pointers to avoid errors 1 When us
347. r ist char Enter to select Esc to cancel n 3 To view system events Viewing system events 1 From the Utilities Menu select Event Log 4 28 Access Manager 2000 User Manual Reviewing and archiving events logs 2 From the Review System Events screen select Vie The System Event Log Entries screen now appears System Event Log Entries Event Event Time Stamp Details User Log Out 61 23 92 14 13 58 4 LEVEL4 User Log In 01 23 92 14 15 34 4 LEVEL4 User Log Out 61 23 92 14 15 58 4 LEVEL4 User Log In 61 23 92 14 16 15 1 JOHN DOE User Log Out 61 23 92 14 18 16 1 JOHN DOE System Shut Down 61 22 92 16 07 69 System Start Up 61 23 92 22 15 18 System Shut Down 81723792 22 15 29 System Start Up 61 23 92 22 15 57 User Log In 01723792 22 16 14 Press Home End PgUp PgDn t or 4 to browse Esc to cancel The cursor will be positioned at the center of the menu on the last event recorded 3 Use the Coup and keys and cursor keys to view the events in the log 1 From the Utilities Menu select Event Log The Review System Listing system Events screen appears events 2 Select List All system events are printed from the report printer E Only a LEVEL4 user may archive files Archiving system events 1 From the Utilities Menu select Event Log The Review System Events screen appears Access Manager 2000 User Manual 4 29 Configuring Access Manager 2 Select Archive The screen labeled Events Choose Archive Op
348. rates by equipment type and access type Table 5 4 Selecting baud rates by equipment type and access type Type of access ComDesign Equipment type Direct Modem Mux X 25PAD 551 VST List 2 nen MES abcd as 9600 Not applicable e NC E Access System 2000 9600 9600 9600 9600 All other equipment Can only be accessed at 1200 baud Not applicable For direct interface or 4 wire dedicated modem set baud rate to either 1200 o 9600 Note Newer revisions of the 551VST List 2 551VST ML List 2 SIM and NC E can be accessed in dial up mode using the Hayes protocol at either 1200 or 2400 baud with an external modem Existing revisions of the above products can be upgraded to this capability with a firmware change The Enable Alarm Reporting option tells a node that alarm messages should be sent to Access Manager either as they occur or when the node is accessed Only a node that has alarm reporting capability can have this option set to YES and then only if access to the node is through a direct connection modem or ComDesign multiplexer Access System equipment is also compatible with the X 25 PAD Packet Assembler Disassembler If access to the circuit elements in a node is through the ESF Facility Data Link set this option to NO The following types of nodes can report alarms a 551VST List 2 a 551VST ML List 2 without ASCII interface firmware 5 20 Access Manager 2000 User Manual Configurin
349. rchive Record Layout for AS2000 and ConnecT 1 Plus eee E 5 551VST List 2 Alarm Bit Defimition ne eee ceseeseceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeseaeeaes E 6 NC E Alarm Bit Definition nina a E E EEE A A E 7 NC E Alarm Bit Definition 2000 ceeeeeeseeeeeceeecaecaeseceaeaeceseeseceeeeeeseaeeeeseaes E 7 NC E Alarm Bit Definition 3 isco scsdeses cases stevdscss sp sstend osstaschessecissestssndcevasdesessduasdentesgeds E 8 SIM Alarm Bit D finition ienee E EEE E E ons cvaneeduaboverbanseese E 8 NC E Alarm Bit Definition 2 crsissecnii ster sesine arik saersi enot E 9 NMC List 2 Alarm Bit Definition 1 oo eee cee ceeeeeeeeeecaeesaesaeceecneeeeseeeeaeenaes E 9 NMC List 2 Alarm Bit Definition 2 oo eee ceeeceeceeceeeeeeeeseeaeesaecaeceeenseeeeeeaeees E 10 xvi Access Manager 2000 User Manual Preface Using This Manual Targeted audience This introduction tells you how to use this manual and describes its conventions It also summarizes the contents of the manual describes revisions and equipment changes and lists all related Verilink manuals What s in this Manual This manual has been organized to provide you with a progressive understanding of the Access Manager 2000 service and equipment you ll be using Use the Table of Contents and Inde first Look up the pages where the information appears and read the relevant sections before entering anything on the keyboard For an installation or general operating procedure begin with the pro
350. receiver through the associated interface driver and receiver in the DIU This looping path allows you to check the operation of the data equipment and associated cabling to the DIU At the same time the data port of the DIU is also looped back to the DS1 network and returned to the far end EQPT This path allows you to perform end to end data port tests and to check the data circuit end to end DIU 2140 loopbacks The DIU 2140 loopbacks are shown in the following figure Access Manager 2000 User Manual 8 49 Monitoring and Troubleshooting Access Manager EQUIPMENT Procedure for loopbacks Figure 8 1 DIU 2140 loopbacks DIU 2140 CPU gt gt b XMTR Logi BACKPLANE Driver and and TO FROM RCVR Boars NCC 2020 Receiver INTEC DUSARTs OR TAC 2010 CPU AE o A RCVR lt The selected data equipment transmitter is connected to the data receiver through the associated interface driver and receiver in the DIU This looping path allows you to check the operation of the data equipment and associated cabling to the DIU The data port of the DIU is also looped back toward the far end EQP This path allows you to perform end to end data port tests and check the EQPT circuit end to end Before starting this procedure determine the appropriate CSU timing for the DIU loopback For example avoid split timing when a DIU loopback is set THROUGH timing with non sy
351. reen appears i Enter Password Type your password and press Enter The password is hidden while you type it in Youhave three chances to enter it correctly before Access Manager returns you to the Username screen e Ifyou are logging onto Access Manager for the first time type TEST the default password for user name LEVEL4 Getting started with Access Manager After the user password is accepted the Main Menu appears Main Menu Utilities revise administrative data Alarm status review acknowledged alarms Configuration revise system configuration tables Online access performance data inquiry and testing Database access stored performance data analysis Press ft or ist char Enter to select Esc to cancel 3 You can now perform Access Manager operations as outlined in the chapters that follow 4 If this is the first time Access Manager is started enter the time and date See Chapter 4 Configuring Access Manager for more information about the date and time menus 5 This procedure is now completed To manually start Access Manager from a remote VT100 terminal or Starting the equivalent emulation Remote Access Manager 1 Turn on and boot up your computer so that the operating system prompt usually C gt appears on the screen 2 Type CD AM2000 or the name you assigned the directory where you installed Access Manager Press 3 If you are using ppANY WHERE III type ANYW
352. reen with the range you last selected After changing the range press CF5 to save your selection and then press F2 to start the data analysis If you select the Thresholds option you are returned to the Choose Filter forPerformance Data screen After changing the exception threshold that is the filter you are given confirmation that the threshold has been successfully changed Depending on the previous threshold selected you may also be presented with the Time and Date Range screen After you have changed the exception threshold and pressed E5 the message THE THRESHOLD HAS BEEN SUCCESSFULLY CHANGED appears After acknowledging the message or if no confirmation message is displayed the data is analyzed and the Select A Circuit Element screen reappears Archiving performance data If you select the Change the Y axis option which appears only if you are displaying the bar chart the Enter Y Axis Range for Report screen appears Enter Y axis range for report Low Y value C608 thru 899 High y value C 1 thru 90 9408 Press F5 to accept range entered Press FZ to cancel and return to menu Set the range as desired and press CF5 to save the selected range The available Y axis range is from 0 to 900 seconds per interval 15 This completes the procedure for reporting and analyzing the performance data records of a circuit element Archiving performance data To archive perfo
353. rements Recommendations and Notes Host computer model AM2000 may be installed on one of the following IBM PS 2 Model 80 e AT amp T 6386 SX WGS e 100 compatible 386 PC Use a color monitor with the appropriate graphics adapter A VGA monitor is recommended Operating DOS version 5 0 or later on the system host PC DOS must be fully and properly installed RAM Host 640K of base memory To use expanded or extended on y board memory see your application Accumaster 192K engineer for the specifications on Total 4 megabytes minimum Configuring your system Hard disk Use a minimum 80 megabyte Program and overhead files take 2 memory hard disk with fast access less megabytes The rest is for data than 20 milliseconds storage Recommended e himem sys These are very strongly software drivers smartdrv exe recommended Access Manager 2000 User Manual 2 1 Installing Access Manager 2 2 Parameter Requirements Recommendations and Notes Communication e 2 serial ports if a dial up Also compatible ports interface is being used and Py ot 1 printer port DigiBoard DigiCHANNEL MC 8 PS 2 Model 80 compatible serial communications board with 8 serial ports Modems e Hayes 1200 2400 or 9600 An internal Hayes modem works baud external only if it is configured to use communications Port 1 COM1 o e AT amp T 2224 2400 baud CON2 external If Access Manager uses more
354. ress F2 to cancel archive 2 Enter the cutoff date When you press CE5 to accept the data you entered the screen labeled Select Drive appears Select drive Which drive do you want to write on i Enter the letter of the drive that you will use to write the archive files Press F5 to accept or F2 to cancel archiving If you pressed CE2 to cancel the archiving the previous menu appears 3 You can archive the event log records to any drive on your system If the selected drive is the same as the one from which Access Manager is started the archived files are placed in the directory If a different drive is selected the files are placed in the root directory of the selected drive Specify the disk to which the event records are to be archived e To copy the previously selected records from the oldest date to the cutoff date to a file on the selected disk press CE5 e To cancel the archiving function press CF2 This will return you to the previous menu 4 After the records are completely archived you are asked to confirm that the archived records should be deleted from the database e To confirm the deletion type Y 4 32 Access Manager 2000 User Manual Downloading firmware to the nodes e To cancel the deletion press any other key Deleting event records without archiving The Delete option deletes event records from the database without printing or archiving them To delete event records with
355. ress of the alarm destination You must use the same com port access device and baud rate for both alarm paths Access Manager 2000 User Manual Configuring nodes To specify the com port access device 1 Goto the Device Type field and press CF8 A pop up menu will appear listing the supporting devices Type of device Definition NONE Either communication is provided through the ESF Facility Data Link or you are working with a daisy chained node DIRECT This is a direct connection to the Network Manager through a NULL modem cable This option cannot be used for setting up alternate alarm paths MODEM A modem that supports the Hayes command set X 25 PAD An X 25 Packet Assembler Disassembler STAT MUX A statistical multiplexer device AUTOCONF IG Access Manager will select the device type This option will not work if you have a X 25 PAD 2 Use the up and down arrow keys to highlight the device type attached to the node controller and press The pop up menu will disappear and the selected device type will appear in the field To select the device operating speed The only supported device operating speeds are baud rates of 1200 2400 and 9600 a Modems are available and supported at all three operating speeds Stat muxes and X 25 PADs generally operate at 9600 baud The field s default value is 9600 1 If you re using a direct connection a stat mux an X 25 PAD or modems which operate at
356. rmance data 1 Starting from the Main Menu select Database Access The Database Access Performance Database Analysis screen appears From this screen select Archive The Choose Register Set to be Archived screen appears After selecting the register set the Archive Performance Database Choose Archive Option screen appears Performance Database Choose archive option print records Cuith delete option Archive copy records to a disk file Cwith delete optiom Delete delete records WITHOUT ARCHIVING Press ft or ist char Enter to select Esc to cancel This screen gives you three options Access Manager 2000 User Manual 7 15 Analyzing Performance Data Data Log record format e The first option Print allows printing selected records with an option of deleting those records from the database after these records were printed e The second option Archive allows you to archive the selected records to a diskette with an option of deleting those records after archiving is complete e The third option Delete allows you to delete the selected records without archiving The data log records are archived in a format that is compatible with Lotus 1 2 3 or similar spreadsheet file formats and dBase III plus or similar database file formats The maximum file size is 65 kilobytes The format uses a comma delimited ASCII record format Three different file formats are used PDyymmdd xXxx
357. rored Seconds ES e Errored Seconds Line ES L e Unavailable Seconds UAS Thresholds Exceeded e Loss of Signal LOS e Payload Loopback PLB or Line Loopback LLB a On the equipment side e Loss of Signal Low Density e Equipment Loopback ELB or Repeater Loopback RLB e BER ES L ES and UAS Thresholds Exceeded Network Elements A network consists of these network elements Access Manager 2000 User Manual 1 3 Access Manager Overview a Nodes a Circuit Elements Circuits a Routes Figure 1 2 DS1 Network Elements shows the network elements as they are defined by Access Manager Figure 1 2 DS1 Network Elements Node Circuit Element Circuit Element ACCESS MANAGER 551VST Bea aah DS1 Facility FAR END EQPT 2000 EQPT EQPT Circuit Elements Circuit Element 551VST MLS 4016 L1 CSU DS1 Facility FAR END gt Near End z 4016 L1 CSU DS1 Facility 4 FAR END EQPT EQPT Circuit Elements Circuit Elemen AS2000 NCC 2020 DS1 Facility FAR END EQPT L Near End DIU 2130 Data Port j TAC 2010 t DS1 Facility FAR END EQPT Data Port DIU 2130 EQPT Circuit Elements Circuit Element AS2000 NCC 2020 DS1 Fa
358. rs Barchart Display Retrieve 24 hour performance data Loopbacks Activate deactivate loopback modes Select Test Activate deactivate testing modes Press f or 1st char Enter to select Esc to cancel The sub menu you see displays a list of access options These options let you access the node and perform a variety of operations The options listed in the On line Menu depend on which type of single line or multiline node is accessed The single line CSU node types do not have the Display or Access Range options in their On line Access menus Furthermore a 551VST List 1 A doesn t have the element status display capability When the far end status is displayed via the key combination the near end CSU status reappears 3 Select the option you want and press Enter You will see another screen that corresponds to the option you selected Since the functional specifications of the various Verilink access systems differ Access Manager presents a different set of menus for the two basic types of nodes These two types of nodes are AS2000 type node includes Access System 2000 and ConnecT1 Plus hardware ConnecT1 Plus is a low cost Dual Line Shelf implementation of the AS2000 system AS2000 and ConnecT1 Plus menus are used almost interchangeably in this chapter This chapter will also reflect these similarities by showing the ConnecT1 Plus model name and number in parentheses For example NCC Access Manager 2000 User Manual 8
359. rted in VT100 mode the bottom of the screen displays escape key sequences instead of function keys However if you are using the PC keyboard rather than a terminal keyboard the function keys must still be used Using the function key You are inthe Printer filename field and you dlike to know what other printer options are available Edit Report Printer Configuration Printer filename LPT1 Printer type IBM GRAPHIC PRINTER Is printer 88 column wide Y Press F5 to save definition F8 for printer type To find out what other printer options are available press A screen containing a list of options appears superimposed over the first screen Edit Report Printer Configuration Printer filename Select Printer Type Printer type Is printer 8 column widji N Z EPSON PRINTER 3 OKIDATA PRINTER 4 DEC LA120 S TTY Press ft 4 number or ESC Cursor movement keys The following keys are also referred to as directional keys throughout the Access Manager manual They are used to move between fields entries and screens Access Manager 2000 User Manual Basics A listing of these definitions is provided in Table 3 2 Cursor movement key definitions in PC mode on page 3 9 Table 3 2 Cursor movement key definitions in PC mode Key Meaning Definition lt Up Arrow gt and lt Down Arrow gt These keys move the cursor up or down to position the cursor at an entry or item from a list o
360. s Press t or 1st char Enter to select Esc to cancel Date Time ANZa8a Access Level Current User Tue 1 1 88 81 48 51 2 3 DIE 4 LEUEL4 Main function key definitions in reverse video Fi Help FZ2 Previous F3 Main Menu F4 Alarm Mode F9 Log OFF E a When operating Access Manager remotely with a VT100 the display shows the commands as escape key combinations If using a personal computer keyboard the function keys may still be used This is shown in Figure 3 4 Escape key sequence display at VT100 terminal Figure 3 4 Escape key sequence display at VT100 termina Main Menu Utilities revise administrative data Alarm status review acknowledged alarms Configuration revise system configuration tables Online access performance data inquiry and testing Database access stored performance data analysis Press EscU Up EscD Doun or 1st char Enter to select EscEsc to cancel Date Time AN2a88 Access Level Current User Thu 1 23 92 13 47 33 2 3 DIE 4 TAYLOR function keys replaced by escape key sequences gt Esci Help Esc2 Previous Esc3 Main Menu Esc4 Alarm Mode Esc9 Log0ff Beco Sut Down Although we refer to almost all displays as screens those screens Menus which allow you to select options are menus Menus either provide access to another menu or take you to a screen with fields for data entry 3 4 Access Manager 2000 User Manual available options f
361. s If a disk not ready error message is received type Y after the drive is ready and a diskette has been inserted or press any other key to halt the operation If the drive selected is the drive on which Access Manager is running the archived files are placed in the Access Manager database directory If any other drive is selected the files are placed in the last previously selected directory of that drive 9 If you wish to abort the archive function while the records are being copied press Qs key 10 After all the selected records are copied you are presented with the option of deleting all the performance data records up to the date that you have selected Type N or any key other than Y to not delete the records and retain them in the database 11 This completes the copying of performance data records of the type selected LS Note The archive process always creates files starting with extension gt 001 Ifyou have performed previous alarm log archives on the same drive under the same directory with the same cutoff day the existing archive file s are overwritten Refer to Appendix E Archive File Formats for the record format 3 To delete the records without archiving the data Deleting records without archiving 1 Starting from the Main Menu select Database Access the data Access Manager 2000 User Manual 7 19 Analyzing Performance Data 2 From the Database Access Performance Database Analysis screen
362. s Manager is running the archived files are placed in the Access Manager database directory If any other drive is selected the files are placed in the last previously selected directory of that drive 7 If you pressed CF5 a prompt appears asking you to confirm that you want to delete the selected alarm records e To delete the alarm records type Y e To cancel deletion of the selected alarm records press any other key 6 12 Access Manager 2000 User Manual Chapter T Analyzing Performance Data This chapter gives you instructions for retrieving analyzing archiving and deleting DS1 T1 performance data that has been stored in the Access Manager 2000 PC by polling each CSU Without polling there is no data to analyze These operations are performed from the Database Access option of the Main Menu To get to the performance data a Starting from the Main Menu select Database Access The Performance Database Analysis screen appears Performance Database Analysis report performance data analysis Archive archive performance data Press f or ist char Enter to select Esc to cancel All performance data analysis operations are performed from this menu It allows you to obtain a database analysis report archive the data stored in the Access Manager database Performance data can be analyzed from two perspectives a single node a circuit having two circuit elements The analys
363. s all zeros for all its registers O records are created to mark the beginning and end of the all zeros period During the period when all registers remain all zeros records are created every 12 hours on the polling hour No other 0 records are created Access Manager 2000 User Manual E 13 E 14 Access Manager 2000 User Manual If a record type contains non zero data or has no data i e the data is missing records are created In either case a data record for every 15 minute interval is created The data could be missing for a number of reasons see Fig u reE 1 Circuit Element Detail Menu no data available on page E 12 e Connection to the node could not be made e Connection to the node was made but access to the circuit element could not be made e The registers in the circuit element were reset either manually or by powering down the CSU within in the last 12 hours Numerics 4016 List1 and 2 CSUs Configuration Menus 5 57 4016 List CSU configuration 5 44 4016 List2 CSU configuration 5 44 551V type CSU configuration 5 68 551V type CSU configuration 5 70 551V type CSU configuration 12 80Z density enforcement 5 67 AIS keep alive 5 67 AIS loopback 5 67 alarm latch 5 68 EQP side ESF framing 5 70 far end polling 5 66 idle code flags 5 70 PRM performance report messages 5 68 regenerate CRC toward EQP 5 70 regenerate CRC toward span 5 68 remote configurat
364. s available only in the Access Manager 1000 package Except when the Accumaster Protocol is chosen the port sending alarm messages does not use communication flow control or handshaking Alarm acknowledgement Manual or automatic The Acknowledge Alarm Automatically data entry field appears in the Editing the Alarm Destination screen This option specifies the default setting for the alarm status shown at the top of the screen when a user logs onto Access Manager To select the automatic mode type Y Once you are logged on press to toggle between the manual and automatic modes In the automatic mode when an alarm occurs you briefly see the alarm processing message Access Manager collects DS1 performance data every 12 hours and discards duplicate data collected during any 24 hour period It polls all equipped nodes at the same hour in alphanumeric order If the connection to a node fails polling for that node is rescheduled up to three times after all other nodes are polled for a total of four polling attempts Access Manager collects data only from CSUs that meet certain conditions a The CSUs must be configured as Installed and Operational Access Manager 2000 User Manual 4 11 Configuring Access Manager b The CSUs must have collection of performance data enabled c The parent nodes of the CSUs must be configured as Installed and Operational For circuit elements accessed through the 4 kbps ESF Data Link a circuit
365. s indicating a non existent node or lack of sufficient parameters The node name is sufficient to define a single line CS circuit element All multiline CSUs except a node identified as an AS2000 ConnecT 1 Plus or NC E require a single parameter after the node name to define the circuit element The AS2000 and NC E require two additional parameters after the node name The first parameter defines the 551VST MLS Shelf 1 to 5 and the second defines the 4016 R CSU from 1 to 10 within each shelf The other parameters needed to define individual circuit elements in multiline CSUs are surrounded by square brackets c for SIM 551 VST ML List 1 and 551VST ML List 2 nodes and s c for AS2000 ConnecT1 Plus or NC E nodes where c slot number in the multiline shelf and where s shelf number accessed through an AS2000 ConnecT1 Plus or NC E node When entering circuit element parameters you are not required to enter the brackets You can use a comma between the node name and the first parameter instead if so when you press the CF5 key to accept the parameters the system automatically encloses them within brackets Notice that twenty two 22 is the maximum number of characters allowed for defining a circuit element with its parent node To DS1 Point Enter the To DS1 Point using the node name exactly as you would when entering the From DS1 Point option described above 5 104 Access Manager 2000 User Manual Editing a circuit
366. s input jitter tolerance When enabled set to YES this option allows the CSU to pass all BPVs including both non B8ZS and B8ZS coded ones from the equipment EQP to the network When transparency is disabled NO the CSU removes non B8ZS BPVs from the equipment input and passes only the B8ZS coded BPVs to the network However remember that B8ZS is passed only if the CSU is configured for B8ZS NET side encoding and the equipment is set for B8ZS decoding The default is NO Set this option for the amount of line build out LBO needed to provide a DS1 signal of the proper amplitude to the first line repeater on the network Choose one of the following 0 dB The first repeater is 2000 to 3000 feet from the CSU This is the default setting Access Manager 2000 User Manual 5 85 Configuring the T1 Network NET Density Enforcement NET Keep Alive 5 86 7 5 dB 15 dB 0 dB The first repeater is 1000 to 2000 feet away The first repeater is less than 1000 feet away The network does not use line repeaters This option lets you select the type of minimum ONEs density 12 8 AT amp T 1 in 1 in NONE FAIS AIS NONE LPBK oz enforcement on the network If the CSU uses AMI line coding choose one of the following settings When you choose this mode the CSU stuffs a ONE into every string of eight 8 consecutive ZEROs whenever either the average density is below 12 5 percent or there are more than 80
367. s option functions like Signal to EQP on LOS option described below except the trigger condition is LOF See warning in that section The default is YES If this option is set to YES then whatever signal is received from the network is sent to the equipment If this option is set to NO then AIS is sent to the equipment until the LOS alarm clears The default is YES signal CAUTION Setting this option to NO causes an out of service condition during LOS from the network starting when the condition is detected and lasting as long as the condition persists plus from 0 seconds to 255 seconds depending on the user selected alarm delay time The default is 10 seconds This option is functionally similar to the EQP Receive Jitter Buffer 40 Bits option except that the buffer in this option is for the incoming signal from the network The default setting is YES When set to YES the default the ESF Data Link idle code is ALL ONEs When this option is set to NO the Data Link idle code is Flags Set this option to YES default to allow the CSU to automatically perform a self test each time it is powered up Set this option to YES default setting if you want the CSU to respond to loopback commands sent to it either on the ESF Data Link or directly from Access Manager 5 88 Access Manager 2000 User Manual Configuration Options for AS2000 and ConnecTI1 Plus Then press to go to the Loopback Enable screen and enable each d
368. s sub menu that corresponds to type of node you selected These sub menus are described at the beginning of this chapter If you are presented with the On line 551VST Type screen move the cursor to Access CSU and press Enter Displaying circuit element status in a node If you are presented with the On line AS2000 Type screen move the cursor to Access Range and press Enter 3 You will be presented with the sub menu shown below Select Shelf and PLUG range Shelf number From PLUG number 1 To PLUG number 2 Press F5 when selections are completed 4 Select the circuit elements you want by entering the shelf number and the range of the associated plug in slot numbers for those elements The shelf and plug in slot number ranges for the different node types are as follows Type of node Shelf range Plug element range NC E 1 2 3 4 0r5 1 to 10 SIM 1 to 10 551VST ML List 1 1 to 28 551VST ML List 2 1 to 28 Access System 1 to 4 1 to 13 multiline shelf 1 to 2 dual line shelf ConnecT1 Plus 1to2 1to2 If the range of elements is set to less than the maximum the shelf allows only the specified elements can be accessed 5 Press CF5 to accept the selected range 6 The On line xxx screen reappears We ll refer to this as the On Line Access sub menu Proceed with the on line operation you wish to perform Displaying circuit element status in a node The Display option shows a multiline no
369. s the error message FILE NOT FOUND a CONFIG SYS file does not exist in your system Then you must follow the instructions for copying the CONFIG SYS file to the root directory of the boot drive b Ifa CONFIG SYS file exists it will open Verify that the FILES and BUFFERS lines exist in CONFIG SYS Verify that the number of files and buffers called by these lines is sufficient If the lines don t exist or the number to the right of the equal sign is too small you must follow the directions for modifying the CONFIG SyYS file 2 6 Access Manager 2000 User Manual Software Installation To copy the CONFIG SYS file to the root directory of the boot drive 1 Type C and press to return to the boot drive 2 Type CD and press to the root directory on the boot drive 3 Insert Diskette 1 of Access Manager 2000 into drive A 4 At the boot drive prompt type COPY A CONFIG SYS and press Enter The CONFIG SYS file is created in the root directory 5 Remove the diskette from drive A LE Note The new values for FILES and BUFFERS are not in effect until the host PC is rebooted and DOS is restarted 6 Reboot your system to activate the new values before starting Access Manager Otherwise you will not be able to log into Access Manager To modify an existing CONFIG SYS file The existing CONFIG SYS file must be modified if it does not contain FILES 24 or greater and BUFFERS 20 or greater 1 Mo
370. scode to NET Enable PRM A OO Signal to EQP on NET errors AISCnot SIG during loopback Signal to EQP on NET LOF EQP Distance feet F8 Signal to EQP on NET LOS EQP framing format F8 NET RCV Jitter BUF 40 bits m a 8 26 Enable EQP side B8ZS Regenerate CRC 6 to EQP Enable YEL transcode to EQP Signal to NET on EQP errors Signal to NET on EQP LOF EQP RCV Jitter BUF 4 bits Enable EQP OOF transparency Access Manager 2000 User Manual Data Link idlecode Flags Power up near end self test Loopback Enable F8 Enable testing options F8 DIU data bus used F8 DIU timing F8 KKK ZKEKKKKK SZ x Disabling this option also disables the indented options below it Press F5 to update element F6 to update entire range F8 for options Ctrl PgUp Ctrl PgDn for prev next circuit element Displaying on line circuit element configuration e Ifthe circuit element is a DIU 2130 or DIU 1130 a configuration screen similar to the one below appears Installed and Operational Save Configuration to DIU Connected CSU shelf Port Baud Rate Async EQP Name EQP SER 1 Z 3 4 5 Press F5 to update element F8 for Options Baud Rate Ctrl PgUp Ctrl PgDn for prev next circuit element e Ifthe circuit element is a DIU 2140 a configuration screen showing the current on line DIU configuration is displayed ASZ BO Options for DIU 2148 Edit Shelf 1 PLUG 1 1 2 B
371. select that node and print the node and its associated circuit element definitions All defined nodes and their descriptions can be printed by using the List option m To Select this option from the Configuration Node screen type L Configuring circuit elements Element Sub menus This section describes how to select edit delete view list and configure network elements The following subsections will show you how to arrive at the appropriate screens for the procedure you wish to execute All the fields within each screen are described in the order they appear from top to bottom The Configuration menus for circuit elements do not always display the type of circuit element you are accessing When the node may access more than one type such as 4016 L 1 and 4016 L 2 CSUs this can be confusing When the node is a551VST ML List 1 both types of CSU circuit elements are referred to as NMC L 1 CSU Similarly when the node is a551VST ML List 2 both types of CSU circuit elements are referred to as NMC L 2 CSU You must be logged in with LEVEL3 access or higher to change parameters in the Edit Circuit Elements Options screen Access Level 2 allows you to change whether or not the near end and far end performance data are collected Access Level 1 limits you to viewing and listing the circuit element configuration options To reach the appropriate element configuration menu 1 Starting from the Main Menu select Configuration
372. sensa e ne E R R EST 4 5 Report output destination eessessseeeesseeesressrerrsrerrsrererteserrsrersserreseeeesrent 4 6 Printer Typene aa a aa EE E a a a arei e s 4 6 Is Printer 80 Column Wide 00 0 cece eesceeceeeceeeeeeseseeeeecaeesaecseesaeraee 4 8 Configuring the on line data printer eee cee ceee ce cnseeseceaeeseceeeeseeeeeeeeseeeees 4 8 Specifying the alarm destination oo eee eee ceeceseeeeceseeeeceeeeeeceeeseeeeseeeeeeneesaeaee 4 8 Sending alarms to a printer or file oe eee ceeeeeceeceseceeeeeeeeeeeseeees 4 9 Alarm Channel Protocol 0 eeeescesesseeeeeneeeeecaeesaecaeesaecsecaecneeeseerens 4 10 Alarm acknowledgement Manual or automatic ec eeeceeeeesseceneeeeees 4 11 Setting the performance data polling hour ol eee cee ceeceseeeeeeeeeseesaecneeneens 4 11 Assigning database allocations 0 cceceecesscesseessesececeneecseceeeeceneecseceaeeceneeaeeeseeeees 4 12 Assigning Comline definitions 2 00 cecceeeecesecesseceeeeceseeeseeceececseceeaeeeereesaeeeeneee 4 14 Adding a new comline definition 20 0 0 ee eeeeeecesseceereceseeeneecereeeneeeeees 4 17 Editing a comline definition ee ceeeceeseeceseceeeeceeeeneeceeeeseeeeeeeeeees 4 21 Deleting a comline definition 0 eee eeeeseeececeeeecnseceeeeceeeeeneeeteeesaeeeeees 4 22 Viewing comline definitions 00 eee eseeeeeeeceeceeeeeecaeceeeaeeeeeneeeeeees 4 23 Listing printing comline definitions oo eee eee eeeeeeeeeeeeneeeneeaee 4 23 Updating user definitions
373. ser definition Vieu view user definition List print all user definitions Press f or ist char Enter to select Esc to cancel Access Manager 2000 User Manual Viewing the user definitions Listing the user definitions Deleting a user definition EE Updating user definitions Starting from the Main Menu select Utilities From the Utilities Menu select User Definitions From the Revise User Definitions screen select Vie You then see the existing user names passwords and current access levels To print a list of existing user names passwords and current access levels 1 Starting from the Main Menu select Utilities The Utilities Menu will appear 2 Select User Definitions The Revise User Definitions screen will appear 3 Select List This will cause the report printer to output a list of the information To delete a user definition 1 Starting from the Main Menu select Utilities 2 From the Utilities Menu select User Definitions 3 From the Revise User Definitions screen select Delete You then see the list of existing users 4 Highlight the user name you want to delete and then press Enter The delete confirmation prompt appears at this time 5 Choose one of the following actions e To confirm the deletion type Y at the prompt e To cancel the deletion press any other key Note You are prevented from editing or deleting user names and access levels so that there is
374. shelf and PLUG range Edit edit circuit element definition Delete delete circuit element definition Vieu view circuit element definition List print circuit element definitions Confg display AS28800 configuration Press t or ist char Enter to select Esc to cancel This is the first step in selecting the circuit element s to be configured It tells Access Manager who is the circuit element s parent node e its node name The parent node s name appears in the Current Node block in the upper right portion of the screen The node type appears in the menu title If the parent node is a multiline type the circuit element is selected by node name shelf slot If the parent node is a single element type the circuit element is selected by node name only If you are accessing a multiline circuit element continue in the Selecting a Circuit Element Range section that follows Because every CSU or DSU has a default value there is no Add option in the Configuration Actions Menus Toadd a circuit element select the Edit option and choose a parent node then use CID Gaup and Ctrl Gaas to choose the plug number which will hold the new circuit element 5 46 Access Manager 2000 User Manual Configuring circuit elements Far End Circuit Elements Access Manager supports configuration of CSU circuit elements whether far end or near end Far end CSU circuit elements are accessed through the ESF Data Link For this capability to func
375. sign the site name the site name displays as NOT YET DEFINED in the Edit Site Name screen 4 Type in the name you want to assign to your site This name can be up to 20 characters long Access Manager 2000 User Manual Configuring the site 5 To see what Manager Type options are available press CF8 The following screen will appear Edit Site Information Site Name ssssua NOT YET DEFINED LENGT Je eo Select Manager ID Press F5 ti 1 Primary 2 Secondary 3 Technician Press f 4 number or ESC 6 Assigna Manager Type to your Access Manager e To save the site information press CF5 The site name will subsequently appear in the upper left corner of the screen e Ifyou don t want to change the site information press CF2 to return to the Installation Menu 7 Your task is complete The report printer is the printer that prints the performance data analysis Configuring the and bar charts from information in the database Database information report printer can be viewed from the Database Access Menu To configure the report printer a From the Installation Menu select Report The screen labeled Edit Report Printer Configuration now appears Edit Report Printer Configuration Printer filename LPT1 Printer type IBM GRAPHIC PRINTER Is printer 8 column wide 7 Y Press F5 to save definition F8 for printer type Access Manager 2000 User Manual 4 5 Configuring Acce
376. sociated far end circuit elements for performance and status data Polling allows you to schedule storage of more than 24 hours of data for historical analysis The performance data can be archived for future reference Access Manager has alarm reporting features which indicate trouble conditions in the circuit elements it is accessing For example a CSU type circuit element reports an alarm to Access Manager whenever it 1 2 Access Manager 2000 User Manual On line Access and Testing Conditions Monitored Network Elements loses the incoming signal from the equipment or the network or if the operator defined bit error rate threshold in either transmission direction has been exceeded In addition to alarm reports the performance data and system events can be logged for your review An example of performance data reports is the Errored Seconds record System events logged include user log in log out and Access Manager system restart Access Manager allows you to access circuit elements and view their current configuration and status Once an element is accessed you can also activate and deactivate loopbacks on it for circuit testing and troubleshooting In addition some elements can be commanded to send and receive test signals for further assistance in testing and troubleshooting The network NET and equipment EQPT conditions monitored by Access Manager 2000 include On the network side e Bit Error Rate BER e Er
377. ss CE8 The following screen appears Select DIU Timing NONE THROUGH INT EXT_422 EXT_TTL WON OU A UW Ne Press f number or ESC See the individual CSU hardware manuals for further information on the clock source options listed below Option Conditions NONE Choose if the CSU circuit element is not associated with any default DIUs The Data Bus Used option must first be set to NONE THROUGH Choose fo CSU DIU drop and insert configurations that require through timing This is the choice for drop and insert operation Do not select this for DSU CSU mode of operation INT Choose fo CSU DIU configurations in which the clock generated internally is to be used for data timing and both DS1 s transmit timing EXT 422 or Choose one if an external 1 544 MHz gapped or non gapped EXT TTL clock is connected directly to the CSU Choose EXT 422 if the clock is RS422 or choose EXT TTL if the clock is TTL NET Choose fo CSU DIU configurations in which timing is provide from a clock recovered from the incoming network signal This is the default setting for CSU DIU configurations without drop and insert Access Manager 2000 User Manual 5 91 Configuring the T1 Network DIU 2130 Configuration Option Conditions EQ Choose for drop and insert configurations in which timing is provided from a clock recovered from the incoming DS1 equipment signal Do not select this for DSU CSU mode of operation T
378. ss Manager Report output destination The Printer Filename option specifies a destination for the report output You can print to either a parallel port LPT1 or LPT2 or a adisk file You must use the DOS file naming convention to enter a file name or a full path name for a disk file The Printer Filename field allows you to enter up to 20 characters 8 characters for the file s name and the remaining 12 characters for the path If the file name were PRINT1 DOC and the path were C AM2000 the entire filename would be C AM2000 PRINT1 DOC You should include the full DOS path even though it is not required Ifanon reserved name is specified the report is saved to a disk file and may be accessed later a Ifa full DOS path is not included the file is placed in the current directory Ifa filename is specified and you press CE5 to save the definition a file is created on disk with the name specified and zero bytes assigned This is done to verify that the definition is correct and the file can be created Ifthe filename NUL or NONE is used the output is discarded m fno printer is to be attached then NONE should be entered to avoid the PC attempting to print to a non existent printer and freezing in the process Enter a filename and press Enter Printer Type Printer Type selects the type of printer used to print the data This field is only valid when LPT1 or LPT2 is entered forthe Printer Filename
379. ss Manager procedures including start up shut down and backup This chapter also describes the command syntax and keyboard operations used in this manual Configuring Access Manager Provides a reference for the Utilities branch of the Access Mana ger2000 menu Utilities includes setting up communication interfaces between the host PC network elements and peripheral devices Utilities also administers Access Manager users the system s event log and downloading of Advanced Programmable Architecture APA Configuring the T1 Network Provides a reference for the Configuration branch of the Access Manager 2000 menu Configuration establishes the operating characteristics of the network elements such as Channel Service Units CSUs Data Service Units DSUs etc The proper configuration of nodes circuit elements circuits and routes is essential for proper network operation monitoring and testing Alarm Reporting Provides a reference for the Alarm Status branch of the Access Manager 2000 menu Alarm Status manages the database of Access Manager alarm reports including printing archiving viewing and deleting these reports Access Manager 2000 User Manual xix Chapter 7 Chapter 8 Appendix A Appendix B Appendix C Appendix D Appendix E Analyzing Performance Data Provides a reference for the Database Access branch of the Access Manager 2000 menu Database Access manages the records in which Access Manag
380. ss in a DS1 network Since all polled performance data is stored in the database by parent node name and circuit element number the circuit definition contains this path for a circuit element whose performance data is collected through the ESF Data Link Access Manager 2000 User Manual 1 9 Access Manager Overview Route The circuit definition is also used by Access Manager 2000 during data analysis This allows you to access the data stored in both circuit elements by the associated circuit name The circuit definition is also used during the configuration of a far end CSU through the ESF Data Link A route consists of the two network circuit elements at DS1 network circuit end points as accessed by Access Manager For Access Manager a circuit and a route are functionally equivalent Access Manager Connections Access Manager supports five types of network management ports These connect Access Manager to the devices it monitors This information is used in Chapter 4 Configuring Access Manager when configuring the Comlines of the host PC a Direct connect port This port can be e Hardwired to the network device e Connected through a pair of full time dedicated modems using a dedicated facility e Connected by a dedicated port into a multiplexer and conveyed in the multiplexer s payload a Remote dial port The remote dial port can dial out and receive dial in calls from network devices This port uses the Hayes AT co
381. t Listing printing comline definitions This option allows you to print the configuration of your comlines from the report printer Use the same procedure as described earlier except select List rather than Edit Updating user definitions The User Definitions option allows you to add delete or modify Access Manager user names and their associated passwords and access levels Only a user with Level 4 access can access this menu to change the passwords and access levels for defined users The user names passwords and access levels are encrypted in the database to prevent viewing them with an ASCII file editor User Name The User Name data entry field appears in the Add New User screen Each user name can have up to 28 alphanumeric characters Each user name defined in Access Manager can have a separate password associated with it Password The Password data entry field appears in the Add New User screen Each user password can have up to 20 alphanumeric characters Access Level The Access Level data entry field appears in the Add New User screen Each user name has a certain level of access associated with it Access Manager 2000 User Manual 4 23 Configuring Access Manager 4 24 The access level of the current user is shown in the lower right box of each screen Four access levels are possible each permitting a user to perform certain operations These levels are as follows Access Level and Definition Func
382. t work with Access Manage If IRQ 2 or 4 is used the Shared I O Address for this board should be 141H NOTE 5 If you plan on using your PC s built in serial port as a Access Manager comline first you must configure the comline to match the hardware switches for these ports Configuring them in any other way may cause your system to lock up Access Manager 2000 User Manual D 9 CAUTION Do not install software drivers provided by Digiboard for the PC 4 o PC 8 Since Access Manager has its own drivers for these boards using the Digiboard drivers will prevent Access Manager from working with the PC 4 or PC 8 Table D 6 Serial Ports for Second DigiCHANNEL PC 8 in IBM PC XT andAT Port No ee au Port Addr hice ere R Status Mask Note 3 1 COM10 148H 5H 188H OH 2 COM11 150H 5H 188H 1H 3 COM12 158H 5H 188H 2H 4 COM13 160H 5H 188H 3H 5 COM14 168H 5H 188H 4H 6 COM15 170H 5H 188H 5H 7 COM16 178H 5H 188H 6H 8 See Note 2 180H 5H 188H 7H D 10 Access Manager 2000 User Manual Installing a Digi CHANNEL PC 4 PC 8 or PC 16 and Comline Nam IRQ Shared I O Port No Port Addr Addr Status Mask Note 2 Note 3 Note 3 NOTE 1 The DigiBoard Digi CHANNEL PC 8 was formerly called DigiCHANNEL COM 8 This table gives the Comline definitions if you install a second DigiCHANNEL PC 8 board For the first 8 comline definitions se Table D 5 Serial Ports for First Digi
383. ta on a DIU data port may require protection from unauthorized access If scrambling is required set this option to YES on each equipment EQP port This setting allows the DIU to randomize the data before multiplexing and sending it to the CSU If scrambling is not required set this option to NO default setting on the associated DIU data port Be sure to set the Scramble option the same way at the far end NCC DIU 1130 so that it can restore the original customer data upon receiving it EQP Clock Select the timing source for the incoming data from the customer data equipment This can be either the TT Transmit Timing signal from the data equipment or an internal clock either ST or inverted ST generated by the DIU If the TT lead is not available from the data equipment select either ST or INVERT ST to have the DIU clock the data in The ST choice depends on which clock signal transition is to be used for data 5 96 Access Manager 2000 User Manual Configuration Options for AS2000 and ConnecTI Plus timing and probably requires some trial and error First choose ST and check the end to end data transmission on the data port If transmission does not work properly choose INVERT S EQP Handshaking The DIU 2130 and DIU 1130 supports five handshaking signals on each data port The V35 names appear in the DIU menu screen although RS449 and RS530 interfaces are also available Set each signal to N or Y The DIU 2130 and
384. tart up esssesssseeeeesesresrsresrsrrsreeirererrsresrsreee 2 9 LimitafonS 2 2 25 evn eee a Re de i 2 11 Setting up the remote terminal siseses a 2 11 Remote Access Port mior tupi e e E E E TO 2 13 SEttin p A CCUMASIEL n riai iae i EE Ea i E O EEEa 2 13 Time Zone Setup for Accumaster 0 ce eeeeeeesseeececeteeeeceeeecereeeneceeeeee 2 14 Before Starting Accumaster seserian 2 15 CHAPTER 3 Using Access Manager cccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceaeeesaaeeseeeeeseaeeeeaeeseeneesaas 3 1 BASICS resect iia Dagestan Sa da ee ee 3 1 Basic Display cnni ion tts Saweoey senate E senso bots E EES 3 1 Using a Color MON TOL roesini itesieere ireen toiros e kirin pret ien tine Se ei ioes 3 1 CLE SDS iiss sucess e a a e e ae rE e ode evel teste EE Ta 3 1 Differences in displays when in VT100 mode esesseeseseseeeesesseereererseees 3 3 Men s erenn R R E E R E E EEE 3 4 Status Display esi4scie ellie A BR A AGE Re 3 6 KRY DOE AENEA EOE EEE EEE E TENE EE EENE EE ASEE EEEE EEA 3 6 Function Keys ennn teh te N ee as 3 7 Cursor Movement Keys rrr ae o a nia sien Geen ness 3 9 Special Keys suisctessge hohe ise he As ee ee AE Ae en 3 9 Equivalent VT 100 Keystrokes oo eee eeeeeeeecseesseesececeeeeseeeeseneeaees 3 11 cd i o ee Pe EE AE E ge ee 3 12 Error Messages isssesisessscescentascvttecescestavesstuweneptortansugeaites hates E O 3 13 Warning Messages cesses cscessesesseesecesceseeseeeseseeeeseseaeesaecaecaaecaecsaesaecnaeene
385. tatus Codes 0 0 ceeeeeeeceseeceeceseeeseceeceaeeeeeeeneeeseeeaeaes C 6 AS2000 Near End Equipment Status Codes ee ceeeccesseeeceseeeeeceesseceesseceenseens C 8 AS2000 Far End Network Status Codes ccc ecsscsesceeeeeeceseeeeeseecaecsseesecsseeeeeseees C 8 AS2000 Far End Equipment Status Codes 0 eee csceseesceeceeeeeecaecsseeseeeeeseeseeeesenes C 9 Additional NCC 2020 Status Codes oo ececeeesesseesecesceseceeceeeeeeseseseaeeseeeaecsaeeaeenaes C 10 Standard Serial Ports for Micro Channel IBM PS 2 00 ceeseecseeesecneeeeeneensees D 1 Access Manager 2000 User Manual XV Table D 2 Table D 3 Table D 4 Table D 5 Table D 6 Table D 7 Table E 1 Table E 2 Table E 3 Table E 4 Table E 5 Table E 6 Table E 7 Table E 8 Table E 9 Table E 10 Table E 11 Standard Serial Ports for IBM PC XT and AT 00 cece ccccescecceceessceceeeeenseeeeecesenaes D 2 Serial Ports for Everex Magic I O AT Multi I O EV 170A EV 170B eee D 2 Serial Ports for DigiCHANNEL MC 4 or MC 8 in Micro Channel IBM PS 2 D 6 Serial Ports for First Digi CHANNEL PC 4 PC 8 in IBM PC XT and AT D 9 Serial Ports for Second Digi CHANNEL PC 8 in IBM PC XT and AT D 10 Serial Ports for DigiCHANNEL PC 16 in IBM PC XT and AT eee D 11 Event Log ID Number Codes oo ieee ceeeeeseeseceseeseceseeeceeceeceeeeeseaeseeseaessaeeneesaesaes E 2 Alarm Archive Record Layout for ESF CSUS 00 e eee eeeecsecseseeseceeeeeeeeeeeeeeneesaeeaes E 4 Alarm A
386. te and Payload Loopback PLB status See Code Violation Line See Code Violation Path A check sum indicator which is based on the remainder of a polynomial calculation performed on the transmitted data that is used to verify with some fixed probability of correctness whether that data was corrupted This code is embedded in the ESF format and derived from a mathematical calculation performed on the data bits of an Extended Superframe ESF field all 4632 bits to obtain a six bit Cyclic Redundancy Checksum CRC 6 code for those data bits The near end DTE or ESF CSU transmits these six bits in the appropriate CRC 6 positions of the next ESF field across the facilities to the far end DTE or ESF CSU The CRC 6 code is recalculated by the far end CSU based on the current ESF field received and then compared to the CRC 6 that was originally transmitted If the two CRC 6s match it is highly probable that the ESF field arrived without error If the CRC 6s do not match one or more errors may have occurred during transmission of that particular ESF field The CRC 6 code is capable of detecting 98 4 of all ESFs containing transmission errors These error events are logged into an internal register within the ESF CSU and may be recalled on a last 24 hour basis from the local or remote CSU through the ESF Data Link using Access Manager 2000 Access Manager 2000 Manual A 5 A 6 Term Definition D D4 Data Data Bus Data
387. te revise route definitions Press fT or ist char Enter to select Esc to cancel 2 From this screen select Element The screen labeled Edit Element SelectParent Node now appears EDIT ELEMENT Select Parent Node Node Name Location Equipment Type NEW YORK SALES VERILINK HQ AS 2008 SEATTLE SALES VERILINK HQ 551UST LIST 2 Press Home End PgUp PgDn f or to browse Enter to select Esc to cancel If this menu has no nodes listed it means that no nodes have been configured yet 3 Select the circuit elements parent node The menu that appears depends on the type of node The screens are shown as follows e 551VST List 2 Configuration 551UST List 2 edit circuit element definition View view circuit element definition List print circuit element definitions Press t l or ist char Enter to select Esc to cancel 5 50 Access Manager 2000 User Manual Configuring circuit elements e 551VST ML List 2 Configuration 551UST ML List 2 yga select CSU range Edit edit circuit element definition View view circuit element definition List print circuit element definitions Press t l or ist char Enter to select Esc to cancel e Access System 2000 Configuration AS28800 Plug yaa select shelf and PLUG range Edit edit circuit element definition Delete delete circuit element definition Vieu view circuit element definition List print circuit element definitions Confg display AS28800 configuration Press
388. th an additional 97 seconds to 22 minutes depending on the BER Threshold option selected If NO is selected the signal applied is AIS This option is similar to the one above for an alarm caused by a Loss of Frame LOF condition on the incoming signal from the network Also set this option to YES if the CSU is used with DIUs The default setting is YES 5 84 Access Manager 2000 User Manual EQP RCV Receive Jitter BUF Buffer 40 Bits Enable EQP OOF Transparency Network LBO Configuration Options for AS2000 and ConnecTI Plus CAUTION If NET Keep Alive is FAIS framed AIS or AIS then setting this optio to NO causes out of service condition during excessive BER it starts when the OOF Out Of Frame is detected and lasting as long as the condition persists with an additional 0 to 255 seconds depending on the user selected alarm delay time The default is 10 seconds Each CSU has an input buffer in each direction that allows it to tolerate jitter in the incoming signal from the equipment EQP and network The 40 bit buffer provides maximum jitter tolerance and a maximum signal throughput delay time of 42 microseconds 65 bits in each direction Set the equipment side jitter buffer to YES default value for most applications To reduce the equipment side throughput delay time to 17 microseconds 27 bits select NO If NO is selected a buffer length of 16 bits is used However this setting also reduces the CSU
389. than two ports using an internal modem is not recommended Printer Epson LQ 1050 132 column printer Statistical The ComDesign RS2000 or SPX Multiplexer series Statistical Multiplexer operating at up to 9600 baud can b added to an Access Manage network as a routing multiplexer to concentrate the communication lines between Access Manager and connected CSUs X 25PAD Tested with NET TX7000 PAD Management pcANYWHERE III canbe used Do not use newer versions of software with Access Manager to pcANYWHERE enable start up and or control of Access Manager from a remote terminal Remote terminal DEC VT100 0 The remote terminal supported by Access Manager through e VT100 emulator pcANYWHERE software This is used for remote network management applications including running Access Manager remotely from an Accumaster site Hard disk storage considerations The maximum available hard disk space is dependent on the size of your hard drive and what version of DOS your PC is running Up toa maximum of 30 megabytes hard disk space can be available for Access Manager data collection when using DOS 3 3 Newer versions of DOS for example DOS 5 0 will allow for proportional storage space depending on the size of the hard disk Access Manager 2000 User Manual Equipment Installation Note Verilink recommends that a 80 megabyte hard drive be used when running Access Manager Each alarm record uses 62 bytes of memory
390. that CRC errors are being received For SF D4 framing YES indicates that frame bit errors are being received BPV Errors No BPV error are not being received fro either the EQPT side or NET side DTE EQPT SPAN No Neither an RLB nor an ELB is in progress NET Looped EQPT side and either an LLB or PLB is in progress NET side ESF Framing toward Yes But since ESF toward the EQPT is NO the the NET framing toward the EQPT isSF B8ZS Encode No Neither the network NET nor the equipment EQPT is set for B8ZS line coding transmit direction B8ZS Decode No Neither the NET nor the EQPT is set for B8ZS decoding receive direction Regen Transmit CRC YEL AL Tran Enable No YEL AL Transcode No Yellow alarms are not currently being To transcoded from the network to the equipment or from the equipment to the network Note The single line 551VST List 1 A and List 2 also have an Enable Alarm Latch configuration showing whether the local BER alarm deactivates on clearing NO or stays on until manually cleared YES To view the current status for a AS2000 or ConnecT1 Plus circuit element Move the cursor to Status Element and press Enter A Circuit Status screen for the first circuit element appears Each type of circuit element has specific screen The circuit elements and their corresponding screens are as follows Access Manager
391. the selection Alarm Channel Protocol screen Edit Alarm Destination 2 TERSE MESSAGE Press ft number or ESC If you are using a serial or parallel printe select the PLAIN ENGLISH MESSAGE option This sends the entire alarm information in ASCII format The alarms are printed one alarm message per line If you are outputting to a serial port or disk file select the TERSE MESSAGE option This sends information in the following formats m the date time and node name alarm output in an ASCII format and a the alarm status in an ASCII formatted hexadecimal format Do not use this option with a serial or parallel printer 4 10 Access Manager 2000 User Manual LE Setting the performance data polling hour Configuring the site Note Refer to Appendix C Alarm Report Record Format for a description of the alarm printout format If your Access Manager includes Accumaster protocol compatibilit_ the Edit Alarm Destination screen includes a third option Accumaster Protocol If Accumaster Protocol is selected the alarms are sent to the Accumaster system This protocol uses flow control to hold off sending data to Accumaster when requested by Accumaster If the connection to Accumaster is disconnected alarms are stored in the Access Manager 2000 database until the Accumaster connection is re established at which time all uncleared alarms are sent to Accumaster Note The Accumaster Protocol option i
392. their corresponding On line Access sub menus are as follows e Ifyou selected a 551 VST type node you will see this screen On Line 551UST List 2 Element status display circuit element status Circuit status diag display circuit element status diag 1 Hour USER data display 1 hour USER performance data 1 Hour TELCO data display 1 hour TELCO performance data 24 Hour USER data display 24 hour USER performance data 24 Hour TELCO data display 24 hour TELCO performance data Bar chart USER display 24 hour USER performance data IXC TELCO bar chart display 24 hour TELCO performance data USER statistics display USER avail amp error free secs TELCO statistics display TELCO avail amp error free secs Reset USER registers reset USER performance registers Loopbacks activate deactivate loopback modes Press t or ist char Enter to select Esc to cancel 8 2 Access Manager 2000 User Manual Selecting a node e Ifyou selected an AS2000 type node you will see this screen On line AS28008 Display system configuration Access Range Select current Shelf and Plug Element Config Display circuit element config Circuit status diag Display circuit element status diag Status Element Display circuit element status USER Statistics Display USER avail amp error free secs TELCO Statistics Display TELCO avail amp error free secs Reset USER Registers Reset USER performance registers Perf Data Retrieve Retrieve USER performance registe
393. this option to YES for the circuit element The default setting is NO These options enable or disable an NCC CCC or TAC collection of near Retrieve Near En end or far end performance data Performance Data Retrieve Far En If you select YES for either option also press and then select the Data network and or EQP data registers to be retrieved The register types are NET User NET Additional and EQP The near end defaults are NET User YES NET Additional NO and EQP NO All far end defaults are NO 5 76 Access Manager 2000 User Manual Save Configuration to CSU Enable Alarm Reporting Configuration Options for AS2000 and ConnecTI1 Plus If you set the Retrieve Far End Data option to YES you must also set the Retrieve Near End Data option to YES and there must be a circuit built between the near end and far end circuit elements Do not set Retrieve Far End Data to YES at both the near end and far end circuit elements For example set Retrieve Far End Datato YES for the near end NCC CCC or TAC and set Retrieve Far End Data to NO for far end circuit element The defaults for these options is NO except near end Net Use whichis YES This option must be set to YES andthe Installed and Operational option must also be set to YES to enable Access Manager to configure the selected CSU circuit elements The options following Save Configuration to CSU are downloaded to the CSU circuit element when CF5 is pressed If this
394. tion follow these steps 1 7 The parent node of the near end circuit element must be installed and operational A direct or dial up connection to the host PC must be in place for the near end node DIU circuit elements can be configured if and only if the parent node is near end The near end circuit element must be installed and operational The parent node of the far end circuit element must be installed and operational The far end circuit element must be defined in the database A circuit must be defined between a near end circuit element and the far end circuit element to be configured The far end circuit element may now actually be accessed The Configuration AS2000 Plug screen has the same selections as the Configuration ConnecT1 Plus Plug screen To select the range of circuit elements Select the circuit element range 1 Starting from the Main Menu select Configuration The Configuration Menu appears Configuration revise node definitions Element revise circuit elements Circuit revise circuit definitions Route revise route definitions Press f or ist char Enter to select Esc to cancel Access Manager 2000 User Manual 5 47 Configuring the T1 Network 2 From this screen select Element The screen labeled Edit Element SelectParent Node now appears EDIT ELEMENT Select Parent Node Location Equipment Type Node Name AS 2000 551UST LIST 2
395. tion appears Events Choose archive option print event records Cwith delete option Archive copy event records to a disk file Cwith delete option Delete delete event records WITHOUT ARCHIVING Press f or ist char Enter to select Esc to cancel This screen has 3 options Print Archive and Delete Printing event records When you print all event records you can elect to retain or delete the printed records To print event records 1 In the Events Choose Archive Option screen select the Print option The screen labeled Select archive cutoff date appears showing the current date Select archive cutoff date Ending month CO1 thru 12 Ending day 1 thru 31 gt Ending year C4 digits Press F5 to accept date entered Press F2 to cancel archive 2 Enter the desired cutoff date and press CE5 to accept it All event log records up to midnight of the selected date are printed The printer as used in this context can be defined as a file on the hard disk in the Report Printer Definition screen 4 30 Access Manager 2000 User Manual Reviewing and archiving events logs 3 After all selected records are printed a warning message appears prompting you to confirm deletion of all records up to the chosen cutoff date WARNING Delete all records up to the date specified Press y to confirm or any other key to cancel 4 Choose one of the following actions e To delete all records up
396. tions Level 1 Read information Information can be retrieved but registers cannot be reset and working parameters and options cannot be modified Level 2 Read with limited parameter modifications Allows Level 1 capabilities plus non service affecting functions and parameter modifications such as resetting performance registers and enabling circuit element retrieval of performance data On color monitors the selected screens show parameters that can be modified in blue and parameters that cannot be modified in red On monochrome monitors the parameters that can be modified appear as highlighted characters and the parameters that cannot appear in normal characte mode Level 3 Read with parameter modifications Allows Level 1 and 2 functions plus service affecting functions for example loopback or testing and parameter modifications for example network element configuration Level 4 System manager Level 1 through 3 functions plus addition and deletion of users changing passwords and access levels performing all system installation and archive functions and shutting down the system Access Manager doe not allow the system to be modified in such a way that no system manager access level exists From the Utilities Menu select User Definitions The screen labeled Revise User Definitions appears Revise User Definitions add new user definition Edit edit user definition Delete delete u
397. tistics ____ Reset User Registers ___ Performance Data Retrieve ___ Barchart Display Loopbacks L Select Test Note The actual commands listed in the On line menu depend on which type of CSU or multiline node is accessed The following commands are typically found in this menu Display For a multiline node this command allows you to view the multiline node s hardware configuration status controller firmware and hardware revisions Access Range Access CSU This command allows you to select a network circuit element For multiline CSU nodes you can access either a single CSU or a range of sequential CSUs For Access System 2000 nodes you can access NCCs TACs or DIUs Access Manager 2000 User Manual Access Manager 2000 Main Menu Element Configuration and Status Element Element Status These commands show the status configuration firmware and hardware revisions of the CSUs selected by accessing a CSU range For Access System 2000 nodes the NCC TAC and DIU configuration status may also be viewed Circuit Status Diagram This command allows you to access and graphically display the near end CSU and associated far end CSU to which a DS1 circuit is connected User Statistics This command computes and displays the percentages of available and error free seconds plus other user performance data for the selected CSU and far end CSU Telco Statistics This command computes and displays the perc
398. tivated by the RLB timer This prevents lockout during far end initiated loopback via the ESF Data Link The default value for this time out option varies depending on the type of CSU used The RLB time out is in effect regardless of whether the loopback to the near end or to the far end was initiated locally at the CSU or remotely via Access Manager CAUTION Performing a far end RLB locks out any messages from the ESF Facility Data Link The CSU front panel EQPT LOOPED LED illuminates while the RLB is in effect For an NCC 2020 CCC 1020 TAC 2010 and TAC 1010 the EQPT LED flashes amber during an RLB The 551 VST List 1 or 1 A and 4016 List 1 do not have the RLB and respond with the error message REQUEST REJECTED BY NODE OF CIRCUIT E EN H T ELB Equipment Loopback When an equipment loopback ELB is in effect the signal from the equipment is looped back to the equipment on the EQPT side of the CSU Since the looped signal does not pass through the CSU circuitry the ELB is useful in testing the operation and connection of the EQPT Most CSUs can be configured to pass the EQPT signal intact to the network or to send unframed All ONEs i e AIS to the network during loopback The EQPT Looped LED on the CSU front panel lights while the ELB is in effect For an NCC 2020 CCC 1020 TAC 2010 and TAC 1010 the STATUS LED flashes amber during an ELB Before setting up any loopbacks you need
399. to verify a timing issue if the CSU is used with a DIU You must determine the appropriate CSU timing for that loopback For example avoid tests with no timing source when an LLB is set and the network does not supply timing then NET timing the unlooped CSU is invalid and introduces errors in the test To set loopbacks Access Manager 2000 User Manual 8 43 Monitoring and Troubleshooting Access Manager 8 44 1 When you get the On line Access sub menu select the Loopbacks option The Specify Circuit Element to Receive Loopback screen appears Specify Circuit Element to Receive Loopback Request 7 Shelf number PLUG number 1 Press F5 when selections are completed 2 oe See Oe T Single line CSUs do not present this screen e CSU Shelf Number Enter the shelf number of the plug in CSU circuit element to receive the loopback request Only AS2000 or ConnecT1 Plus CSUs and CSUs in shelves controlled by an NC E havea CSU Shelf Number option e CSU Plug Number Enter the slot number of the plug in CSU circuit element to receive the loopback request Press the CE5 key to enter the CSU shelf and slot numbers A Select Loopback Activity screen appears e Ifyou are working on an AS2000 or ConnecT1 Plus CSU you will see the following menu Select CSU Loopback Activity Activate repeater loop back CRLB Activate Line loop back LLB Deactivate Network loop back CPLB and LLB gt Send Inband loop up code
400. uipment Type NEW YORK SALES VERILINK HQ AS26086 Press Home End PgUp PgDn t or to browse Enter to select Esc to cancel 4 Position the cursor at the node you wish to edit by using the Qang Qa Gaup app and or the Arrow keys on the keypad Press to select that node An Edit Node Definition menu no appears 5 Make the required changes as described in the Adding a Node section above 6 After making the changes press CF5 to accept them or CE2 to abort editing Ifthe Node Installed and Operational option is set to YES Access Manager immediately connects to the node and downloads the new data into it If the connection is not successful if the query path is NONE or if Node Installed and Operational is NO obviously the changes are not downloaded to the node however these changes are saved in Access Manager s database of the node s configuration for future downloading Ifthe Node Installed and Operational option was YES before editing and you did not change it itremains YES See Access Manager 2000 User Manual 5 41 Configuring the T1 Network Deleting a node the preceding section Node Access Failure if Access Manager indicates a failure to connect to the Node 7 After the database is updated if these changes have not been downloaded to the node the database configuration of the edited node is displayed However if these changes have been successfully downloaded the Element Configurat
401. uit Elements ssisiiissieiissesescirossensiois terios veior siisii 1 8 Dual Line and Multiline Circuit Elements 2 0 0 0 ee cceecceeeceeesteeeeneeeees 1 9 Een T A EAEE ie eee ee Ae R E eet as Fe Ne 1 9 ROU E ttt Het ii ea ee ee aR ie Me 1 10 Access Manager Connections sisese erise eseri s uate rE Er EE a iko eeri ss 1 10 PROCESS A E E E EEE EEE EE E E E E 1 11 Access Manager 2000 Main Menu ceeeeeeseceeeeceseeseecseceeceseeseeeeceeseseseeecaecaeeseeatens 1 11 Wtities as So wk tie itietel te tintin Pi E A ie tied 1 14 Date e a E EET tats eaotad he Adenia ete Sih 1 14 Trnstallati oii 222s Aea EEE EEE A E E A EE 1 14 Wser DIAAN a AA E E 1 14 Event LOS scion Si hi knee na EEEE E E REO E E EEE EEE ES 1 15 Code Download r a tea es 1 15 Alam Status s e tel ete a E PARA eke 1 15 Clear ee EEE E E E A A ee 1 15 DGactivate cok a a E ee ede Sele 1 16 Views Actve sien niin toristesiete aethecl E Reece aces 1 16 TAst ACG i EE E eo Goa ht eA aie a 1 16 PrntcAll E E E ae iite ot Pata E Mehl ite 1 16 ATCHIVE 25 E tt eth ne eee a inde ee Re 1 16 Configuration cies isio ii E EE tees E madera a nea a 1 16 NOGes sai esse kA aS SS eh Ea es 1 17 Circuit eana n sitet sitet An A E ieee hea sects bees 1 17 GGITCUI Es Steet eet ile A RL SS lee Be 1 17 PONE nt se a ee 1 17 On line ACCESS 2iicas esc Haha E ee E AA 1 17 Display scicssiced desyesasseds sea ssgsteshdsl TT 1 18 Access Range Access CSU ceseessscseseeceeeeeeeceneeceeeesaeceeeen
402. ultiline circuit element plug in modules with which Access Manager interfaces are as follows 4016R Plug in CSU module in 551VST MLS shelves 4016 List 1 Plug in CSU module in 551VST ML List 1 or 2 shelves 4016 List 2 Plug in CSU module in 551VST ML List 1 or 2 shelves CCC 1020 Plug in CSU module in ConnecT1 Plus shelves it can also function as the node for ConnecT1 Plus shelves TAC 1010 Plug in CSU module in ConnecT1 Plus nodes DIU 1130 Plug in module in ConnecT1 Plus shelves providing high speed data features TIU 1850 Plug in module in ConnecT1 Plus shelves providing timing from external clock for interface between DIUs and CSUs NCC 2020 Plug in CSU module in Access System 2000 shelves it can also function as the node for AS2000 shelves TAC 2010 Plug in CSU module in Access System 2000 nodes DIU 2130 Plug in module in Access System 2000 shelves providing high speed data features DIU 2132 Plug in module in Access System 2000 shelves for Switched Multi megabit Data Service DIU 2140 Plug in module in Access System 2000 shelves providing subrate digital data service feature TIU 2850 Plug in module in Access System 2000 shelves providing timing from external clock for interface between DIUs and CSUs Refer to the hardware manuals for more information on these plug in modules A circuit is the combination of any two network CSU circuit elements and their interconnecting DS1 facility which have Access Manager acce
403. uring Access Manager 4 4 When a number of Access Managers have access to a given node the node needs to know who it s talking to To do this you need to identify each Access Manager by assigning ita Manager Type An Access Manager can be assigned one of three Manager Types PR MAR SECONDAR or TECHNICIAN You would assign the types PRIMARY and SECONDAR to the two Access Managers which are to receive alarms You would assign the Manager Type TECHNICIAN to an Access Manager that is not designated as one of the alternate alarm paths and is dialing in only to do diagnostics or troubleshooting from a remote location When a node controller sends an alarm to a PRIMARY or SECONDARY Manager Type it subsequently deletes the alarm from its buffer When a node controller sends an alarm toa TECHNICIAN Manager Type it retains the alarm in its buffer until the diagnostics session is over and it has been able to send the alarm to the PRIMARY and or SECONDARY Access Manager To differentiate the site 1 From the Main Menu go to the Utilities Menu 2 From the Utilities Menu select the Installation option 3 From the subsequent screen select the Site option The following screen will appear Edit Site Information arabe Gis NEE AEA NOT YET DEFINED Manager Type F8 Primary Press F5 to save definition You ll need to assigna Site Name and Manager Type Until you as
404. us Review Alarm Log Database screen now appears From this screen select Deactivate The Deactivate Select Alarm to Deactivate screen now appears Follow these steps to select a date and time range through which alarm records are deactivated Press CE8 The Enter Date Time Range for Alarm Deactivation screen appears alarm deactivation month 1 thru 12 To month lt 81 thru 12 day year hour 1 thru 31 To day by deere eid vetore y Ted to year c thru 23 To hour 1 thru 31 c thru 23 Minute C thru 59 To minute lt 8 thru 59 second thru 59 To second thru 59 Press F5 to accept range entered Press FZ to cancel and return to menu The date and time range is displayed from the oldest alarm record in the database to the current time Change the date and time to the range you want to deactivate To select all the alarms within the range entered press the CF5 key Or press CF2 to abort To deactivate the alarm reports in the selected range press Enter Or press F2 to abort deactivation If you pressed Enter a prompt appears asking you to confirm that you want to deactivate the selected alarms To deactivate the alarms type Y Pressing any other key cancels deactivation of the selected alarms Note The alarm records selected by date and time are not shown on the screen as they were
405. valent to the DS1 line performance requirements for Digital Data Service DDS which has an error free seconds requirement of 99 5 and an availability of 99 9 ENDS Customer Premise CP to Central Office CO access This filter performs a 24 hour data analysis based on the standard tariff of 98 75 error free seconds and 99 925 availability CSCPCP Customer Premise to Customer Premise end to end short circuit length less than 250 airline miles This filter performs a 24 hour data analysis based on the standard tariff of 97 4 error free seconds and 99 7 availability MCPCP Customer Premise to Customer Premise end to end medium circuit length 250 to 1000 airline miles This filter performs a 24 hour data analysis based on the standard tariff of 97 1 error free seconds and 99 7 availability LCPCP Customer Premise to Customer Premise end to end long circuit length more than 1000 airline miles This filter performs a 24 hour data analysis based on the standard tariff of 96 8 error free seconds and 99 7 availability TCOCO Central Office to Central Office interoffice short circuit length less than 250 airline miles This filter performs a data analysis based on the standard tariff of 99 9 error free seconds and 99 85 availability OCOCO Central Office to Central Office interoffice medium circuit length 250 to 1000 airline miles This filter performs a 24 hour data analysis based on the standard tari
406. verify that the NET LED is solid yellow LLB is activated Press to return to the On line AS2000 screen Choose the Select Test option and press Enter Enter the Shelf number and Plug slot number of the NCC or TAC and press the function key The Select CSUTest Activity Menu appears Choose the Send QRSS Test Pattern option and press Enter The Test Current Node screen appears Enter the following settings and press Enter e Test Duration FOREVER e To Network or Equipment N Network e Test From Far End N No Type Y to send the test signal when the test warning screen appears The Select CSUTest Activity screen appears again Access Manager 2000 User Manual a _ 34 _ 35 _ 36 137 _ 38 _ 39 _ 40 _ 41 _ 42 _ 43 CSU acceptance testing Verify that the STAT LED is lit yellow on the near end and far end CSUs NCC or TAC indicating that the test is in progress If the STAT LED flashes red and yellow at either end the test has failed CSU is detecting errors in the looped QRSS signal Check the T1 circuit between the two CSUs The source of the failure is either in the circuit between the CSUs or in either CSU Replace the CSUs and re route the circuit as required then repeat the acceptance testing procedure Select the View Test Status Results option If the screen shows some Errors the test has failed Check the T1 circuit between the two CSUs Press to
407. w Alarm Log Database screen appears 2 From this screen select Archive A screen labeled Inactive Alarms Choose Archive Option appears Inactive Alarms Choose archive option print alarm records Cuith delete option Archive copy records to a disk file Cwith delete optiom Delete delete inactive alarm records WITHOUT ARCHIVING Press f or ist char Enter to select Esc to cancel Four options are available for deactivated alarms a The Archive option copies deactivated alarm records to a disk file The Print option prints active and deactivated alarm records a The Archive List option prints deactivated alarm records a The Delete option deletes deactivated alarm records without copying or printing Ss The archived alarm log records are in a format compatible with Alarm Log Record format E a dBase III Plus or similar database file formats Lotus 1 2 3 or similar spreadsheet file formats The format uses a comma delimited ASCII record format The maximum file size is 65 kilobytes If necessary multiple files are created and identified by the file name extension The filename format is month of archiv day of archive year of archive y ALyymmdd XXX filename extension weet aenal pales fen ANA 4A ANN 6 8 Access Manager 2000 User Manual LE Deleting inactive alarms Archiving inactive alarms Note The month date and year used in the archive file name are those selected in the Arch
408. w fully supported 12 New alarms for AM2000 CSUs and DIUs 13 The transaction file INSTALL LOG is now created in the destination directory during the install procedure It contains information such as user selected directories disk space calculations database revision and any error messages that may have appeared Please refer to this file when problems occur during the installation process Conventions used in this guide The way text appears This section defines conventions used in this manual The body text of this manual appears in Times regular no bold no italics font By varying the font and format we emphasize important information This section will provide you with a clear description of what the different formats mean Italicized and Bold Text Italicized text and bold text is used to highlight key concepts or words which help you understand instructions or applications See the following examples a Like a LAN Large Area Network SMDS is a connectionless service Courier Bold Text Courier bold text is used to identify fields or options and any characters you need to type and enter For example xxii Access Manager 2000 User Manual Special Symbols and Notices Conventions used in this guide m Select SMDS and press Enter Special symbols are used to draw your attention to particular kinds of information All of these symbols are described in this section of the manual Please read all of the
409. when the other side is looped back For example if a line side line loopback LLB is activated when this option is set for AIS then AIS is transmitted to the EQP when this option is set to YES default setting If the option is set to NO the received signal from the network is transmitted to the EQP during an LLB 5 82 Access Manager 2000 User Manual LE EQP Distance EQP Equipment Framing Format EE Enable EQP Side B8ZS Regenerate CRC 6 to EQP Configuration Options for AS2000 and ConnecTI1 Plus Note An RLB always passes the signal to the network regardless of this option setting This option allows you to select the amount of equalization required in cabling feet for the transmit signal on the equipment EQP side to meet the DSX 1 interface requirement Press to see the available values then select the value corresponding to the distance from the CSU to the equipment or DSX 1 bay The default setting is 0 to 133 feet Use in this option to select the framing format used on the equipment EQP side of the CSU The options are SF Superframe ESF Extended Superframe and UNFRAMED The default is SF If the CSU is used with one or more non drop and insert DIU 2130s DIU 1130s and or DIU2140s this option is ignored by the CSU Note If EQP Framing Format is Unframed then the NET Framing Format must also be Unframed Set this option to YES if the equipment EQP uses B8ZS line coding
410. y this criterion EQP Name Type the name of the equipment EQP connected to I O Port 1 of the DIU This name can have up to 25 characters including spaces After entering this name press the right arrow key and do the same for the equipment on I O Port 2 EQP SER Type the serial number or other identification of the equipment EQP associated with the port Move to the next column and enter the serial number of this port s equipment Each entry can be up to 25 characters This parameter is informational only EQP Interface Enter the type of interface V 35 RS449 or RS530 of each data port This parameter is informational only Access Manager 2000 User Manual 5 95 Configuring the T1 Network EQP Speed Type the transmission speed for each port on the next line of the menu This rate must be 56 kbps 64 kbps or a multiple of either rate The total aggregate rate for the data ports of all DIU 2130s and DIU 1130s connected to a CSU cannot exceed 1 536 Mbps This parameter is informational only 64K Mode If you set this option to YES each channel of the DS1 line carries 64 kbps of data If you set this option to NO default setting each DSO channel carries 56 kbps of data If the data rate of your equipment is a multiple of 56 kbps set this option to NO If it is a multiple of 64 kbps set this option to YES Loop If you enable this option Y the DIU responds to loopback commands Scramble The customer da
411. ype Press f number or ESC 2 Place the cursor on the desired choice and press or press the selection number If you use a name other than LPT1 or LPT2 and then press 5 to save the options NOT APPLICABLE will appear in the Printer Type field Access Manager 2000 User Manual 4 7 Configuring Access Manager Configuring the on line data printer Specifying the alarm destination Is Printer 80 Column Wide The Is Printer 80 Column Wide data entry field appears in the Edit Report Printer Configuration screen If you enter Y the type may be compressed to print 132 columns on 8 5 inch paper if supported by the printer type Only those reports over 80 columns wide are compressed Otherwise the printer is set for 80 columns only The number of lines is always 66 When you are satisfied with the menu options and want to save them and exit from the Installation Menu press F5 Or press CF2 to exit this menu without saving the changes Records beyond the quota are deleted from the database when the CF5 key is pressed The on line printer is the printer that prints the performance analysis and bar charts from information in the elements cards themselves This information can be viewed from in the On line Access Menu To configure the report printer a From the Installation Menu select On line The Edit On line Printer Configuration screen appears Edit Online Data Printer Configuration Printer filenam

Access Manager 2000 User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents